General catalogue

General catalogue

11

Dear Friends and Partners, We are pleased to present the new General Catalogue 2010 / 2011. For the first time containing the new Invicta 3 TP&N and Panelboard ranges, along with our new wiring accessories range sollysta. Hager stands for sustainability and our E3 Initiative is an excellent example of this. Fully aware of our responsibility to both society and the environment, we are proud to make a contribution to the better use of the limited available resources. It is a belief that plays a vital role in all our new developments. The three Es, by the way, stand for “ethics, environment and eco-efficiency”. Behind each category there is an actual catalogue of measures to which Hager is expressly committed, measures including: Investors in People certification (IIP), an employee development programme; the United Nations Global Compact initiative, which the Hager Group joined in 2007; and the environmental standard ISO 14000, to which most of our sites are already certified to. In this respect, ecological development and production technologies are given as much careful consideration as to the products themselves that make a contribution to make better use of the resource electricity. Innovation, customer proximity, simplicity and reliability are the very basis of the Hager brand. We keep in close contact with our customers, regularly surveying their wishes and needs before incorporating that feedback into the development of our new systems. The same applies to this catalogue which we have designed for you as a practical tool. Why not have a browse and find out for yourself? Best regards

Daniel Hager

Consumer Units Enclosures Commercial Distribution Protection Devices Modular Devices tebis TX sollysta Junction Boxes & Ceiling Accessories Metalclad & Weather Plus klik.LDS logisty Service

Consumer Units | Flush Consumer Units Weather Proof Consumer Units | Skeleton Units Mini Gamma | Vector II | Volta Vega | Enclosures | Orion Plus A Boards | Invicta 3 Type B Distribution Boards Invicta 3 Panelboards | Fuse Combination Switches MCBs | RCCBs | RCBOs | HRC Fuse Carriers Motor Starters | Earth Fault Relays | MCCBs Switch Disconnectors | Relays | Contactors Time Switches | Delay Timers | Transformers | Meters Room Controllers | Input Products | Output Products Push Buttons & Remote Controls Wall Switches | Socket Outlets | Cooker Control Units Outlet Plates | Telephone & Data | TV & Satellite | Grid Downlighter Junction Box | Maintenance Free Junction Box Lampholders | Safety Pendant Sets Switches | Sockets | Bell Push Fused Connection Unit Marshalling Boxes | Occupancy Sensors | Plugs Socket Outlets | IP66 Outdoor Enclosure

For multiple apartments

Guides | Technical Data | Numerical Index

Consumer Units Enclosures Commercial Distribution Protection Devices Modular Devices

Energy distribution

tebis TX sollysta Junction Boxes & Ceiling Accessories Metalclad & Weather Plus klik.LDS

Wiring accessories & Building automation

The complete system from one source Hager is the specialist for electrical installations in residential and commercial sectors, you can receive everything from one source: Systems and Solutions - high quality, reliable and easy to install.

4

Security

logisty

To learn more about our systems and solutions, please get in touch. Customer Services and Sales Hotline 0870 240 2400 Call our Customer Services Centre for [email protected] all your national sales enquiries. Customer Services and Sales Faxline 0870 240 0400 Technical Helpline Technical Engineers offer both national and local support.

0870 607 6677 [email protected]

Technical Faxline

01952 675557

Hager Online Visit our website for up to date news on Hager and for general brand information or alternatively e-mail us.

www.hager.co.uk [email protected]

Northern Ireland 028 9077 3310 www.hager.ie

www.hager.co.uk 5

6

Continuous innovation The continual innovation of products and systems is an important activity of Hager, in the pursuit of new designs and improvements to help customers with their applications and developments.

Customer Driven

Research and Development

The use of innovation and new technologies at Hager are always customer-driven. Every year, Hager evaluates thousands of customer contacts, resulting in detailed knowledge of customers’ needs.

The strong demand for innovation and product enhancements is indicative of the customer oriented policy of Hager with nearly 80 per cent of products and systems less than five years old. This high degree of innovation enables customers to continually meet new challenges more effectively.

Based on this knowledge, Hager develops innovative solutions to improve ease of installation, ease of use, modularity and durability to guarantee the highest quality throughout.

Today, Hager employs about 850 engineers in research and development (R&D) and invests about five per cent of its revenue in this activity. Hager permanently strives to offer innovative and value-added systems. Every year, Hager applies for about 170 new patents.

7

check.hager

Counterfeiting: a plague gaining ground... The counterfeiting of products is gaining ground throughout the world. In 2002 counterfeiting represented 7% of the worlds trade, this has now risen to 10%. Counterfeiting does not only concern luxury items, but also covers electrical products where peoples safety is endangered! Counterfeit products do not bring any guarantee of safety or quality for our customers. These products can be dangerous, contain inappropriate materials or be of poor quality. In certain cases only the external appearance is preserved and the vital functions are removed to reduce the costs!

8

Let’s act together!

1 2 3 4

Authentication Process All of our circuit breakers, switches and earth leakage circuit breakers have been assigned a unique identification number which can be located on the side of the product. The identification number from each product is then stored in a protected data base. If it doesn’t have a number please contact us immediately.

Dedicated Website Our customers can access this database to check the authenticity of a Hager product by going to https://check.hager. com The website will check the validity of the identification number on the product and confirm if the product is an authentic Hager product or a suspected counterfeit product, this result will be immediate.

Action Plan Check the identification number by going to https://check.hager.com. If check.hager identifies the product as a counterfeit contact Hager on 0870 240 2400 along with the details of the wholesaler from which the product was purchased. We will then take all the appropriate information and collect the product for analysis. If necessary we will take appropriate legal action.

Ethical Charter As a manufacturer we commit to: • Provide our customers with the means to check the authenticity of our products. • To communicate the results of any investigations. Our distributors commit: • To make sure that products purchased are not counterfeit products. • To inform the manufacturers of any offers of counterfeit products. • To support the actions of Manufacturers.

To ensure customers can check the authenticity of our products we have set up a simple and rapid procedure called:

https://check.hager.com Check hager is a detection weapon to fight against counterfeiting.

Every circuit breaker, switch and earth leakage circuit breaker has a sole identification number recorded by Hager in our database. Worldwide access to https://check.hager.com by any customer provides a quick and easy way of establishing the authenticity of products. The information is in real time.

9

A service geared to your on site needs From pre-assembled standard distribution units to bespoke composite TP&N boards, and plug in distribution boards Hager can provide the solution and we will deliver to site to an agreed deadline and to specification. All the power of an experienced design engineering team and an ISO 9001:2000 manufacturing plant is just a telephone call away. As client requirements become more sophisticated, demands on electrical installation designs are greater. Many electrical distribution solutions require something that cannot be purchased off the shelf. Whether it is an unusual configuration or simply speed on site that is an issue, Hager’s tailored solutions supplies the answer. This tailored solutions service puts the power of our design engineers at your fingertips. You give us the specification and we will deliver what you need with the peace of mind of factory assured quality to ISO 9001:2000.

10

Metering The Hager lighting and power meter board is a compact solution to meet the demands of energy metering within non-dwelling buildings. The standard power and lighting board is available in this catalogue and comes in two variants to meet the majority of applications. However for special applications we also offer our full-tailored solutions design and build service. This service can also provide additional features such as data logging and web connectivity for remote meter reading.

1

Pre-assembled standard distribution board Factory assembly of standard distribution boards with standard incoming and outgoing devices. Providing the installer with all of the products factory assembled and ready for cabling.

2

Tailored Consumer Units Factory assembly of non-standard consumer units, special configurations in standard enclosures or metal DIN rail enclosures. Providing an exact product that meets the requirements of your particular installation needs. Pluggable and metered consumer units are also an option. With pluggable consumer units circuit breakers are wired to sockets fitted into the enclosure enabling final circuit cabling to be simply plugged in.

3

Bespoke composite system Factory prepared distribution boards ready for assembly on site with apertures pre-cut to allow cable access between the various enclosures, combining Panelboards and TP&N boards into bespoke composite panels. Standard metal distribution boards designed to accommodate customer specified OEM equipment.

Tailored solutions

To learn more about our tailored solutions offer, please contact us: Tailored Solutions Contact Number Call our Customer Services Centre for all your national sales enquiries.

01952 675600 [email protected]

Tailored Solutions Faxline

0870 240 2400

11

Consumer Units Designed with standards in mind The Hager consumer unit was developed with a strong aesthetic design in anticipation of Part M of the building regulations in addition to integrating other unique features as a result of feedback from homeowners, electrical contractors and house builders. With pre-configured and configurable variants available, choice comes as standard. A full metal DIN rail allows devices to be fixed securely and a snap-able busbar allows contractors to choose the configuration. Our MCB’s feature a DIN clip allowing devices to be removed without the need to remove the busbar from other devices.

Consumer Units

DIN Rail Enclosures

1.6

Switch Disconnector Incomer

1.7

RCCB Incomer

1.8

Split Load, Single Time Delayed RCCB Incomer

1.9

Split Load, Twin RCCB Incomer

1.10

Split Load, Twin RCCB Incomer with Unprotected Ways

1.11

Split Load, Twin RCCB Incomer with 6 Amp RCBO

1.12

Split Load, Twin RCCB Incomer with 40 Amp RCCB

1.13

Twin and Multi Tariff

1.14

Skeleton Units

1.15

Single Phase and Switch Neutral

1.15

Consumer Unit Accessories

1.16

Garage Units

1.17

IP55 Weather Proof

1.17

Surface Mounted Consumer Unit Designed to compliment and integrate Our consumer unit has been designed to fit in today’s home environment. Whether used to house electrical distribution or smart control devices, the units colour and form have been designed to complement and integrate into its surroundings. Through in depth research with contractors, we have incorporated a number of innovative features that enable time saving and easy installation. Multiple fixing points, no restrictions under the DIN rail and cable entries positioned for easy access to devices, all add up to a spacious unit which is quick and easy to install.

1 6 3 5

2 7 4

The advantages for you:

Technical data:

• Easy and fast unit to fit.

• Multiple cable entries / knockouts on the top, bottom and rear.

• Largest amount of cabling space and in all the right places.

• Total ways from 1 to 20.

• Easy to remove cable entries safely.

• Switch disconnector rating 100 Amp.

• Top wall removes and reseals to IP4X.

• RCCB rating 63A 30mA or 80A 30mA.

• Fewer tools required to fit. • Integrated spirit level allows for simple levelling.

Quick tips 1 2 3 4

Top wall

Snap-able bus bar

Removes easily to provide cable access and re-seals to IP4X using the two foam strips provided.

One less tool required and quick and simple configuration.

Terminal bars

Plenty of space

Top mounted to allow for easy cable dressing, fully rated to 100 Amp.

DIN rail Providing you with easy configuration and fitting of control devices.

Integrated spirit level Missing tools no more!

6 7 8

Best in class cabling space, top side and back.

Cutouts The rear cutouts are optimised for their size and position allowing you to keep the final installation neat and tidy.

Accessories A full range of accessories available including this quick fit meter tail kit (see page 1.18).

Flush Consumer Unit Faster, safer, stronger installation Our range of flush fit consumer units are up to 25 percent faster to fit in both solid and partition walls. For partition walls, a flange and frame clamps the unit to the wall. There is no need for separate fixing, the unit simply slots into the prepared hole and the integral fixing screws are tightened. With solid and brick walls, the installer refits the flange to the sides of the back box and uses it as a fixing bracket to secure the base unit to the wall.

4 1

2 6

3

5


Technical data:

• Easy and fast unit to fit.

• Multiple cable entries / knockouts on the top, bottom and rear including 32mm and 25mm knockouts for SWA cables.

• Best cable space - largest amount and in all the right places. • Easy to remove cable entries safely. • Fast fit partition wall fixing. • Optimised positions for cable entries and terminations. • Fewer tools required to fit. • Integrated spirit level allows for simple levelling.

• Total ways from 12 to 18. • Switch disconnector rating 100 Amp. • RCCB rating 63A 30mA or 80A 30mA. • Stud and block wall fixing.

Quick tips 1 2 3

Knockouts The unit includes a large choice of knockouts for cabling.

Cable entry The large choice of rear cable entries can be rotated, knocked out and removed completely giving a great choice of cable entries.

Incomer cable entry The back box can be fitted either way to give a choice of either 25mm or 32mm knockout entry for the incomer.

4 5 6

Flange and clamp Innovative flange and clamp design allows for quick fitting to plaster board walls.

Fixing to brick Removing the flange from the top of the unit and fixing it to the sides allows for easy fixing to brick walls without the worry of bricks breaking.

Fixing points Fixing points can be easily accessed through the front sides and rear of the base.

Consumer Units DIN Rail Enclosures Insulated and metal DIN rail enclosures, 1 row from 4 to 22 modules. Surface mounted enclosures, with a rigid chassis, housing a DIN rail.

Supplied with marking labels and instructions.

For complete accessories list see page 1.17.

Options: • Keylock • Plain or glazed door

For insulated and metal consumer unit dimensions see page 1.19.

Complies with BS EN 62208-3 Annex 2A.

DIN Rail - Insulated Description

Enclosures size

Cat ref. Plain door

Cat ref. Glazed door

8 Module DIN Rail Enclosure 12 Module DIN Rail Enclosure 16 Module DIN Rail Enclosure 22 Module DIN Rail Enclosure

3 4 5 6

VC008 VC012 VC016 VC022

VC008G VC012G VC016G VC022G

Description

Enclosure size

Cat ref. Plain door


4 Module DIN Rail Enclosure 8 Module DIN Rail Enclosure 12 Module DIN Rail Enclosure 16 Module DIN Rail Enclosure 22 Module DIN Rail Enclosure

2 3 4 5 6

VH004 VH008 VH008G VH012 VH012G VH016 VH016G VH022 VH022G

VC008G

DIN Rail - Metal

VH008

1.6

General Catalogue 2012 • Consumer Units

Insulated and metal, switch disconnector incomer enclosures, 1 row from 1 to 20 outgoing ways. Surface mounted enclosures, with a rigid chassis, housing a 63 Amp or 100 Amp Switch Disconnector.

Consumer Units

Consumer Units Switch Disconnector Incomer Supplied with marking labels, busbar and instructions.





Switch Disconnector Incomer - Insulated

VC206

Description

Enclosure size

Cat ref. Plain door


1 Way 63A Switch Disconnector Incomer 2 Way 63A Switch Disconnector Incomer 4 Way 63A Switch Disconnector Incomer 6 Way 63A Switch Disconnector Incomer 4 Way 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer 6 Way 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer 8 Way 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer 10 Way 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer 12 Way 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer 14 Way 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer 16 Way 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer 20 Way 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer

1 1 3 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6

VC201 VC202 VC204 VC206 VC206G VC104 VC104G VC106 VC106G VC108 VC108G VC110 VC110G VC112 VC112G VC114 VC114G VC116 VC116G VC120 VC120G

Description

Enclosure size

Cat ref. Plain door

1 Way 63A Switch Disconnector Incomer 2 Way 63A Switch Disconnector Incomer 4 Way 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer 6 Way 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer 8 Way 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer 10 Way 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer 14 Way 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer 16 Way 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer 20 Way 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer

1 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 6

VH201 VH202 VH104 VH104G VH106 VH106G VH108 VH108G VH110 VH110G VH114 VH114G VH116 VH116G VH120 VH120G

Switch Disconnector Incomer - Metal Cat ref. Glazed door

VH106G

Customer Services Hotline • 01952 675612 Technical Support Helpline • 01952 675689

1.7

Consumer Units RCCB Incomer Insulated and metal, RCCB incomer enclosures, 1 row from 1 to 18 outgoing ways. Surface mounted enclosures, with a rigid chassis, housing a 40, 63 or 100A RCCB.

Supplied with marking labels, busbar and instructions.





RCCB Incomer - Insulated Description

Enclosure size

Cat ref. Plain door

2 Way 40A 30mA RCCB incomer 3 Way 63A 30mA RCCB incomer 4 Way 63A 30mA RCCB incomer 6 Way 63A 30mA RCCB incomer 8 Way 63A 30mA RCCB incomer 4 Way 100A 30mA RCCB incomer 8 Way 100A 30mA RCCB incomer 14 Way 100A 30mA RCCB incomer

1 3 3 3 4 3 4 5

VC402H VC403H VC404H VC406H VC408H VC304H VC308H VC314H

Description

Enclosure size

Cat ref. Plain door

4 Way 63A 30mA RCCB incomer 6 Way 63A 30mA RCCB incomer 8 Way 63A 30mA RCCB incomer 4 Way 100A 30mA RCCB incomer 6 Way 100A 30mA RCCB incomer 8 Way 100A 30mA RCCB incomer 18 Way 100A 30mA RCCB incomer

3 3 4 3 3 4 6

VH404H VH406H VH408H VH304H VH306H VH308H VH318H

VC404H

RCCB Incomer - Metal

1.8


Consumer Units

Consumer Units Split Load, Single Time Delayed RCCB Incomer Insulated and metal, 1 row 12 outgoing way enclosures.



Surface mounted enclosures, with a rigid chassis, housing a Switch Disconnector and Time Delayed RCCB.




Split Load 100A Switch plus 100mA Time Delayed RCCB Incomer - Insulated Description

Enclosure size


12 Way Split Load Configurable 100A 100mA Time Delayed RCCB 63A 30mA RCCB

5

VC712TG


1.9

Consumer Units Split Load, Twin RCCB Incomer Insulated and metal, split load and configurable enclosures, 1 row from 10 to 16 modules. Surface and Flush mounted enclosures, with a rigid chassis, housing a Switch Disconnector and RCCB.





For insulated and metal consumer unit dimensions see page 1.19. For flush consumer unit dimensions see page 1.20.

Split Load 100A Switch plus Twin RCCB Incomer - Insulated

VC766H1G

VC816C

Description

Enclosure size

Cat ref. Plain door


6 Way Split Load 3+3 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB 10 Way Split Load 5+5 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB 10 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB 12 Way Split Load 6+6 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB 12 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB 14 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB 16 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB 10 Way Split Load 5+5 100A Switch 2 x 80A 30mA RCCB 12 Way Split Load 6+6 100A Switch 2 x 80A 30mA RCCB 16 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 2 x 80A 30mA RCCB

4

VC733H1 -

5

VC755H1

VC755H1G

5

VC710C1

VC710C1G

6

VC766H1

VC766H1G

6

VC712C1

VC712C1G

6

VC714C1

VC714C1G

6

VC716C1

VC716C1G

5

VC855H -

6

VC866H -

6

VC816C -

Split Load 100A Switch plus Twin RCCB Incomer - Metal Description

Enclosure size

Cat ref. Plain door

10 Way Split Load 5+5 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB 12 Way Split Load 6+6 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB 12 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB 14 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB 10 Way Split Load 5+5 100A Switch 2 x 80A 30mA RCCB 12 Way Split Load 6+6 100A Switch 2 x 80A 30mA RCCB

5

VH755H1

6

VH766H1

6

VH712C1

6

VH714C1

5

VH855H

6

VH866H

Split Load 100A Switch plus Twin RCCB Incomer - Flush

VF712C1

1.10

Description

Enclosure size

Cat ref. Plain door

10 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB 12 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB 14 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB 16 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB 12 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 2 x 80A 30mA RCCB 14 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 2 x 80A 30mA RCCB

5

VF710C1

6

VF712C1

6

VF714C1

6

VF716C1

6

VF812C

6

VF814C


Insulated and metal enclosures, 1 row from 10 to 18 outgoing ways.

Supplied with marking labels, configurable busbar and instructions.

Surface and Flush mounted enclosures, with a rigid chassis, housing a Switch Disconnector, Twin RCCB and space for RCBOs.



For flush consumer unit dimensions see page 1.20.

For complete accessories list see page 1.17. For insulated and metal consumer unit dimensions see page 1.19.

Split Load 100A Switch plus Twin RCCB Incomer with Unprotected Ways - Insulated

VC816CU

Consumer Units

Consumer Units Split Load, Twin RCCB Incomer with Unprotected Ways

Description

Enclosure size

Cat ref. Plain door


10 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB 16 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB 10 Way Split Load 3+4+3 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB 3 x MCB 14 Way Split Load 5+6+3 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB 3 x MCB 16 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 2 x 80A 30mA RCCB 18 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 2 x 80A 30mA RCCB 10 Way Split Load 5+4+1 100A Switch 2 x 80A 30mA RCCB 1 x MCB 14 Way Split Load 5+6+3 100A Switch 2 x 80A 30mA RCCB 3 x MCB 14 Way Split Load 7+6+1 100A Switch 2 x 80A 30mA RCCB 1 x MCB

5

VC710CU

VC710CUG

6

VC716CU

VC716CUG

5

VC7343U -

6

VC7563U -

6

VC816CU -

6

VC818CU

5

VC854U -

6

VC8563U -

6

VC876U -

VC818CUG

Split Load 100A Switch plus Twin RCCB Incomer with Unprotected Ways - Metal

VH716CU

Description

Enclosure size

Cat ref. Plain door


16 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB 10 Way Split Load 3+4+3 100A Switch 2 x 63A RCCB 3 x MCB 16 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 2 x 80A 30mA RCCB 10 Way Split Load 3+4+3 100A Switch 2 x 80A RCCB 3 x MCB 10 Way Split Load 5+4+1 100A Switch 2 x 80A RCCB 1 x MCB 14 Way Split Load 7+6+1 100A Switch 2 x 80A RCCB 1 x MCB

6

VH716CU -

5

VH7343U -

6

VH816CU -

5

-

5

VH854U -

6

VH876U -

VH8343UG

Split Load 100A Switch plus Twin RCCB Incomer with Unprotected Ways - Flush Description

Enclosure size

Cat ref. Plain door

16 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB 16 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 2 x 80A 30mA RCCB

6

VF716CU

6

VF816CU


1.11

Consumer Units Split Load, Twin RCCB Incomer with 6 Amp RCBO Insulated and metal enclosures, 1 row from 10 to 14 outgoing ways. Surface mounted enclosures, with a rigid chassis, housing a Switch Disconnector, Twin RCCB and 6 Amp RCBO.






Split Load 100A Switch plus Twin RCCB Incomer with 6A RCBO - Insulated Description

Enclosure size

Cat ref. Plain door


10 Way Split Load 5+4+1 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB with 6A RCBO 14 Way Split Load 7+6+1 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB with 6A RCBO

5

VC754R

VC754RG

6

VC776R -

Split Load 100A Switch plus Twin RCCB Incomer with 6A RCBO - Metal

1.12

Description

Enclosure size


10 Way Split Load 5+4+1 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB with 6A RCBO 10 Way Split Load 5+4+1 100A Switch 2 x 80A 30mA RCCB with 6A RCBO 14 Way Split Load 7+6+1 100A Switch 2 x 80A 30mA RCCB with 6A RCBO

5

VH754RG

5

VH854RG

6

VH876RG


Insulated and metal 1 row 12 outgoing way enclosures.



Surface mounted enclosures, with a rigid chassis, housing a Switch Disconnector and Twin RCCB.




Split Load 100A Switch plus Three RCCB Incomer with 40A RCCB - Insulated Description

Enlcosure size

Cat ref. Plain door

12 Way Split Load 5+5+2 100A Switch 2 x 80A 30mA RCCB plus 1x 40A 30mA RCCB

6

VC8552

Split Load 100A Switch plus Three RCCB Incomer with 40A RCCB - Metal Description

Enlcosure size

Cat ref. Plain door

12 Way Split Load 5+5+2 100A Switch 2 x 80A 30mA RCCB plus 1x 40A 30mA RCCB

6

VH8552

VH8552


1.13

Consumer Units

Consumer Units Split Load, Twin RCCB Incomer with 40 Amp RCCB

Consumer Units Twin and Multi Tariff Insulated and metal enclosures 1 row from 12 to 18 outgoing ways. Surface mounted enclosures, with a rigid chassis, housing a Twin 63A or 100A Switch Disconnector.

Supplied with marking labels, busbar and instructions





Twin and Multi Tariff - Insulated Description

Enclosure size

Cat ref. Plain door

12 Way Twin Tariff Configurable 2 x 100A Switch 18 Way Twin Tariff Configurable 2 x 100A Switch 12 Way Multitariff 6+5+1 2 x 100A 1 x 63A Switch

6 6 6

VC912C VC918C VC9651

Description

Enclosure size

Cat ref. Plain door

18 Way Twin Tariff Configurable 2 x 100A Switch

6

VH918C

VC918CG

Twin and Multi Tariff - Metal

1.14


Skeleton consumer units are designed typically for use in installations in areas with pre-determined space available

e.g. Metering cupboards in Local Authority accommodation.



For dimensions see page 1.20.

Skeleton Units

VS710C

Description

Cat ref. Plain door

12 Way 100A Switch Incomer 10 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 1 x 63A 30mA RCCB 12 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 1 x 63A 30mA RCCB 10 Way Split Load 5+4+1 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCCB 1 x Switch Fed Way for RCBO or MCB (to feed smoke detector for example) 10 Way Split Load 5+4+1 100A Switch 2 x 80A 30mA RCCB 1 x Switch Fed Way for RCBO or MCB (to feed smoke detector for example)

VS112 VS710C VS712C VS754U VS854U

Consumer Units Single Phase and Switch Neutral Insulated and metal enclosures 1 row from 8 to 14 outgoing ways. Surface mounted enclosures, with a rigid chassis, housing a Switch Disconnector or RCCB Incomer.

Supplied with marking labels, SPSN busbar and instructions.




Complies with BS EN 60439-3.

Single Phase and Switch Neutral Consumer Unit - Insulated and Metal These units take Single Pole and Switched Neutral single module MCBs. See page 4.14 for full range Description

Enclosure size


8 Way Metal Single Phase and Switch Neutral 100A 30mA RCCB Incomer

4

VH308NG


1.15

Consumer Units

Consumer Units Skeleton Units

Consumer Unit Two Row Hybrid Board Metal enclosures 2 rows from 21 to 38 outgoing ways.

Supplied with marking labels, busbar and instructions


Surface mounted enclosures, with a rigid chassis, housing a Twin 63A or 100A Switch Disconnector.




Two Row Hybrid Board - Metal Description

Cat ref. Plain door


21 Way Enclosure 100A Switch 26 Way Enclosure 100A Switch 38 Way Enclosure 100A Switch

VH124 VH129 VH141

VH124G VH129G VH141G

Description

Cat ref. Plain door


26 Way Split Load 12+14 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCD 38 Way Split Load 18+20 100A Switch 2 x 63A 30mA RCD 26 Way Split Load 12+14 100A Switch 2 x 80A 30mA RCD 38 Way Split Load 18+20 100A Switch 2 x 80A 30mA RCD

VH726H1

VH726H1G

VH738H1

VH738H1G

VH826H

VH826HG

VH838H

VH838HG

VH124

Two Row Hybrid Split Load Board - Metal

VH726H1

1.16


The Hager consumer unit has been designed to be the most versatile consumer unit available on the market today.

VAN00

VAM00

JK01B

8 - 22 Mod Bus Bars

KR50U

Consumer Units

Consumer Unit Accessories The accessories below can be used to customise standard consumer units and enclosures to almost any configuration.

Description Pack qty

Cat ref. Cat ref. Plain Glazed

1 Module busbar blank 2 Module DIN rail blank piece 100 Amp terminal block (MCB profile) fits directly onto busbar (cable capacity 50mm2)

25 5 1

JK01B VAS02 KR50U

Surge protecion kit

1

VA01SPD

Neutral link Locking kit Incoming tail connection kit Dual tariff link kit Split load link kit Triple tariff link kit

1 1 1 1 1 1

VAN00 VAL00 VAM00 VAK0D VAK0S VAK0T

8 Module busbar 12 Module busbar 16 Module busbar 21 Module busbar 14 Way SP&SN insulated busbar

1 1 1 1 1

VAB08 VAB12 VAB16 VAB21 VAB14N

Terminal bar support clips Terminal bar 2 way Terminal bar 3 way Terminal bar 4 way Terminal bar 5 way Terminal bar 6 way Terminal bar 7 way Terminal bar 8 way Terminal bar 9 way Terminal bar 10 way Terminal bar 11 way Terminal bar 12 way Terminal bar 13 way Terminal bar 14 way Terminal bar 15 way Terminal bar 16 way Terminal bar 17 way Terminal bar 18 way Terminal bar 19 way Terminal bar 20 way Terminal bar 21 way Terminal bar 22 way Terminal bar 23 way Terminal bar 24 way

5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

VAT00 VAT02 VAT03 VAT04 VAT05 VAT06 VAT07 VAT08 VAT09 VAT10 VAT11 VAT12 VAT13 VAT14 VAT15 VAT16 VAT17 VAT18 VAT19 VAT20 VAT21 VAT22 VAT23 VAT24

Label pack

1

VAP00

Front cover fixing Front cover and door size 3 Front cover and door size 4 Front cover and door size 5 Front cover and door size 6

2 1 1 1 1

VAC00 VAF3S VAF4S VAF5S VAF6S

Seal strip size 3 - 8 module Seal strip size 4 - 12 module Seal strip size 5 - 16 module Seal strip size 6 - 22 module

2 2 2 2

VAR3S VAR4S VAR5S VAR6S


VAF3SG VAF4SG VAF5SG VAF6SG

1.17

Garage Units The range of garage units comply with BS EN 60439-3 Annex 2A and are available as IP30 and IP55.

They come pre-configured for one power (32A) and one lighting (6A) circuit.


Garage Unit Description

Dimension (h x w x d)

Cat ref.

2 Way 40A RCCB IP55 2 Way 40A RCCB IP30

110 x 180 x 82mm 168 x 193 x 113mm

VE24H GD24H

GD24H

IP55 Weather Proof Weather proof range of consumer units designed to BS EN 60439-3 Annex 2A.

Rated at IP55 protected against low pressure water splashing from all directions.


IP55 Weather Proof Description

Cat ref.

10 Way 100A Switch Incomer IP55 10 Way 100A 30mA RCCB Incomer IP55 20 Way Split Load 100A Switch 80A 30mA RCCB IP55

VW110G VW310G VW620G

VW110G

1.18


D

C

D

C

D

C

Consumer Units

Dimensions Insulated & Metal Consumer Units B A Height

CUT-OUTS

Depth

E F

Width

Insulated Enclosures Enclosure Size Dimensions (mm) Width Height Depth VC201 110 180 94 VC202 110 180 94 3 240 245 105 4 310 245 105 5 380 245 105 6 490 245 105

Fixing Centres (mm) A B C 115 50 45 115 50 45 115 50 45 115 50 45

D 72 107 143 195

E 145 215 285 395

C

F 160 230 302 410

D

Height

B

A

Depth

Width

E

Metal Enclosures Enclosure Size Dimensions (mm) Width Height Depth VH201 168 193 124 VH202 168 193 124 2 220 230 110 3 240 245 120 4 310 245 120 5 380 245 120 6 490 245 120

Fixing Centres A B 165 32 150 55 150 55 150 55 150 55

C 55 30 30 30 30

D N/A 89 125 160 214

E 163 178 250 320 429


1.19

Consumer Unit Dimensions Flush & Skeleton Consumer Units & IP55 Weather Proof E I

F

C

G

B Height

A H

Depth

Width

D

Flush Enclosures Enclosure Size Dimensions (mm) Width Height Depth 5 413 257 120 6 520 257 120

Fixing Centres A B 115 50 115 50

C 50 50

D 290 397

E 65 65

F 55 55

Cut out size G H 388 232 495 232

Skeleton (Mantel)

Height

Dimensions (mm) Width Height Depth 331 221 74

Depth

Fixing Centres 320

Width

Height

IP55 Weather Proof

VW110G VW310G VW620G Depth

1.20

Dimensions (mm) Width Height Depth 310 302 151 310 302 151 310 427 151

Width

General Catalogue 2012 • Consumer Units • Technical

I 55 55

Height

Consumer Units

Consumer Unit Dimensions Two-Row Hybrid

Depth

Width

Hybrid Enclosures Enclosure Size Dimensions (mm) Width Height VH124 309.5 503.8 VH124G 309.5 503.8 VH129 381 503.8 VH129G 381 503.8 VH141 488.5 503.8 VH141G 488.5 503.8 VH726H1 381 503.8 VH726H1G 381 503.8 VH738H1 488.5 503.8 VH738H1G 488.5 503.8 VH826H 381 503.8 VH826HG 381 503.8 VH838H 488.5 503.8 VH838HG 488.5 503.8

Depth 121.5 121.5 121.5 121.5 121.5 121.5 121.5 121.5 121.5 121.5 121.5 121.5 121.5 121.5


1.21

Enclosures The new generation Hager enclosures are available in many sizes ranging from the 2 to 10 modules insulated Mini Gamma, 3 to 36 module IP55 Weather Proof, Volta II Flush and Vector II multi row enclosures plus the Metal and GRP range of IP65 Orion Plus enclosures.

Enclosures

Mini Gamma Enclosures

2.2

Vector II Weather Proof Enclosures

2.4

Vega Surface Mounting Enclosures

2.5

Volta II Flush Mounting Enclosures

2.6

Enclosures & Accessories

2.9

Orion Plus Metal IP65 Enclosures & Accessories

2.10

Orion Plus GRP IP65 Enclosures & Accessories

2.11

Brass Terminals ≤ 60A

2.13

Rail Mounted Terminals

2.14

Insulated Busbars Prong

2.15

Insulated Busbars Fork

2.16

Mini Gamma Enclosures Insulated enclosures 1 row from 2 to 10 modules. Surface mounted enclosures, with a rigid, chassis, housing a DIN rail.

Supplied with Earth terminals (except GD102E), marking labels and sealing grommets to maintain Class II.

Options (see page 2.3): • Keylock • Plain or transparent door • Terminals and terminal supports For dimensions see page 2.17.

Mini Gamma Enclosures Description

Cat ref.

2 Modules compatible with WAGO type 273 connector block (not supplied). 4 Modules E: 2 x 16 + 2 x 10mm2 (capacity to fit an additional 4 hole terminal bar on existing support) 6 Modules E: 2 x 16 + 2 x 10mm2 (capacity to fit an additional two 4 hole terminal bars or one 7 hole terminal bar on existing support) 8 Modules E: 3 x 16 + 4 x 10mm2 (capacity to fit an additional two 4 hole terminal bars or one 7 hole terminal bar on existing support) 10 Modules E: 3 x 16 + 4 x 10mm2 (capacity to fit an additional three 4 hole terminal bars or two 7 hole terminal bars on existing support)

GD102E GD104E

GD102E

GD106E

2.2

General Catalogue 2011 • Enclosures (v1.1)

GD106E GD108E GD110E

Mini Gamma Accessories Mini Gamma Plain Doors

GP108P

For Cat ref.

Cat ref.

GD102E GD104E GD106E GD108E GD110E

GP102P GP104P GP106P GP108P GP110P

Enclosures

Plain door with integrated handle (use of door increases IP rating to IP40)

Mini Gamma Transparent Doors Transparent door with integrated handle (use of door increases IP rating to IP40)

GP110T

For Cat ref.

Cat ref.


GP102T GP104T GP106T GP108T GP110T

Terminal Support (no terminals) For Cat ref.

Cat ref.

GD104E GD106E GD108E GD110E

GZ104S GZ106S GZ108S GZ110S

Terminals (63A Rating) Cable capacity

Neutral (blue) Cat ref.

Earth (green) Cat ref.

2 x 16mm2 + 2 x 10mm2 3 x 16mm2 + 4 x 10mm2

GZ04N GZ04E GZ07N GZ07E

Keylock Description

Cat ref.

Keylock for plain or transparent door

VZ313

Customer Services Hotline • 0870 240 2400 Technical Support Helpline • 0870 607 6677

2.3

Vector II Weather Proof Enclosures and Accessories Enclosure with door 1 row for 3, 6, 10 and 12 modules 2 row for 24 modules 3 row for 36 modules Adjustable depth DIN rail (except VE103U).

Door operation 3-10 modules - vertical hinging retained in open position at 90º 12-36 modules - horizontal hinging.

Wiring ducts 12 - 36 module enclosures/mini wiring channels left and right ensures conductors are neatly dressed.

Hinging reversible (left or right).

IP 55: AC 400V. insulation class: class II

Supplied with sealing plugs to re-instate IP rating after fixing. Front cover sealing.

Colour: RAL 7035 (light grey).


Vector II Enclosures Description

Moulded blanks (In front cover)

1 row, 3 modules N: 1 x 25 + 3 x 16, E: 1 x 25 + 5 x 16 2 x 1/2 1 row, 6 modules N: 1 x 25 + 5 x 16, E: 1 x 25 + 7 x 16 2 x 1 1 row, 10 modules N: 1 x 25 + 9 x 16, E: 1 x 25 + 11 x 16 2 x 1 1 row, 12 modules N: 1 x 25 + 10 x 16, E: 1 x 25 + 13 x 16 2 rows, 24 modules N: 1 x 25 + 16 x 16, E: 1 x 25 + 16 x 16 3 rows, 36 modules N: 1 x 25 + 19 x 16, E: 1 x 25 + 19 x 16

Cat ref.

VE103U VE106U VE110U VE112U VE212U VE312U

VE212U

Earth and Neutral for TP&N Connection Assembly

VZ428

Description

Cat ref.

3 x (3 x 16mm2 + 2 x 10mm2) 270mm wide N: 1 x (5 x 16mm2 + 6 x 10mm2) In: 63A To fit 12 module wide enclosure only

VZ428

Earth and Neutral for Single Phase Connection Assembly Description

Cat ref.

2 x (3 x 16mm2 + 4 x 10mm2) 270mm wide In: 63A To fit 12 module wide enclosure only

VZ403

Key Lock Description

Cat ref.

For all enclosures with 2 keys

VZ311

Sliding Support

2.4

Description

Cat ref.

1 Set = 2 Supports for fixing of additional terminal supports in bottom part of enclosure (VE112U and above)

VZ744


Vega Surface Mounting Enclosures and Accessories

Enclosures are of an insulating material coloured white RAL 9016.

The enclosures feature a removable chassis with DIN rails for ease of installation. Top and bottom cable entry plates are removable and interchangeable. The door is also reversible with an integral flush handle.

Options • Door lock For dimensions see page 2.18. Enclosures

IP40 surface mounting enclosures with transparent or plain doors; 1-3 rows 18 to 54 modules. 63A max. total load.

Vega Enclosures Description Quick connect earth terminals

Cat ref. Plain door


1 row, 18 modules 2 rows, 36 modules 3 rows, 54 modules

4 x 25mm2, 14 x 4mm2 7 x 25mm2, 25 x 4mm2 10 x 25mm2, 34 x 4mm2

VB18B VB18R VB36B VB36R VB54B VB54R

Characteristics

Pack qty

VB18B

Vega Accessories Description

VZ708

VZ707

Cat ref.

Key lock for Vega Enclosures Supplied with 2 keys 1 VZ310 Connection Assembly 63A 2 x (3 x 16mm2 + 4 x 10mm2) 1 VZ708 Connection Assembly 63A 2 x (3 x 16mm2 + 2 x 10mm2) 1 VZ709 Coupling pieces for joining 1 set VZ703 two enclosures Replacement cable entry plates With circular cut outs for cables 10 VZ706 top or bottom and conduits With rectangular cut outs for 10 VZ707 cable trunking Blanking clips 1/2 module (8.7mm) 50 P031F to blank out a complete row 1 module (17.5mm) 50 P032F 18 module 10 JP015


2.5

Volta II Flush Mounting Enclosures The new generation When building or renovating residential buildings, compact solutions are often required for electrical and multimedia installations. The volta small distribution board is especially suitable thanks to its easy assembly in walls as well as its manifold versions with 30% larger wiring space by lateral wiring trunking and larger upper and lower connection areas. The PE/N terminals in the quick-connect version permit easy and safe connection of conductors. Brass terminals are also available.

1

4

2 5 6

3


Technical data:

• Protection against power theft - the screws on the device protection cover can be sealed.

• Available from 12 to 48 modules.

• High degree of safety - the door lock can be retrofitted without requiring any additional conversions. • Installation even in thin walls - the raising frame enables the standard frame to be converted into a flat version with an installation depth of 72mm. • Now with 30% more wiring space - additional side areas for cable management as well as larger upper and lower connection areas.

• Protected to IP30. • Base made from high-quality plastic (polystyrene), door and masking frame made of sheet steel. • Pure white (RAL 9010).

Quick tips 1 2 3 4

30% More Space Larger upper and lower connection areas offering more space for terminals and wiring.

Cable Management Separate side areas with cable clamps for cable management.

Circuit Plans Retaining clamps in the door for circuit tables and plans.

Miniature Spirit Level An miniature spirit level is integrated into the wall as an installation aid.

5 6 7 8

Simple Flush Fixing By pressing in the screw in the cavity wall anchor, the levers swivel out and click into place.

Removable Sides The sides are removed before cables are entered. Pre-punched segments on the side facilitate knockouts.

Quick Cover Connection New quick connection for the cover - simply turn to secure or release.

Flat Version Any standard version with 90mm installation depth can be converted into a “flat version” with 72mm installation depth using the raising frame.

Volta II Flush Mounting Enclosures and Accessories IP30 Flush mounting enclosures with doors 1-4 rows 12-48 modules 63A max total load

• Enclosure manufactured from insulated material • Frame and door manufactured from metal • Reversible door

• Delivered with earth block, blanking clips and circuit identification labelling • Integrated spirit level For dimensions see page 2.18.

Volta II Enclosures Description

Quick connect earth terminals

Cat ref.

1 row, 12 modules 2 rows, 24 modules 3 rows, 36 modules 4 rows, 48 modules

3 x 25mm2 + 11 x 4mm2 5 x 25mm2 + 17 x 4mm2 6 x 25mm2 + 20 x 4mm2 8 x 25mm2 + 28 x 4mm2

VU12EP VU24EP VU36EP VU48EP

VU12EP

Volta II Accessories

VZ403

Description

Characteristics

Cat ref.

Key lock Connection assembly single phase 63A Connection assembly 63A Mounting kit for partition walls Comprising: • 4 support clamps • 4 screws

Supplied with 2 keys replaces original catch 2 x (3 x 16mm2 + 4 x 10mm2) 270mm wide 2 x (3 x 16mm2 + 4 x 10mm2) 1 x (4 x 16mm2 + 7 x 10mm2) 270mm wide For mounting flush enclosures in partition walls

VZ302N VZ403 VZ428 VZ405N

Quick Connect Terminals Description Length No. Quick No. Screw Cat ref. (mm) Connect Terminals Neutral Terminals 25mm2 4mm2

KN14E

6 Connection Terminal Block 30 10 Connection Terminal Block 45 14 Connection Terminal Block 60 18 Connection Terminal Block 75 22 Connection Terminal Block 90 26 Connection Terminal Block 105 Pack of 10 Terminal Interconnectors

5 8 11 13 16 19 -

KN10N

KN99E

2.8


1 2 3 5 6 7 -

Cat ref. Earth

KN06N KN06E KN10N KN10E KN14N KN14E KN18N KN18E KN22N KN22E KN26N KN26E KN99N KN99E

Enclosures and Accessories

The range is available without door, with plain door or with glazed door.

Where larger cables need to be accommodated for switch disconnectors etc extra cabling space is provided in the extended height versions. All boxes from 2-5 modules are fitted with an earth bar as standard and for those with doors the catch can be replaced with the optional key locking facility.

These enclosures feature: • Ample wiring space • Plain or glazed doors • Optional key lock For dimensions see page 2.19.

Enclosures Description

Cat ref. Without door

Cat ref. Plain door


1 Row 1 Module Suitable for 1 Module RCBO 1 Row 2 Modules 1 Row 2 Modules Extended Height 1 Row 3 Modules 1 Row 4 Modules 1 Row 4 Modules Extended Height 1 Row 5 Modules Extended Height

IU41 - IU2 IU2/D IU2/GD IU42* IU42/D* IU3 IU3/D IU4 IU4/D IU44* IU44/D* IU44/GD* IU45* - Note: Recommended maximum cable capacity * extended height = 35mm2 all other references = 6mm2

IU41

Accessories Description

Cat ref.

Keylock with 2 keys suitable for all enclosures fitted with door - IU enclosure Keylock with 2 keys suitable for all enclosures fitted with door - JK enclosure 100A Double Pole Switch Disconnector 63A 30mA Double Pole RCCB 100A 30mA Double Pole RCCB 100A Single Module Terminal Block (MCB profile) 125A Single Module Terminal Block (MCB profile)

IKL1 JK222A SB299 CDC263U CD284U KRN190 KRN199

JK222A


2.9

Enclosures

1 row boxes 1-5 modules This range is ideally suited for the installation of individual modular devices. (RCCBs, MCBs, RCBO’s, Switch Disconnectors etc).

Orion Plus Metal IP65 Enclosures & Accessories Enclosures with plain door steel colour RAL 7035 insulation class : I IP 65 / door closed according to BS EN 60529 1.5mm thick sheet steel for body and door

These enclosures feature: • 2 removable gland plates for cable entry on top and bottom • Earth studs on both body and door • Door easily removable • Plain door equipped with one or two locks with triangular 8mm bit centres, located out of the sealed area

Options: • Key lock • Wall fixing brackets • Plain or perforated mounting plate • Equipment kits for modular devices For full dimensions see page 2.20.

Orion Plus Metal Enclosures Dimensions Height x Width x Depth (mm)

No. of locks

Cat ref. Plain door


300 x 250 x 160 350 x 300 x 160 350 x 300 x 200 500 x 300 x 200 500 x 400 x 200 650 x 400 x 200 650 x 400 x 250 650 x 500 x 250 800 x 600 x 300 950 x 600 x 300 950 x 800 x 300

1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2

FL102A FL104A FL154A FL105A FL155A FL110A FL160A FL112A FL162A FL117A FL167A FL118A FL168A FL120A FL170A FL124A FL174A FL126A FL176A FL128A FL178A

FL110A

Orion Plus Metal Enclosure Accessories

FL96Z

FL80Z

Description

Cat ref.

Key lock to be mounted on the triangular lock 1 set of 2 key locks with male square 8mm, with 1 key Key lock for FL201B 1 set of 2 locks doublebars 3mm with 1 key Metallic wall fixing brackets with screws (set of 4) Kit for earth connection (for metal enclosures) Orion plus spray paint kit (RAL7035)

FL96Z FL80Z FL94Z FL95Z FL85Z FL874A FL672Z

FL95Z

FL85Z

FL874A

2.10


Enclosure with plain door Made of glass reinforced polyester (GRP) Colour : RAL 7035 FL 201B : RAL 7032 Body made out of one piece up to height 800mm IP 65 / door closed BS EN 60529 insulation class : II

These enclosures feature : • Plain door equipped with one or two locks with triangular 8mm centres, located out of the sealed area, gasket directly moulded on the door • Studs in the back of the enclosure for mounting plate fastening

Options: • Key lock • Wall fixing brackets • Plain or perforated mounting plate • Equipment kits for modular devices. For full dimensions see page 2.21.

Orion Plus GRP Enclosures Dimensions Height x Width x Depth (mm)

No. of locks

Cat ref. Plain door


300 x 250 x 160 350 x 300 x 160 500 x 300 x 200 500 x 400 x 200 650 x 400 x 200 650 x 500 x 250 800 x 600 x 300 1200 x 850 x 300

1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1

FL201B ¹ FL204B FL254B FL209B FL259B FL213B FL263B FL216B FL266B FL221B FL271B FL229B FL279B FL327B FL527B ¹ FL201B made of polycarbonate

FL216B

Orion Plus GRP Enclosure Accessories

FL96Z

FL81Z

Description

Cat ref.

Key lock to be mounted on the triangular lock, supplied with 2 keys no 427 for h ≤ 800 Key lock to be mounted on the triangular lock, supplied with 2 keys no 427 for h ≤ 1150 Replacement lock 1 set of 2 locks with male square 8mm with 1 key Replacement lock 1 set of locks double-bar 3mm with 1 key Plastic wall fixing brackets delivered with fixing screws M 6x12 on enclosure set of 4 pieces Depth adjustment slide for enclosures 300mm

FL96Z FL98Z FL81Z FL97Z FL863Z FL672E

FL97Z

FL863Z


2.11

Enclosures

Orion Plus GRP IP65 Enclosures & Accessories

Orion Plus Accessories Orion Plus GRP Enclosure Plain Mounting Plates Steel sheet 2mm thickness, aluminium zinc. Fixed directly to the back of the enclosure or on the sides allowing the in-depth setting (fitting with slides FL450A). For dimensions see page 2.21. For enclosures

Dimensions Height x Width (mm)

Cat ref.

FL201B FL102A, FL152A FL104A, FL105A, FL204B, FL154A, FL155A, FL254B FL110A, FL209B, FL160A, FL259B FL112A, FL213B, FL162A, FL263B FL117A, FL118A, FL216B, FL167A, FL168A, FL266B FL120A, FL221B, FL170A, FL271B FL124A, FL229B, FL174A, FL279B FL126A, FL176A FL128A, FL178A FL327B, FL527B

300 x 250 300 x 250 350 x 300 500 x 300 500 x 400 650 x 400 650 x 500 800 x 600 900 x 600 950 x 800 1150 x 850

FL41G FL402A FL404A FL407A FL408A FL412A FL413A FL415A FL416A FL417A FL522E

Width

Cat ref.

FL408A

Blank Front Cover for Modular Chassis For enclosures

FL980A, FL981A 300mm FL02Z FL992A, FL993A 400mm FL03Z FL994A 500mm FL04Z FL996A, FL997A 600mm FL05Z FL998A 800mm FL06Z

Equipment Kits for Modular Chassis On Chassis Only for FL980A and FL981A, composed of: • DIN rails (slide length 44mm) assembled on chassis and adjustable in depth (of front plates with slide). On Vertical Rail Composed of: • 2 vertical rail, DIN rail (slide length 44mm). • Front plates with slit. • A cross-rail allowing the assembly of bars on base and slides).

FL981A

For enclosures

Rows (modules)

Cat ref.

FL104A, FL105A, FL204B, FL154A, FL155A, FL254B FL110A, FL209B, FL160A, FL259B FL112A, FL213B, FL162A, FL162A, FL263B FL117A, FL118A. FL216B, FL167A, FL168A, FL266B FL120A, FL221B, FL170A, FL271B FL124A, FL229B, FL174A, FL279B FL126A, FL176A FL128A, FL178A

2 rows (24) 3 rows (36) 3 rows (48) 4 rows (64) 4 rows (88) 5 rows (130) 6 rows (156) 6 rows (222)

FL980A FL981A FL992A FL993A FL994A FL996A FL997A FL998A

FL992A

2.12


Brass Terminals ≤ 60A Colour Code Neutral = Blue support Earth = Green/Yellow support Phase = Brown support

Insulated support can be fitted on DIN rail with KZ060 rail clip or flat bar 12 x 2mm. Enclosures

Description Brass terminals with/without support for neutral/earth/phase connections.

Brass Terminals ≤ 60A With Support

KM04L

KM13N

Connections: number + section

Neutral Earth Cat ref. Cat ref.

Phase Cat ref.

2 x 16 + 2 x 10mm2 4 Connections Length 30mm 3 x 16 + 4 x 10mm2 7 Connections Length 49mm 5 x 16 + 5 x 10mm2 10 Connections Length 67mm 5 x 16 + 6 x 10mm2 11 Connections Length 73mm 2 x 16 (Double Drive) + 8 x 10mm2 10 Connections Length 69mm 6 x 16 + 7 x 10mm2 13 Connections Length 85mm 1 x 25 + 5 x 16 + 5 x 10mm2 11 Connections Length 85mm 1 x 25 + 8 x 16 + 8 x 10mm2 17 Connections Length 121mm 1 x 25 + 11 x 16 + 13 x 10mm2 25 Connections Length169mm

- -

KM04L

KM07N KM07E

KM07L

KM10D KM10F

-

KM11N KM11E

KM11L

KM10N KM10E

-

KM13N KM13E

-

-

KM11B -

KM17N KM17E (2 supports) KM25N KM25E

-

Brass Terminals ≤ 60A Without Support Connections: number + section

Cat ref.

2 x 16 + 2 x 10mm2 4 Connections Length 30mm 3 x 16 + 4 x 10mm2 7 Connections Length 49mm 5 x 16 + 5 x 10mm2 10 Connections Length 67mm 5 x 16 + 6 x 10mm2 11 Connections Length 73mm 2 x 16 (Double Drive) + 8 x 10mm2 10 Connections Length 69mm 6 x 16 + 7 x 10mm2 13 Connections Length 85mm 1 x 25 + 5 x 16 + 5 x 10mm2 11 Connections Length 85mm 1 x 25 + 8 x 16 + 8 x 10mm2 17 Connections Length 121mm 1 x 25 + 11 x 16 + 13 x 10mm2 25 Connections Length169mm 1 x 25 + 8 x 16 + 29 x 10mm2 Long Length Terminals Length 242mm 1 x 25 + 16 x 16 + 61 x 10mm2 Fixing on Flat Bar 12 x 2 with Supports Length 482mm

K140 K142 K143 K144 K145 K148 K151 K156 K158 K159 K160F

Terminal Supports For K140 - K160 terminals insulating material M4 x 8 fixing screws Description

Cat ref.

Blue Support for Neutral Green / Yellow Support for Earth Beige Support

KZ012 KZ013 KZ014

KZ012

Rail Clip For fixing terminals on DIN Rails not for; KM04L, KM10D, KM10F, KM10N, KM10E

KZ060

Description

Cat ref.

Mounts on DIN Rail Width 50mm

KZ060


2.13

Rail Mounted Terminals Description To prewire incoming & outgoing circuits in distribution boards. Colour Code Neutral = Blue Earth = Green / Yellow Phase = Beige

Phase KXA02LH KXA04LH KXA06LH KXA10L KXA16L KXA35L KXB70LH

Rated Current 24A 32A 41A 57A 76A 125A 192A

Neutral KXA02NH KXA04NH KXA06NH KXA10N KXA16N KXA35N KXB70NH

Rated Current 24A 32A 41A 57A 76A 125A 179A

Feed through Rail Mounted Terminals Nominal Min-Max Rated Voltage

Phase Cat ref.

2.5mm² 4mm² 6mm² 10mm² 16mm² 35mm² 70mm²

KXA02LH KXA02NH KXA04LH KXA04NH KXA06LH KXA06NH KXA10L KXA10N KXA16L KXA16N KXA35L KXA35N KXB70LH KXB70NH

(0.5mm² - 4mm²) (0.5mm² - 6mm²) (0.5mm² - 10mm²) (1.5mm² - 16mm²) (1.5mm² - 25mm²) (6mm² - 50mm²) (16mm² - 95mm²)

800V 800V 800V 400V 400V 400V 800V

Neutral Cat ref.

Earth Cat ref.

KXA02E KXB04E KXB06E KXA10E KXA16E KXB35E KXB70E

End Plates Beige Description

Width in mm

Cat ref.

For KXA02LH & KXA04LH For KXA10L & KXA16L For KXA35L

1.5 - 1.5

KWE01G KWE04G KWE03G

End Stops Description

Width in mm

Cat ref.

Insulated material

8.5

KWB01

Width in mm

Cat ref.

Connection Blocks in ≤ 125A Single Pole Description

Incoming 2 x 25mm2, Outgoing 4 x 16mm2 2.5 K018 Incoming 2 x 35mm2, Outgoing 4 x 25mm2 2.5 K037

K037

2.14


Insulated Busbars Prong

KB163P

Description

Cat ref.

63A 13 Modules Single Pole Brown Insulation (Phase) 63A 13 Modules Single Pole Blue Insulation (Neutral) 100A 24 Modules Single Pole Endcaps for Single Pole Busbars

KB163P KB163N K171UK KZ021

Insulated Double Pole Busbars - Prong

KB263C

Description

Cat ref.

63A 24 Modules Double Pole 80A 56 Modules Double Pole 10 Endcaps for Double Pole Busbars

KB263C KB280B KZ023A

Insulated Triple Pole Busbars - Prong

KB363C

Description

Cat ref.

63A 24 Modules Triple Pole 80A 56 Modules Triple Pole 10 Endcaps for Triple Pole Busbars

KB363C KB380B KZ023A

Insulated Four Pole Busbars - Prong Description

Cat ref.

63A 24 Modules Four Pole 80A 56 Modules Four Pole Endcaps for Four Pole Busbars

KB463C KB480B KZ024

Cable Connectors

KF50SB

Description

Cat ref.

Connection terminal - Cable connection up to 50mm2 Direct busbar connection (Forked or Prong) 160A/ 690V

KF50SB

Prong Type Connection from the Top for Cables 25mm2 Prong Type Connection from the Top for Cables 16mm2 Prong Type Connection from the Side for Cables 35mm2 Fork Type Connection from the Side for Cables 25mm2

KF81A KF82A KF83D KF84A

KF83D

Neutral Assembly Description

Cat ref.

DIN Rail Mounted 5 x 16mm2 and 9 x 10mm2

KM14N


2.15

Enclosures

Insulated Single Pole Busbars - Prong

Insulated Busbars Fork Insulated Flexible Links 100A Rating

KE01R

KE01B

Ends of connectors

Colour

Brown 122mm Blue 122mm Brown 236mm Blue 236mm Brown 330mm Blue 300mm Blue 355mm Brown 500mm Blue 550mm

= Connection to modular device

Length

Cat ref.

KE01R KE01B KE02R KE02B KE03R KE03B KE04B KE06R KE07B

= Connection to terminal bar

Insulated Busbars - Fork

KD190B

Description

Cat ref.

100A 57 Modules Single Pole (Section: 20mm2) 63A 24 Modules Double Pole Insulated (Section: 10mm2) 63A 57 Modules Triple Pole Insulated 63A 56 Modules Four Pole Insulated (Section 10mm2)

KD190B KDN263B KDN363B KDN463B

KDN263B

Insulating Strip Description

Cat ref.

Insulation Strip for Shrouding Busbars 5 Modules

KZ059

KZ059

2.16


Dimensions Mini Gamma & Vector II

Height

A

B

Depth B

Depth

Height

Mini Gamma


Dimensions (mm) Width Height Depth A 55 160 82 110 180 82 146 180 82 182 180 82 218 180 82

Depth B 94 94 94 94 94

Fixing Centres A B N/A N/A 86 114 122 114 159 114 195 114

Width

Width

Vector II Weatherproof Enclosures

VE103U VE106U VE110U VE112U VE212U VE312U

Dimensions (mm) Width Height 110 175 164 190 236 210 310 302 310 427 310 552

Depth 93 113 114 151 151 151


2.17

Enclosures

Depth A

Dimensions Vega & Volta II A

Height

150

Vega Enclosures Dimensions (mm) Width Height Depth 370 300 145 370 300 145 370 450 145 370 450 145 370 600 145 370 600 145

150 VB18B VB18R VB36B VB36R VB54B VB54R

B

25

A 300 300 300 300 300 300

B 236 236 386 386 536 536

C 32 32 32 32 32 32

C Depth

Width

A

Q

B

R

H

Ø25

top

MP

C

125 mm

L

78

D

78

F

G

46

104,5 Ø25

N O

Volta II Enclosures

VE12EP VU24EP VU36EP VU48EP

2.18

Dimensions (mm) A B C 348 288 296.5 348 288 445.5 348 288 570.5 348 288 695.5

D 356.5 505.5 630.5 755.5

E 335 484 609 734

F 185 334 459 584

G 224 373 498 623

H 330 330 330 330

L 321 470 595 720

M 130 144 144 144

General Catalogue 2011 • Enclosures • Technical (v1.1)

N 104 114 114 114

O 56 66 66 66

P 64 79 79 79

Q 89 89 89 89

R 40 40 40 40

E

Dimensions Enclosures Depth

Enclosures and Switch Fuses

IU41 IU2 IU3 IU2/D IU2/GD IU3/D IU42 IU42/D IU4 IU4/D IU44 IU45 IU44/D IU44/GD

Dimensions (mm) Width Height Depth 50 152 61.5 152 61.5 152 61.5 152 87.5 80 152 87.5 152 87.5 312 61.5 312 100 187 61.5 115 187 87.5 312 73.5 312 73.5 125 312 99.5 312 99.5

Connection Earth only Earth only Earth only Earth only Earth only Earth only Earth only Earth only Earth only Earth only Earth only Earth only Earth only Earth only

Knockouts 2 x 20mm 2 x 20mm 2 x 20mm 2 x 20mm 2 x 20mm 2 x 20mm 2 x 20mm 2 x 20mm 2 x 25mm 2 x 25mm None None None None


Enclosures

Height

Width

2.19

Dimensions Orion Plus Metal Enclosures IP65

B2

A1 E3

B1

F F1 F2

D

H

22

H1 F3

B

A

C

E1 E E2

16

Metal Enclosures Dimensions

References FL102A FL104A FL105A FL110A FL112A FL117A FL118A FL120A FL124A FL126A FL128A

Rows 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 5 6 6

Dimensions (mm) A H 250 300 300 350 300 350 300 500 400 500 400 650 400 650 500 650 600 800 600 950 800 950

B 160 160 200 200 200 200 250 250 300 300 300

B1 195 245 245 245 345 3458 345 445 545 545 745

B2 80 80 120 120 120 120 170 170 220 220 220

C 200 250 250 250 350 350 350 450 550 550 750

D 250 300 300 450 450 600 600 600 750 900 900

Outside Fixing E1 E2 210 320 260 370 260 370 260 370 360 470 360 470 360 470 460 570 560 670 560 670 760 870

F1 220 272 272 422 422 572 572 572 722 872 872

F2 332 382 382 532 532 682 682 682 832 982 982

Inside Fixing E F 169 208 219 258 219 258 219 408 319 408 319 558 319 558 419 558 519 708 519 858 719 858

Mounting Plate Dimensions

Full plates FL402A FL404A FL407A FL408A FL412A FL413A FL415A FL416A FL417A FL522E

2.20

Perforated plates FL472A FL473A FL474A FL475A FL476A FL477A FL479A FL480A FL481A -

For enclosures FL102A FL104A,FL105A, FL204B FL110A, FL209B FL112A, FL213B FL117A, FL118A, FL216B FL120A, FL221B FL123A, FL124A, FL229B FL125A, FL126A FL127A, FL128A FL327B, FL527B

Plate dimensions (mm) A1 H1 193 280 243 330 243 480 343 480 343 630 443 630 543 780 543 930 743 930 693 1080

General Catalogue 2011 • Enclosures • Technical (v1.1)

Fixing plates E3 169 219 219 219 319 319 319 419 419 719

F3 208 258 258 408 408 558 558 558 558 858

Enclosures

235

Dimensions Orion Plus GRP Enclosures IP65

F2 F F1

B

D

H

A

C

E E1 E2

GRP Enclosure Dimensions

References FL201B FL204B FL209B FL213B FL216B FL221B FL229B FL327B

Rows 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 -

Dimensions (mm) A H 250 300 300 350 300 500 400 500 400 650 500 650 600 800 850 1200

B 160 160 200 200 200 250 300 300

C 250 250 350 350 450 550 750

D 300 450 450 600 600 750 1050

E 219 219 319 319 419 519 -

Inside Fixing F E1 258 339 408 339 408 439 558 439 558 539 708 639 -

Outside Fixing E2 F1 339 269 339 419 439 419 439 569 539 569 639 719 -


F2 389 539 539 689 689 839 -

2.21

Commercial distribution The complete service offering Over the past two years we have focused on changing the nature of sub and final distribution. The results of this are the new Invicta 3 Type B Distribution Board and Invicta 3 Panelboard ranges. We also offer a range of SP&SN distribution board, fuse combination switches, switch disconnectors, switch fuses and enclosed MCCBs.

The new Invicta 3 Panelboard

3.2

Invicta 3 A Boards, SP&N Distibution Boards

3.6

Invicta 3 Type B Distribution Boards

3.8

Invicta 3 Panelboards

3.30

Fuse Combination Switches 20 - 800A

3.50

Switch Disconnectors 20 - 800A

3.52

IP65 Switch Disconnectors 10 - 80A

3.53

Enclsoed MCCBs & Switch Fuses

3.54

Commercial Distribution

A Boards, SP&N Distribution Boards

A Boards SP&N Distribution Boards SP&N distribution boards SP&N distribution boards are available from 4-28 outgoing ways. The range comes with a choice of either 100A 2P switch disconnector, 63A 30mA 2P RCCB or 100A 30mA 2P RCCB, or a range of split load versions. The range has the following features: • Ample wiring space, with provision to accept RCBO’s • Full complement of earth and neutral terminal bars to accept up to 25mm2 incoming and 16mm2 outgoing cable

• Accepts most consumer unit accessories • Suitable for cable entry/exit on all sides and back Construction Manufactured from 1.25mm CR4 cold reduced mild steel, phosphate pretreated and powder coated to 00A01 BS 4800.

DIN Rail Enclosures One, two or three row 8-66 modules enclosures, fitted with DIN rails to accept any combination of Hager modular devices from the simplest switch and MCB arrangements to the more sophisticated control and protection system.

Complies with BS EN 60439-3.

These enclosures feature: • Ample wiring space • Full complement of earth and neutral bars fitted as standard • Significant knockout provision • Plain or glazed doors • Optional key lock Complies with BS EN 62208. For dimensions see page 3.5.

DIN Rail Enclosures Description

Cat ref. Plain door


1 Row 8 Module 1 Row 12 Module 1 Row 16 Module 1 Row 22 Module 2 Row 24 Modules (2 x 12) 2 Row 32 Modules (2 x 16) 2 Row 44 Modules (2 x 22) 3 Row 66 Modules (3 x 22)

JK008 JK012 JK016 JK022 JK024 JK032 JK044 JK066

JK008G JK012G JK016G JK022G JK024G JK032G JK044G JK066G

JK008

3.2

General Catalogue 2012 • Commercial Distribution

100A Switch Disconnector Incomer Cat ref.

4 Way 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer 6 Way 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer 10 Way 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer 14 Way 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer 20 Way 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer 28 Way 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer

JK104 JK106 JK110 JK114 JK120 JK128 Commercial Distribution

Description

JK104

63A 30mA RCCB Incomer Description

Cat ref.

4 Way 63A 30mA RCCB Incomer 6 Way 63A 30mA RCCB Incomer 10 Way 63A 30mA RCCB Incomer 14 Way 63A 30mA RCCB Incomer 20 Way 63A 30mA RCCB Incomer

JK404H JK406H JK410H JK414H JK420H

JK404H

100A 30mA RCCB Incomer Description

Cat ref.

4 Way 100A 30mA RCCB Incomer 6 Way 100A 30mA RCCB Incomer 10 Way 100A 30mA RCCB Incomer 14 Way 100A 30mA RCCB Incomer 20 Way 100A 30mA RCCB Incomer 28 Way 100A 30mA RCCB Incomer

JK304H JK306H JK310H JK314H JK320H JK328H

JK304H

Split Load with 100A Switch Disconnector and 63A 30mA RCCB Description

Cat ref.

6 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 63A 30mA RCCB 10 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 63A 30mA RCCB 14 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 63A 30mA RCCB

JK706C JK710C JK714C

JK706C

Split Load with 100A Switch Disconnector and 100A 30mA RCCB Description

Cat ref.

28 Way Split Load Configurable 100A Switch 100A 30mA RCCB

JK527H


3.3

Invicta 3 A Boards SP&N Distribution Boards Invicta 3 SP&N distribution boards Boards are available with 14 & 29 outgoing ways. The range comes with a 100A 2P switch disconnector.

The range has the following features: • Ample wiring space, with provision to accept RCBO’s • Full complement of earth and neutral terminal bars to accept up to 25mm2 incoming and 16mm2 outgoing cable • Accepts most consumer unit accessories • Suitable for cable entry/exit on all sides and back

Enclosures are available with plain or glazed doors. For dimensions see page 3.5.

100A Switch Disconnector Incomer Description

Cat ref. Plain Door

Cat ref. Glazed Door

1 Row 16 Module 1 Row 32 Module

JK114A JK129A

JK114AG JK129AG

JK114AG

3.4


Dimensions A Boards

Height

A

Depth


B

C

Width

SP&N A Boards Dimensions Modules Width Height Depth

Fixing Centres A B

Knockout Size C

8

254

236

130

108

165

163

12

326

236

130

180

165

235

16

398

236

130

252

165

307

22

505

236

130

323

165

378

2 x 12

326

472

130

235

395

535

2 x 16

398

472

130

307

395

307

2 x 22

505

472

130

378

395

378

3 x 22

505

708

130

378

632

378

ø 21 ø 33 ø 25 25 x 50 ø 21 ø 33 ø 25 25 x 50 ø 21 ø 33 ø 25 25 x 50 ø 21 ø 33 ø 25 25 x 50 ø 21 ø 33 ø 25 25 x 50 ø 21 ø 33 ø 25 25 x 50 ø 21 ø 33 ø 25 25 x 50 ø 21 ø 33 ø 25 25 x 50

No of Knockouts Top Bottom 3 3 1 1 1 6 6 1 1 1 1 8 8 1 1 1 1 11 11 1 1 1 1 6 6 1 1 1 1 8 8 1 1 1 1 11 11 1 1 1 1 11 11 1 1 1 1 -

Left 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 -

Right 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 -

Back 3 5 7 9 6 8 10 15

A Invicta 3 SP&N A Boards Fixing Centres (mm) A B C 350 35 228 330 35 378

Height

B Dimensions (mm) Height Width Depth JK114A/AG 300 465 132.5 JK129A/AG 450 465 132.5

C

Depth


Width

3.5

Invicta 3 Type B Distribution Boards 125A and 250A boards with multiple incomer choices Our Invicta 3 type B distribution board is the solution for modern commercial installations. The Invicta 3 range includes both 125A and 250A boards with multiple incomer choices. Our IP65 TP&N distribution boards are suitable for three phase applications where a high IP rating is required.

3.12

125A Meter Packs

3.13

125A Dual Metered Boards & Data Logger

3.14

125A Dual Meter Incomer Kits

3.15

250A Incoming 63A Outgoing Distribution Boards

3.16

250A Meter Packs & Dual Meter Incomer Kits

3.17

125A & 250A DIN Extension Boxes

3.18

125A & 250A Cable Spreader Boxes

3.19

125A & 250A Side DIN Boxes

3.20

125A & 250A Side Extension Boxes

3.21

125A & 250A Accessories & Spares

3.22

IP65 TP&N Distribution Boards

3.23


125A Incoming 63A Outgoing Distribution Boards

Invicta 3 Type B Distribution Boards At Hager we have developed the new Invicta 3 type B boards as a solution for modern commercial installations. The whole nature of electrical sub and final distribution for commercial installations has changed in the last few years. Typically there is a demand for more outgoing ways, more RCD protection, more metering and more control devices.

3.8


Full of features

1 2 3

Simple cable entry

The unique patented trunking and cable entry facility means there is no need to use paxolin. Cable protection is built into the endplate cable entry.

Ease of metering

You can install a meter next to the incoming device in the 125A board. Dual metered boards are also available.

The neutral bars

Transparent IP2X neutral cover allows for ease of cable installation. Screws fully turned down for easy and fast cabling.

The plus: Clear labelling

Ease of line identification L1, L2, L3 mouldings show through when front cover is fitted.

Glazed door

The Invicta 3 distribution board is arguably the best looking board on the market. Its glazed door allows a visual check of the devices without the need to open the door.

Electrical distribution is at the heart of a buildings services. Modern distribution boards must enable designs that meet the demands of the 17th Edition, the need for more metering and the demands for energy efficient solutions through control devices or building management systems.

We decided that it was time to design a board that meets these growing needs. Our new range of type B boards makes it easier for you to design and install electrical distribution systems that meet the needs of today and the future.


3.9

Invicta 3 Type B Distribution Boards Meeting the needs of the 17th Edition The new Invicta 3 range of type B boards has been produced to meet with the new IEE Wiring Regulations. Take a look below to see all of the new features we have designed in and how this is going to make installing a distribution board so much easier.

3 1

5 4

2

6


Technical data:

• Flush coupling to trunking and a smooth entry for cables to meet the requirements of the regulations thanks to the new cable entry end plate.

• Complies with BS EN 60439-3.

• The earth and neutral bars are positioned and designed for simpler installation.

• 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 18 & 24 triple pole outgoing ways.

• The neutral bars have transparent IP2X shrouding to make cabling easier. • The metering kits fit directly into the main board saving space and saving you the expense of buying an extension box. • Glazed door for great aesthetics and meeting the regulations.

• 125 Amp and 250 Amp rating, 230 / 400 V AC.

• IP3X. • Obround protected cable entry points. • Top and bottom removable gland plates.

Quick tips 1 2 3 4

Top tap off 100A top tap off allows for board extensions or MCB up to 100A with connection kit.

Shrouded neutral bar Clear shrouded neutral bar to IP2X allows the contractor to install cables without removing the shroud. Ensures safe and easy installation.

5 6

Single Pole Blank New single pole blank design is easy to fit to both three phase boards and on a full DIN rail (single phase and DIN rail extension boxes).

Metering Metering is integral with the main board - no need for an additional extension box saving time and money.

Trunking entry

Aesthetics

Unique trunking entry obround system top and bottom enables quick fitting to trunking and without the extra cost in time and materials.

Strong board aesthetics ideal for commercial offices, health care and education projects where boards may be situated in public areas.

Clear labelling L1, L2, L3 on moulding are visible with and without the front cover fitted, which show through the cover for ease of line identification.

Choice Two choices of boards 125A and 250A.

Invicta 3 Type B Distribution Boards 125A Incoming 63A Outgoing Invicta 3 125A TP&N Distribution Boards Surface mounted steel enclosures. Enclosure degree of protection: IP3X

Enclosures are available with plain or glazed doors.

A hager incoming kit must be used.

Fully shrouded copper busbar, rated 25kA short circuit conditional current.

Complies with BS EN 60439-3. For dimensions see page 3.25.

Supplied without incoming and outgoing devices.

Invicta 3 (125A Incoming 63A Outgoing) Description

Cat ref. Plain door


4 Triple Pole Ways 6 Triple Pole Ways 8 Triple Pole Ways 12 Triple Pole Ways 16 Triple Pole Ways 18 Triple Pole Ways 24 Triple Pole Ways

JK104B ¹ JK106B ¹ JK108B JK112B JK116B JK118B JK124B

JK104BG ¹ JK106BG ¹ JK108BG JK112BG JK116BG JK118BG JK124BG

¹ If additional cable space is required when fitting a meter pack a 300mm JK101SE can be used, see page 3.19. JK106BG

125A Incomer Kits (note: these incomer kits will only fit the 125A board(s) Description

Cat ref.

3 Pole 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board) 4 Pole 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board) 3 Pole 125A Switch Disconnector Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board) 3 Pole 125A Switch Disconnector Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board) 4 Pole 63A Contactor Incomer Kit includes Switch Disconnector (fits below distribution board, 300mm high) 4 Pole 100A Contactor Incomer Kit includes Switch Disconnector (fits below distribution board, 450mm high) 125A Direct Connection Kit (fits within distribution board) 4 Pole 63A 30mA RCCB Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board) 4 Pole 100A 30mA RCCB Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board) 4 Pole 100A 300mA RCCB Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board) 4 Pole 100A 300mA Time Delayed RCCB Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board) 4 Pole 100A 100mA RCCB Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board) 4 Pole 100A 100mA Time Delayed RCCB Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board)

JK11003S JK11004S JK11253S JK11254S JK10634C ² JK11004C ² JK11254D JK10634RH JK11004RH JK11004RL JK11004RLD JK11004RM JK11004RMD

² A 300 / 450mm space is required below the board for fitting, see page 3.26 for dimensions.

MCB Type B, C & D 10kA & 15kA Single and Triple Pole Cat ref.

0.5A

B Curve C Curve D Curve

- - - - - NBN106A NBN110A NBN116A NBN120A - - - - - NBN306A NBN310A NBN316A NBN320A NCN100A NCN101A NCN102A NCN103A NCN104A NCN106A NCN110A NCN116A NCN120A NCN300A NCN301A NCN302A NCN303A NCN304A NCN306A NCN310A NCN316A NCN320A NDN100A NDN101A NDN102A NDN103A NDN104A NDN106A NDN110A NDN116A NDN120A NDN300A NDN301A NDN302A NDN303A NDN304A NDN306A NDN310A NDN316A NDN320A

3.12

Single Pole Triple Pole Single Pole Triple Pole Single Pole Triple Pole

1A

2A

For a full list of protection devices see section 4. 3A

4A

6A


10A

16A

20A

Invicta 3 Type B Distribution Boards 125A Meter Packs 125A Meter Packs (note: these meter packs will only fit the 125A board(s) These kits fit into the main distribution board. (When fitting a meter pack to a JK104B(G) & JK106B(G), a JK101SE is required to provide additional incoming cable space). For sub billing metering applications please contact our Technical Support Helpline 0870 607 6677.

Description

Cat ref.

Digital Multifunction Meter Pack Pulsed Digital Multifunction Meter Pack ModBus kWh Meter Pack Pulsed

JK140MP JK140MJ JK142BA

JK140MP

25A

32A

40A

50A

63A

NBN125A NBN132A NBN140A NBN150A NBN163A NBN325A NBN332A NBN340A NBN350A NBN363A NCN125A NCN132A NCN140A NCN150A NCN163A NCN325A NCN332A NCN340A NCN350A NCN363A NDN125A NDN132A NDN140A NDN150A NDN163A NDN325A NDN332A NDN340A NDN350A NDN363A

RCBO Single Pole Sensitivity 30mA (10kA) Type B

RCBO Single Pole Sensitivity 30mA (10kA) Type C

Current rating

Current rating

Cat ref.

6A ADB106 10A ADB110 16A ADB116 20A ADB120 25A ADB125 32A ADB132 40A ADB140 45A ADB145 50A ADB150

Cat ref.

6A ADC106 10A ADC110 16A ADC116 20A ADC120 25A ADC125 32A ADC132 40A ADC140 45A ADC145 50A ADC150


3.13


Each meter pack contains: Meter, 3 Pole CT Block, 3 x Fuses & Carriers on DIN rail, Wiring Loom, Incoming Shroud, Instructions (including torque settings for electrical connections).

Invicta 3 Type B Distribution Boards 125A Dual Metered Boards & Data Logger The lighting and power meter board is a compact solution to meet the demands of energy metering within non-dwelling buildings.

The metered boards are supplied with meters that offer a pulsed output. For modbus output please contact our Technical Support Helpline 0870 607 6677.

The board is provided with the 125A incomer pre-fitted helping to save on installation time. For metered board dimensions see page 3.30. For dual meter incomer kit dimensions see page 3.28.

125A Dual Metered Boards Description


Composite Split Lighting / Power Metered Board 4 / 16 Composite Split Lighting / Power Metered Board 8 / 12

JKD1416B JKD1812B

JKD1812B

Data Logger Description

Cat ref.

ULog allows collection of data from up to 8 pulsed output meters allowing data to be analysed by a remote PC (.csv file output into spreadsheets / database).

JK107DL

• Instant access and data logging plus 1 temperature input. • Up to 8 pulsed inputs (CP1 - CP8). • Transfer data via Ethernet, RS232/485. • Logs up to 100 days of data from every 1 to 60 second intervals. • DIN or direct fixing. • 2 part terminals for easy conneciton. • Works seamslessly on an Intranet with a fixed IP address.

JK107DL

3.14


Invicta 3 Type B Distribution Boards 125A Dual Meter Incomer Kits Dual 125A Meter Incomer Kits (note: these dual meter incomer kits will only fit the 125A board`(s) Each fully assembled* meter pack contains: 1 x Incoming Switch.

Description

Cat ref.

Dual kWh Meter Pack 125A Incomer Pulsed Dual Multifunction Meter Pack 125A Incomer Pulsed Dual Multifunction Meter Pack 125A Incomer ModBus

JKD125BKWP JKD125BMP JKD125BMM

* distribution boards supplied separately to be assembled on site.

JKD125BMP (shown fitted with 2x JK108BG distribution boards (not incldued)


3.15


2 of each of the following: Meter, 3 Pole CT Block, 3 x Fuses & Carriers on DIN rail, Wiring Loom, Incoming Shroud, Instructions (including torque settings for electrical connections), Off Set Incoming Links, Neutral Connection Block and Extension Box with Glazed Doors.

Invicta 3 Type B Distribution Boards 250A Incoming 63A Outgoing Invicta 3 250A TP&N Distribution Boards Surface mounted steel enclosures.

Fully shrouded copper busbar, rated 25kA short circuit conditional current.

Enclosure degree of protection: IP3X Enclosures are available with plain or glazed doors.

Complies with BS EN 60439-3. For dimensions see page 3.25.

Supplied without incoming and outgoing devices. A hager incoming kit must be used.

Invicta 3 (250A Incoming 63A Outgoing) Description

Cat ref. Plain door


8 Triple Pole Ways 12 Triple Pole Ways 16 Triple Pole Ways 18 Triple Pole Ways 24 Triple Pole Ways

JK208B JK212B JK216B JK218B JK224B

JK208BG JK212BG JK216BG JK218BG JK224BG

JK206BG

250A Incomer Kits (note: these incomer kits will only fit the 250A board(s) Description

Cat ref.

3 Pole 250A MCCB Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board) 4 Pole 250A MCCB Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board) 3 Pole 250A Switch Disconnector Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board) 4 Pole 250A Switch Disconnector Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board) 4 Pole 250A Direct Connection Kit (fits within distribution board) 4 Pole 160A Contactor Incomer Kit includes Switch Disconnector (fits below distribution board, 450mm high) ¹ 3 Pole 125A MCCB Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board) 4 Pole 125A MCCB Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board)

JK22503M JK22504M JK22503S JK22504S JK22504D JK21604C ¹ JK21253M JK21254M

¹ A 450mm space is required below the board for fitting, see page 3.26 for dimensions

MCB Type B, C & D 10kA & 15kA Single and Triple Pole Cat ref.

0.5A

B Curve C Curve D Curve

- - - - - NBN106A NBN110A NBN116A NBN120A - - - - - NBN306A NBN310A NBN316A NBN320A NCN100A NCN101A NCN102A NCN103A NCN104A NCN106A NCN110A NCN116A NCN120A NCN300A NCN301A NCN302A NCN303A NCN304A NCN306A NCN310A NCN316A NCN320A NDN100A NDN101A NDN102A NDN103A NDN104A NDN106A NDN110A NDN116A NDN120A NDN300A NDN301A NDN302A NDN303A NDN304A NDN306A NDN310A NDN316A NDN320A

3.16

Single Pole Triple Pole Single Pole Triple Pole Single Pole Triple Pole

1A

2A

For a full list of protection devices see section 4. 3A

4A

6A


10A

16A

20A

Invicta 3 Type B Distribution Boards 250A Meter Packs & Dual Meter Incomer Kits 250A Meter Packs (note: these incomer kits will only fit the 250A board(s) These kits fit into the main distribution board.

Description

Cat ref.

Digital Multifunction Meter Pack Pulsed Digital Multifunction Meter Pack ModBus kWh Meter Pack Pulsed

JK240MP JK240MJ JK242BA

Dual Meter 250A Incomer Kits (note: these dual meter incomer kits will only fit the 250A board(s) Each meter pack contains: 1x Incoming Switch. 2 of each of the following: Meter, 3 Pole CT Block, 3 x Fuses & Carriers on DIN rail, Wiring Loom, Incoming Shroud, Instructions (including torque settings for electrical connections), Off Set Incoming Links, Neutral Connection Block and Extension Box with Glazed Doors. Description

Cat ref.

Dual kWh Meter Pack 250A Incomer Pulsed Dual Multifunction Meter Pack 250A Incomer Pulsed Dual Multifunction Meter Pack 250A Incomer ModBus

JKD250BKWP JKD250BMP JKD250BMM

JKD250BMP (shown fitted with 2x JK208BG distribution boards (not incldued)

25A

32A

40A

50A

63A

NBN125A NBN132A NBN140A NBN150A NBN163A NBN325A NBN332A NBN340A NBN350A NBN363A NCN125A NCN132A NCN140A NCN150A NCN163A NCN325A NCN332A NCN340A NCN350A NCN363A NDN125A NDN132A NDN140A NDN150A NDN163A NDN325A NDN332A NDN340A NDN350A NDN363A

RCBO Single Pole Sensitivity 30mA (10kA) Type B

RCBO Single Pole Sensitivity 30mA (10kA) Type C

Current rating

Current rating

Cat ref.

6A ADB106 10A ADB110 16A ADB116 20A ADB120 25A ADB125 32A ADB132 40A ADB140 45A ADB145 50A ADB150

Cat ref.

6A ADC106 10A ADC110 16A ADC116 20A ADC120 25A ADC125 32A ADC132 40A ADC140 45A ADC145 50A ADC150


3.17


Each meter pack contains: Meter, 3 Pole CT Block, 3 x Fuses & Carriers on DIN rail, Wiring Loom, Incoming Shroud, Instructions (including torque settings for electrical connections).

Invicta 3 Type B Distribution Boards 125A & 250A DIN Extension Boxes Extension boxes have plain or glazed doors and DIN rail chassis.

Complies with BS EN 62208.

Full width enclosure provided with 16 modular ways per row. For dimensions see page 3.26.

DIN Extension Boxes for 125A Primary Boards Description

Number of Rows

Number of DIN Module Ways

Cat ref. Plain door


125A DIN Extension Box 125A DIN Extension Box

1 2

16 32

JK116E JK132E

JK116EG JK132EG

JK116EG

DIN Extension Boxes for 250A Primary Boards Description

Number of Rows


Cat ref. Plain door


250A DIN Extension Box 250A DIN Extension Box

1 2

16 32

JK216E JK232E

JK216EG JK232EG

JK216E

Three Phase kWh Meters - Direct 63A


Voltage 230/400V~ 50/60Hz, Starting current = 40mA, Base current = 10A, Max current = 63A


Cat ref.

Description

Cat ref.

Description

EC350 EC352

Energy meter with pulsed output and total / partial counter Energy meter with pulsed output - total / partial counter and 2 tariffs

EC360 EC362 EC364M EC365B TE360

Energy meter with pulsed output and total / partial counter Energy meter with pulsed output - total / partial counter and 2 tariffs Energy meter with pulsed output - with MID approval Energy meter with bidirectional counter Energy meter with KNX output

Three Phase kWh Meters - Connection via Current Transformers To be connected to CT with 5A on the secondary Voltage 230/400V~ 50/60Hz, Starting current = 10mA, Max current on CT secondary = 6A

Current Transformers

Cat ref.

Description

Cat ref.

Ratio

Cat ref.

Ratio

EC370 EC372 TE370

Energy meter with pulsed output and total / partial counter Energy meter with puseld output - total / partial counter and 2 tariffs Energy meter with KNX ouput

SR051 SR101 SR150 SR200

50/5 100/5 150/5 200/5

SR250 SR300 SR400 SR600

250/5 300/5 400/5 600/5

3.18


Invicta 3 Type B Distribution Boards 125A & 250A Cable Spreader Boxes Cable spreader boxes are used for additional cabling space therefore do not require doors. If doors are desired optional door kits are available.

Full width enclosure provided with 16 modular ways per row. For dimensions see page 3.26.

Cable Spreader Boxes for 125A & 250A Primary Boards Description

125A Cat ref.

250A Cat ref.

Small Cable Spreader Box * Large Cable Spreader Box *

JK101SE JK102LE

JK201SE JK202LE

Description

125A Cat ref.

250A Cat ref.

Small Cable Spreader Box Door Kit Large Cable Spreader Box Door Kit

JK101DK JK102DK

JK101DK JK102DK

* no door included (see below for door kit).

JK101SE

Optional Door Kits for Cable Spreader Boxes (above)

JK101DK

Low Noise Contactors

Digital Time Switches

Cat ref.

Type

Coil AC Voltage

Power circuit AC1

Cat ref.

Description

ESC225S ESC240S ESC263S ESC325S ESC340S ESC428S ESC425S ESC440S ESC463S ESC426S

25A 2NO 40A 2NO 63A 2NO 25A 3NO 40A 3NO 25A 3NO + 1NC 25A 4NO 40A 4NO 63A 4NO 25A 4NC

230V 50Hz 230V 50Hz 230V 50Hz 230V 50Hz 230V 50Hz 230V 50Hz 230V 50Hz 230V 50Hz 230V 50Hz 230V 50Hz

25A - 400V~ 40A - 400V~ 63A - 400V~ 25A - 400V~ 40A - 400V~ 25A - 400V~ 25A - 400V~ 40A - 400V~ 63A - 400V~ 25A - 400V~

EG010 EG071 EG103 EG203 EG103E EG203E EG493E EE180 EE181

1 Channel Time Switch (Daily Cycle) 1 Channel TIme Switch (Weekly Cycle) 1 Channel Time Switch (Weekly Cycle - Basic Version) 2 Channel Time Switch (Weekly Cycle - Basic Version) 1 Channel Time Switch (Weekly Cycle - Evolution Version) 2 Channel Time Switch (Weekly Cycle - Evolution Version) 4 Channel Time Switch (Weekly / Annual Cycle) 1 Channel Astronomical Time Switch 2 Channel Astronomical Time Swtich

Surge Protection Devices Cat ref.

Description

SPN140D Single Pole 1.2kV SPN215R 2 Poles 1ø + N 1.0kV SPN415R 4 Poles 3ø + N 1.2kV

For a full list of modular devices and technical details see section 5.


3.19


Complies with BS EN 62208

Invicta 3 Type B Distribution Boards 125A & 250A Side DIN Boxes Side extension boxes provide a new concept for distribution boards to allow DIN rail mounted devices to be fitted on site.

They can be horizontally or vertically attached to distribution boards using 1 x JK100HK.


* All Side DIN Boxes supplied with 2x removable gland plates.

Side DIN Boxes for 125A Primary Boards Description

Number of Rows



32 Way Side DIN Box for JK104B 32 Way Side DIN Box for JK106B 48 Way Side DIN Box for JK108B 64 Way Side DIN Box for JK112B 80 Way Side DIN Box for JK116B

2 2 3 4 5

32 32 48 64 80

JK104BDFG JK106BDFG JK108BDFG JK112BDFG JK116BDFG

JK104BDFG

Side DIN Boxes for 250A Primary Boards Description

Number of Rows



80 Way Side DIN Box for JK208B 80 Way Side DIN Box for JK212B 96 Way Side DIN Box for JK216B 112 Way Side DIN Box for JK218B 128 Way Side DIN Box for JK224B

5 5 6 7 8

80 80 96 112 128


JK208BDFG





Cat ref.

Description

Cat ref.

Description

EC350 EC352


EC360 EC362 EC364M EC365B TE360


Three Phase kWh Meters - Connection via Current Transformers To be connected to CT with 5A on the secondary Voltage 230/400V~ 50/60Hz, Starting current = 10mA, Max current on CT secondary = 6A


Cat ref.

Description

Cat ref.

Ratio

Cat ref.

Ratio

EC370 EC372 TE370

Energy meter with pulsed output and total / partial counter Energy meter with puseld output - total / partial counter and 2 tariffs Energy meter with KNX ouput

SR051 SR101 SR150 SR200

50/5 100/5 150/5 200/5

SR250 SR300 SR400 SR600

250/5 300/5 400/5 600/5

3.20


Invicta 3 Type B Distribution Boards 125A & 250A Side Extension Boxes Side extension boxes provide a new concept for distribution boards to allow cable ways to be fitted on site.

They can be horizontally or vertically attached to distribution boards using 1 x JK100HK.

These are available in either half or full distribution board width.

Can be used with Invicta 3 Panelboards JN & JF. * All Side Extension Boxes supplied with 2x removable gland plates & 2x removable side plates.

Side Extension Boxes for 125A Primary Boards

JK104BSF

Description

Cat ref. Plain door

4 Way Side Extension Box for JK104B Full Width 6 Way Side Extension Box for JK106B Full Width 8 Way Side Extension Box for JK108B Full Width 12 Way Side Extension Box for JK112B Full Width 16 Way Side Extension Box for JK1116B Full Width

JK104BSF JK106BSF JK108BSF JK112BSF JK116BSF

Side Extension Boxes for 250A Primary Boards Description

Cat ref. Plain door

8 Way Side Extension Box for JK208B Full Width 12 Way Side Extension Box for JK212B Full Width 16 Way Side Extension Box for JK216B Full Width 18 Way Side Extension Box for JK218B Full Width 24 Way Side Extension Box for JK224B Full Width


Half Width Side Extension Boxes for 125/250A Primary Boards Doors are not available.

JK104BSH

Description

Cat ref. 125A

4 Way Half Width Extension Box 6 Way Half Width Extension Box 8 Way Half Width Extension Box 12 Way Half Width Extension Box 16 Way Half Width Extension Box 18 Way Half Width Extension Box 24 Way Half Width Extension Box Small Half Width Filler Box

JK104BSH JK106BSH JK108BSH JK208BSH JK112BSH JK212BSH JK116BSH JK216BSH - JK218BSH - JK224BSH JK101BSH JK201BSH


Cat ref 250A

Digital Time Switches

Cat ref.

Type

Coil AC Voltage

Power circuit AC1

Cat ref.

Description


25A 2NO 40A 2NO 63A 2NO 25A 3NO 40A 3NO 25A 3NO + 1NC 25A 4NO 40A 4NO 63A 4NO 25A 4NC

230V 50Hz 230V 50Hz 230V 50Hz 230V 50Hz 230V 50Hz 230V 50Hz 230V 50Hz 230V 50Hz 230V 50Hz 230V 50Hz

25A - 400V~ 40A - 400V~ 63A - 400V~ 25A - 400V~ 40A - 400V~ 25A - 400V~ 25A - 400V~ 40A - 400V~ 63A - 400V~ 25A - 400V~

EG010 EG071 EG103 EG203 EG103E EG203E EG493E EE180 EE181

1 Channel Time Switch (Daily Cycle) 1 Channel TIme Switch (Weekly Cycle) 1 Channel Time Switch (Weekly Cycle - Basic Version) 2 Channel Time Switch (Weekly Cycle - Basic Version) 1 Channel Time Switch (Weekly Cycle - Evolution Version) 2 Channel Time Switch (Weekly Cycle - Evolution Version) 4 Channel Time Switch (Weekly / Annual Cycle) 1 Channel Astronomical Time Switch 2 Channel Astronomical Time Swtich

Surge Protection Devices Cat ref.

Description

SPN140D Single Pole 1.2kV SPN215R 2 Poles 1ø + N 1.0kV SPN415R 4 Poles 3ø + N 1.2kV

For a full list of modular devices and technical details see section 5.


3.21



Invicta 3 Type B Distribution Boards 125A & 250A Accessories & Spares Invicta 3 125A & 250A Accessories

JK01B

Description

125A Accessories Cat ref.

250A Accessories Cat ref.

Door Locking Kit Spare Label Pack - All sizes (one pack) Single Phasing Kit Touch Up Paint Single Pole Busbar Blank JK1/2 Horizontal or Vertical Mechanical Connection Kit Brass Gland Plate - 2.0mm 100A Top Tap Off Kit Triple pole earth bar kit high integrity - 2 x 15 connections Document clip

JK222PK JK222PK JKLABELPACK JKLABELPACK JK125BSP JK250BSP JF95A JF95A JK01B JK01B JK100HK JK100HK JK1PLATEB JK100TAP JK030BEB

JK2PLATEB JK100TAP JK030BEB

JK01DC

JK01DC

JK222PK

Invicta 3 125A & 250A Trunking Kits and Spares Each trunking kit contains a trunking channel, lid, lid joing brackets, connecting brackets and end caps.

JK06TK

Description

100mm 4” Cat ref.

150mm 6” Cat ref.

Trunking Kit for Invicta 3 TP&N Spare Trunking Channel Spare Lid Spare End Cap Spare Connecting Bracket Spare Trunking Lid Joining Bracket

JK04TK JK06TK JK04TC JK06TC JK04TL JK06TL JK04TE JK06TE JK04TJ JK06TJ JK04TP JK06TP

Invicta 3 125A & 250A Spares

3.22

Description

125A Spares Cat ref.

JK1/2 Neutral Clear Shroud JK1/2 Busbar Stack Top Shroud JK1/2 Main Incomer Shroud Spare Gland Plate including Drill Markings - 1.2mm

JK1/NEUTRALSHROUD JK1/NEUTRALSHROUD JK1/2TOPSHROUD JK1/2TOPSHROUD JK1/INCOMERSHROUD JK2/INCOMERSHROUD JK1PLATEM JK2PLATEM


250A Spares Cat ref.

IP65 TP&N Distribution Boards 125A Incoming 63A Outgoing IP65 TP&N distribution boards are suitable for three phase applications where a high IP rating is required. The distribution boards are available with either a steel or GRP enclosure.

Incoming devices are supplied separately, and with a choice of 10 primary distribution boards up to 100 TP&N configurations are possible.

Available up to 125A direct connection with outgoing distribution through 4, 6, 8, 12 or 16 ways, rated for MCBs from 0.5A to 63A. Complies with BS EN 60439-3.


IP65 Distribution Boards - Metal Rated at 125A max Ways

Dimensions (mm) (HxWxD)

Cat ref.

4 6 8 12 16

800 x 600 x 300 800 x 600 x 300 800 x 600 x 300 950 x 600 x 300 950 x 600 x 300

JK104BD JK106BD JK108BD JK112BD JK116BD

JK106BD

IP65 Distribution Boards - Insulated Rated at 125A max Ways

Dimensions (mm) (HxWxD)

Cat ref.

4 6 8 12 16

800 x 600 x 300 800 x 600 x 300 800 x 600 x 300 1150 x 850 x 300 1150 x 850 x 300

JK104BF JK106BF JK108BF JK112BF JK116BF

JK106BF

125A Incomer Kits Description

Cat ref.

3 Pole 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board) 4 Pole 100A Switch Disconnector Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board) 3 Pole 125A Switch Disconnector Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board) 125A Direct Connection Kit (fits within distribution board) 4 Pole 63A 30mA RCCB Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board) 4 Pole 100A 30mA RCCB Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board) 4 Pole 100A 300mA RCCB Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board) 4 Pole 100A 300mA Time Delayed RCCB Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board) 4 Pole 100A 100mA RCCB Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board) 4 Pole 100A 100mA Time Delayed RCCB Incomer Kit (fits within distribution board)

JK11003S JK11004S JK11253S JK11254D JK10634RH JK11004RH JK11004RL JK11004RLD JK11004RM JK11004RMD


3.23

Invicta 3 125A / 250A Type B TP&N Dsitribution Boards Characteristics Standards Busbar Current Rating Busbar Type Busbar Rating

Incoming

Outgoing Ways Outgoing Protection Voltage Rating in AC IP Protection Enclosure Body Type Enclosure Paint Type Cable Entry

JK1**

JK2**

Designed, manufactured and tested to BS EN 60439-3 125A Fully shrouded copper 25kA Conditional 100A Switch 125A Switch 63A contactor AC3 100A contactor AC3 Direct connection RCCB incomers

Designed, manufactured and tested to BS EN 60439-3 250A Fully shrouded copper 25kA Conditional 250A MCS 250A MCCB 160A contactor AC3 Direct connection

Type B MCB (0.5A to 63A, 1P & 3P) Type C, D MCB, (0.5A to 63A, 1P & 3P) 1Mod and 2Mod RCBO (6A to 50A Type B & C, 30mA & 10mA) 230 / 400V IP3X to BS EN 60529 Steel Powder coat Grey white RAL 9002 Obround protected cable entry points

8, 12, 16, 18, 24 Triple pole way outgoing ways Type B MCB (0.5A to 63A, 1P & 3P) Type C, D MCB, (0.5A to 63A, 1P & 3P) 1Mod and 2Mod RCBO (6A to 50A Type B & C, 30mA & 10mA) 230 / 400V IP3X to BS EN 60529 Steel Powder coat Grey white RAL 9002 Obround protected cable entry points

M8 stud 50mm² cage or M5 stud 16mm² 16mm² M8

M8 stud 50mm² cage or M5 stud 16mm² 16mm² M8

4 x key hole fixing holes plus central top key hole for one fixing hanging / levelling Top and bottom removable Coin lock as standard, key lock as accessory

4 x key hole fixing holes plus central top key hole for one fixing hanging / levelling Top and bottom removable Coin lock as standard, key lock as accessory

4, 6, 8, 12, 16 Triple pole outgoing ways

Terminal Connection Capacity Incoming Earth Terminal Incoming Neutral Terminal Outgoing Earth Terminals Outgoing Neutral Terminals Enclosure Earth Stud Installation Mounting Gland Plate Integrated Locking System

3.24

General Catalogue 2012 • Commercial Distribution • Technical

Invicta 3 Dimensions Primary Boards & Side DIN Boxes

B UN LOCK

UN LOCK

ISOLATE SUPPLY BEFORE REMOVING COVER

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2

Height

L3

C

L1 L2 L3

JK104B/BG JK106B/BG JK108B/BG JK112B/BG JK116B/BG JK118B/BG JK124B/BG

Dimensions (mm) Height Width 500 465 550 465 625 465 850 465 950 465 1100 465 1250 465

Depth 132.5 132.5 132.5 132.5 132.5 132.5 132.5

Fixing Centres (mm) A B C 365 100 300 365 100 350 365 100 425 365 100 650 365 100 750 365 100 900 365 100 1050

Depth 165.5 165.5 165.5 165.5 165.5

Fixing Centres (mm) A B C 365 100 750 365 100 900 365 100 1050 365 100 1200 365 100 1350

250A Primary Boards L1 L2 L3

Depth

JK208B/BG JK212B/BG JK216B/BG JK218B/BG JK224B/BG

Dimensions (mm) Height Width 950 465 1100 465 1250 465 1400 465 1550 465

Width Contactor Incomers

JK10634C JK11004C JK21604C

A

Depth 165.5 234.5 234.5

125A Side DIN Boxes

B JK104BDFG JK106BDFG JK108BDFG JK112BDFG JK116BDFG Height

Dimensions (mm) Height Width 300 465 450 465 450 465


Depth 132.5 132.5 132.5 132.5 132.5


Depth 165.5 165.5 165.5 165.5 165.5


C 250A Side DIN Boxes



Depth

Width


3.25


125A Primary Boards

A

Invicta 3 Dimensions DIN Extension & Cable Spreader Boxes A

125A DIN Extension Boxes

B

Height

JK116E/EG JK132E/EG

Dimensions (mm) Height Width Depth 300 465 132.5 450 465 132.5

Fixing Centres (mm) A B C 365 150 365 80 290

C 250A DIN Extension Boxes

JK216E/EG JK232E/EG

Depth


Fixing Centres (mm) A B C 365 150 365 80 290

Width

A

Dimensions (mm)

B

Height

125A Cable Spreader Boxes

Height

JK101SE 300 JK102LE 450

C

Fixing Centres (mm)

Width

Depth Depth without with door optional door

A

B

C

465 465

91.5 91.5

365 365

150 80

290

132.5 132.5

250A Cable Spreader Boxes Dimensions (mm)

Depth

Height

JK201SE 300 JK202LE 450

Depth Depth without with door optional door

A

B

C

465 465

124.5 124.5

365 365

150 80

290

Width

3.26

Fixing Centres (mm)

Width


165.5 165.5

Invicta 3 Dimensions Side Extension Boxes 125A Side Extension Boxes

B

Height



Depth 91.5 91.5 91.5 91.5 91.5


Depth 124.5 124.5 124.5 124.5 124.5



A

C 250A Side Extension Boxes



Depth 125A Half Width Side Extension Boxes

Width JK104BSH JK106BSH JK108BSH JK112BSH JK116BSH

Dimensions (mm) Height Width 500 232.5 550 232.5 625 232.5 850 232.5 950 232.5

Depth 91.5 91.5 91.5 91.5 91.5


250A Half Width Side Extension Boxes

JK208BSH JK212BSH JK216BSH JK218BSH JK224BSH

Dimensions (mm) Height Width 950 232.5 1100 232.5 1250 232.5 1400 232.5 1550 232.5

Depth 124.5 124.5 124.5 124.5 124.5



3.27

Invicta 3 Dimensions Dual Meter Incomer Kits A

Height

B

C

L1

L2

L3

N

Depth

Width 125A Dual Meter Incomer Kits Dimensions (mm) Height Width Depth JKD125BKWP 450 465 132.5 JKD125BKWM 450 465 132.5 JKD125BMP 450 465 132.5 JKD125BMM 450 465 132.5


250A Dual Meter Incomer Kits Dimensions (mm) Height Width Depth JKD250BKWP 625 465 165.5 JKD250BKWM 625 465 165.5 JKD250BMP 625 465 165.5 JKD250BMM 625 465 165.5

3.28



Invicta 3 Dimensions 125A Rated Metered Boards 125A Rated Metered Boards

A B UN LOCK

UN LOCK


L1

JKD1416B JKD1812B


Fixing Centres (mm) A B C 365 100 1350 365 100 1350

L2 L3 L1 L2 L3


L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3

Height

L1 L2 L3

C

UN LOCK

UN LOCK


L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3

L1 L2 L3

L1 L2 L3

Depth

Width


3.29

Invicta 3 Panelboards Helping you to meet Part L2 of the Building Regulations The last few years have seen a major change in the design and installation of commercial electrical distribution systems. The panelboard is at the heart of such a system, whether acting as the main incoming board or as part of the sub distribution. Modern electrical distribution systems have more RCD protection, more metering and more control devices. Panelboards have to offer a flexible solution to help meet these needs. The new Invicta 3 panelboard range includes 250A, 400A, 630A & 800A panelboards with new MCCB incomers. Prewired meter packs allow installers to fit metering into the board for both the incoming and outgoing ways. All the internal wiring is included. Installation is fast and simple, thanks to a number of features. There is generous space where it is needed for cable bending radii at the top, bottom and sides of the board and twin and earth neutral bars allow easy identification of earth and neutral conductors with the corresponding phase conductors.

3.36

250A Rated DIN Extension Boxes, Cable Spreader Boxes & Accessories

3.37

400A Incoming 125A Outgoing Panelboards

3.38

400A Rated DIN Extension Boxes, Cable Spreader Boxes & Accessories

3.39

630A / 800A Incoming 125A / 250 Outgoing Panelboards

3.40

630A / 800A Rated Pan Assemblies

3.41

630A / 800A Rated DIN Extension Boxes, Cable Spreader Boxes

3.42

630A / 800A Rated Accessories

3.43


250A Incoming 125A Outgoing Panelboards

Invicta 3 Easy fit panelboards Our Invicta 3 Panelboards are easiest panelboards to fit, the pan assembly, door and front cover can all be removed to make the product lighter when fixing to the wall. Keyhole slots and a central fifth keyhole fixing point make fitting and levelling the board even simpler. In addition both the top and bottom gland plates are removable, so that the installer can prepare cable entries away from the board for convenience and to help prevent ingress of swarf and dust.

1

3.32

Glazed door

The glazed door allows devices to be viewed without opening the door.

2

Key hole fixing point

The key hole fixing points aid the installer when fitting the board to the wall, the central 5th keyhole makes levelling easier.

General Catalogue 2010 / 2011 • Commercial Distribution

3

Pre-wired meter packs

Installer only has to fit the packs into the board. All internal wiring is included.

Our Invicta 3 panelboard range is the most aesthetically pleasing available on the market. It is one of the few boards available that has a glazed door, which is important not only aesthetically, but also because an ordinary person as defined by the 17th edition can view the board while it is still locked.

A wide range of accessories make the panelboards easy to adapt for onsite build and tailored solutions. These accessories include key lock, extension boxes, meter packs and DIN rail boxes.


3.33

Invicta 3 Panelboards Meeting the needs for distribution Take a look below to see all the new features we have designed in and how this is going to make installing a panelboard so much easier.

3 5

2

4 1


Technical data:

• Flush coupling to trunking and a smooth entry for cables to meet the requirements of the regulations thanks to the new cable entry end plate.

• 250A, 400A, 630A & 800A rating.

• The earth and neutral bars are positioned and deisgned for simpler installation.

• Removable gland plates.

• The metering kits fit directly into the main board saving space and saving you the expense of buying an extension box. • Glazed door for great aesthetics and meeting the regulations.

• IP3X.

Quick tips 1 2 3 4

Twin earth and neutral bars Allows easy identification of earth & neutral conductors with corresponding line conductors.

Generous cable space Sufficient space for cable bending radii at the top, bottom and sides.

Removable gland plates The top and bottom removable gland plates allows the installer to prepare cable entries away from the board preventing ingress of swarf etc.

Pre-wired meter packs Installer only has to fit the packs into the board. All internal wiring is included.

5 6 7 8

Removable pan assembly To lighten the product when fixing to the wall, pan assemblies can also be purchased as a separate part for fitting into cubicle switchboards.

The perfect match The Invicta 3 panelboards have been designed to suite perfectly with the Invicta 3 Type B distribution boards.

Plain and Glazed Doors The glazed door allows devices to be viewed without opening the door.

Accessories Key lock, cable extension boxes, meter packs, DIN rail boxes. Invicta 3 panel boards are adaptable for contractor on site build and tailored solutions.

Invicta 3 Panelboard System (250A Rated) 250A Incoming 125A Outgoing Options Key lock, meter pack, DIN rail, extension box, spreader box.

Internal separation Form 3A. 4, 6, 8, 12, 16 Triple Pole outgoing ways.

Outgoers 1 & 3 pole MCCB 70mm2 flexible. 1 & 3 pole MCCB 95mm2 solid.

Construction Enclosures manufactured from 1.2mm CR4 cold reduced mild steel, phosphate pretreated and powder coated to 00A01 BS4800.

Cable Capacity Incomers 3 and 4 pole MCCB. Cable capacity 185mm2 max lug width 25mm. 3 and 4 pole non auto MCCB. Cable capacity 185mm2 max lug width 25mm Direct connection kit. M8 hexagonal bolt. (Larger cables can be connected by using extended connections, see page 4.38 MCCB section).

Busbar Ratings Busbar rated current 250A continuous. Busbar rated short-time withstand current 25kA for 1s direct connected.

Specification Complies with BS EN 61439-2. Enclosure degree of protection: IP3X

Outgoing MCCBs Single pole 16-125A (10 ratings) Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic trips. Triple pole 25-125A (6 ratings), adjustable thermal fixed magnetic trips. Form 3B is achieved using the optional terminal shield (see MCCB accessories on page 4.38). For accessories see page 3.37. For dimensions see page 3.47.

Invicta 3 Panelboards (250A Incoming 125A Outgoing) Comprises of enclosure, pan assembly, twin neutral and earth bar. Supplied without incoming kit (one of the incomer kits listed below must be used).

JN204BG

Description

Cat ref. Plain door


4 Way 6 Way 8 Way 12 Way 16 Way

JN204B JN206B JN208B JN212B JN216B

JN204BG JN206BG JN208BG JN212BG JN216BG

Incomer Kits Description

Cat ref.

3 Pole 250A MCCB Incomer Kit (Adj. Thermal 0.63, 0.8, 1) 40kA (Magnetic 5, 7, 9, 11 x In) 4 Pole 250A MCCB Incomer Kit (Adj. Thermal 0.63, 0.8, 1) 40kA (Magnetic 5, 7, 9, 11 x In) 3 Pole 250A Non-Auto MCCB Incomer Kit 4 Pole 250A Non-Auto MCCB Incomer Kit 250A Direct Connection Kit

JN223BM JN224BM JN223BS JN224BS JN224BD

For RCD incomer option & tailored solutions contact our Technical Support Helpline on 0870 607 6677

250A Rated Pan Assemblies Description

Cat ref.

JN204B Pan Assembly JN206B Pan Assembly JN208B Pan Assembly JN212B Pan Assembly JN216B Pan Assembly

JN204BPA JN206BPA JN208BPA JN212BPA JN216BPA

JN204BPA

Outgoing Devices MCCBs - Single Pole Rating.

16A 20A 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A 80A 100A 125A

3.36

MCCBs - Triple Pole Adjustable Thermal 18kA Fixed Thermal Mag 10 x In

25kA Fixed Thermal Mag 10 x In

HDA014Z HHA014Z HDA018Z HHA018Z HDA023Z HHA023Z HDA030Z HHA030Z HDA038Z HHA038Z HDA048Z HHA048Z HDA061Z HHA061Z HDA078Z HHA078Z HDA098Z HHA098Z HDA123Z HHA123Z

Rating.

25A 40A 63A 80A 100A 125A


18kA Adjustable Thermal 0.63 - 0.8 - 1x In Mag 10 x In


HDA025U HHA025U HDA040U HHA040U HDA063U HHA063U HDA080U HHA080U HDA100U HHA100U HDA125U HHA125U

For a full list of protection devices see section 4.

Invicta 3 Panelboard System (250A Rated) DIN Extension Boxes, Cable Spreader Boxes & Accessories DIN Extensions Boxes have plain or glazed doors and DIN rail chassis.

Cable spreader boxes are used for additional cabling space therefore do not require doors. If doors are desired optional door kits are available.

For dimensions see page 3.47. JK extension boxes can be used with this range see page 3.21.

Supplied with DIN Rail Description

Cat ref. Plain door


1 Row 26 Mod (300mm Height) 2 Row 52 Mod (450mm Height)

JN201BE JN203BE

JN201BEG JN203BEG

JN201BE

Cable Spreader Box Description

Cat ref.

Small (300mm Height) (Door not included) Large (450mm Height) (Door not included) Small Cable Spreader Box Door Kit Large Cable Spreader Box Door Kit

JN205BE JN206BE JN205DK JN206DK

JN205BE

Meter Pack These kits fit into the main panelboard. Description

Cat ref.

Comprises of a digital multi function meter pulsed output, 3 x control circuit fuse carriers, wiring harness and CTs. The meter pack fits directly into the main board.

JN201BA

JN201BA


Cat ref.

Touch Up Paint 30ml Allen Key Set End Plate for Invicta 3 (250A) Key lock with one key x125 Frame Blank (3x blanks required per triple pole way) Multi Padlock Plate (for integral toggle lock) fits to toggle for up to 3 padlocks max ø8mm

JF95A JF296A JN2PLATE JK222PK JN001BP HXA039H

JN001BP


3.37


DIN Extension Boxes

Invicta 3 Panelboard System (400A Rated) 400A Incoming 125A Outgoing Options Key lock, meter pack, DIN rail, extension box, spreader box. Construction Enclosures manufactured from 1.5mm CR4 cold reduced mild steel, phosphate pretreated and powder coated to 00A01 BS4800.

Specification Complies with BS EN 61439-2. Enclosure degree of protection: IP3X Internal separation Form 3A 6, 8, 12, 16, 18 Triple Pole outgoing ways. Cable Capacity Incomers 3 and 4 pole MCCB. Cable capacity 240mm2 max lug width 35mm. 3 and 4 pole non auto MCCB.

Cable capacity 240mm2. Max lug width 35mm on extended connections fitted to incomer. Direct connection kit. M10 hexagonal bolt Cable Capacity Outgoers 1 & 3 pole MCCB 70mm2 flexible. 1 & 3 pole MCCB 95mm2 solid. Busbar Ratings Busbar rated current: 400A continuous

Busbar rated short-time withstand current 35kA for 1s direct connected (unconditional) Outgoing MCCBs Single pole 16-125A (10 ratings). Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic trips. Triple pole 20-125A (6 ratings) adjustable thermal fixed magnetic trips. For dimensions see page 3.48.

Invicta 3 Panelboards (400A Incoming 125A Outgoing) Comprises of enclosure, pan assembly, neutral bar and earth bar. Supplied without incoming kit (one of the incomer kits listed below must be used).

JF406B

Description

Cat ref. Plain door


6 Way 8 Way 12 Way 16 Way 18 Way

JF406B JF408B JF412B JF416B JF418B

JF406BG JF408BG JF412BG JF416BG JF418BG

Incomer Kits 400A incomers come complete with spreader connections. Description

Cat ref.

3 Pole 400A MCCB Incomer Kit (Adjustable Thermal 0.63, 0.8, 1 x In) 50kA (Magnetic 5, 7, 9, 11 x In) 4 Pole 400A MCCB Incomer Kit (Adjustable Thermal 0.63, 0.8, 1 x In) 50kA (Magnetic 5, 7, 9, 11 x In) 3 Pole 400A Switch Disconnector (Non-Auto MCCB) Incomer Kit 4 Pole 400A Switch Disconnector (Non-Auto MCCB) Incomer Kit 400A Direct Connection Kit

JF443BM JF444BM JF443BS JF444BS JF444BD

For RCD incomer option contact our technical support helpline on 0870 607 6677

400A Rated Pan Assemblies Description

Cat ref.

JF406B 6 Way Pan Assembly JF408B 8 Way Pan Assembly JF412B 12 Way Pan Assembly JF416B 16 Way Pan Assembly JF418B 18 Way Pan Assembly

JF406BPA JF408BPA JF412BPA JF416BPA JF418BPA

Outgoing Devices MCCBs - Single Pole Rating.

16A 20A 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A 80A 100A 125A

3.38

MCCBs - Triple Pole Adjustable Thermal 18kA Fixed Thermal Mag 10 x In

25kA Fixed Thermal Mag 10 x In


Rating.

25A 40A 63A 80A 100A 125A






Invicta 3 Panelboard System (400A Rated) DIN Extension Boxes, Cable Spreader Boxes & Accessories DIN Extensions Boxes have plain or glazed doors and DIN rail chassis.


For dimensions see page 3.45. For a h3 MCCBs see page 4.30 onwards.

Supplied with DIN Rail. Description

Cat ref. Plain door



JF801E JF803E

JF801EG JF803EG

JF801E

Cable Spreader Box (to fit JF4 & JF8 boards) Description

Cat ref.


JF805E JF806E JF805DK JF806DK

JF805E

JF4 Meter Pack These kits fit into the main distribution board. Please consult Hager if meter pack is used with 630A direct connection kit. Description

Cat ref.


JF403BA

JF403BA

Accessories

HXD039H

Description

Cat ref.

Locking Kit for Incoming Device (All Ratings) Touch Up Paint 30ml Allen Key Set End Plate for Invicta 3 400A Range Key lock with one key x125 Frame 1 pole blank (3x blanks required per triple pole) Outgoer Locking Kit (fits to toggle for up to 3 padlocks max ø 8mm2)

HXD039H JF95A JF296A JFPLATE JK222PK JN001BP HXA039H

For other accessories see MCCB pages 4.42-4.43 & 4.45-4.46.


3.39


DIN Extension Boxes (to fit JF4 & JF8 boards)

Invicta 3 Panelboard System (630A / 800A Rated) 630A / 800A Incoming 125 / 250A Outgoing Construction Enclosure manufactured from 1.5mm CR4 cold reduced mild steel, phosphate pretreated and powder coated to 00A01 BS4800. Removable gland plates are provided top and bottom for ease of installation.

The removal of the gland plates and cable spreader also allows the mounting of DIN rail extension boxes and meter packs.

Incomers Switch Disconnector 630A/800A. MCCB 400A/630A. Direct connection 800A. M12 hexagonal bolt.

Specification Complies with BS EN 60439-1. Enclosure degree of protection: IP3X Internal separation. Form 3A. 8, 12, 18 TP outgoing ways.

Busbar Ratings Busbar rated current: 800A Busbar rated short-time with-stand current 25kA conditional 630A switch disconnector incomer. Busbar rated short time withstand current 35kA for 1x direct connection.

Outgoing MCCBs Single pole up to 125A - 70mm2 flexible. Single pole up to 125A - 95mm2 solid. Triple pole up to 250A -120mm2 flexible. Incomers Cable capacity 400A – 2 x 240mm2 630A – 2 x 240mm2 For dimensions see page 3.48.

Invicta 3 Panelboards (630A / 800A Incoming 125A / 250A Outgoing) Max 125A Outgoing Devices ¹ Max incomer rating of 630A on this panelboard Description

Cat ref. Plain door


8 Way 12 Way 18 Way

JF608B ¹ JF812B JF818B

JF608BG ¹ JF812BG JF818BG

¹ Max allowed incomer of 630A on this panelboard JF608B

Invicta 3 Panelboards These boards will accept a range of MCCB frame sizes: • 125A frame: 16-125A SP/TP • 250A frame: 80-250A TP only ² Max incomer rating of 630A on this panelboard

JF60204B

Description

Cat ref. Plain door


6 Way (2 x 250A  + 4 x 125A ) 8 Way (2 x 250A  + 6 x 125A ) 8 Way (4 x 250A  + 4 x 125A ) 12 Way (2 x 250A  + 10 x 125A ) 12 Way (4 x 250A  + 8 x 125A ) 18 Way (4 x 250A  + 14 x 125A ) 18 Way (6 x 250A  + 12 x 125A )

JF60204B ² JF80206B JF80404B JF80210B JF80408B JF80414B JF80612B

JF60204BG ² JF80206BG JF80404BG JF80210BG JF80408BG JF80414BG JF80612BG

² Max allowed incomer of 630A on this panelboard

Incomer Kits Description

Cat ref.

4 Pole 400A Switch Disconnector Incomer JF844BSW ³ 4 Pole 630A Switch Disconnector Incomer JF864BSW ³ 4 Pole 800A Switch Disconnector *Select the required 800A rated panelboard *800LBS (e.g. JF80206BG) and add the suffix 800LBS e.g. JF80206BG800LBS 800A Direct Connection Kit JF884BD ³ 3 Pole 400A MCCB Incomer Kit (Adjustable Thermal 0.63, 0.8 - 1 x In) 50kA JF843BM (Magnetic 5, 7, 9, 11 x In) 4 Pole 400A MCCB Incomer Kit (Adjustable Thermal 0.63, 0.8 - 1 x In) 50kA JF844BM (Magnetic 5, 7, 9, 11 x In) 3 Pole 630A MCCB Incomer Kit (Adjustable Thermal 0.4 - 1 x In) 50kA (Magnetic 2.5 - 8 x In) JF863BM 4 Pole 630A MCCB Incomer Kit (Adjustable Thermal 0.4 - 1 x In) 50kA (Magnetic 2.5 - 8 x In) JF864BM ³ A 300mm cable spreader box recommended (see page 3.42).

3.40


Invicta 3 Panelboard System (630A / 800A Rated) 630 / 800A Rated Pan Assemblies Description

Cat ref.

JF608B Pan Assembly JF812B Pan Assembly JF818B Pan Assembly JF80210B Pan Assembly JF60204B Pan Assembly JF80206B Pan Assembly JF80408B Pan Assembly JF80414B Pan Assembly JF80404B Pan Assembly JF80612B Pan Assembly

JF608BPA * JF812BPA JF818BPA JF80210BPA JF60204BPA * JF80206BPA JF80408BPA JF80414BPA JF80404BPA JF80612BPA * These pan assemblies are rated at 630A

Outgoing Devices  MCCBs - 125A 18kA Single Pole

 MCCBs x250 40kA - Triple Pole Rating.

Cat ref.

100A HNB100H 125A HNB125H 160A HNB160H 200A HNB200H 250A HNB250H

Rating.

18kA Fixed Thermal

16A 20A 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A 80A 100A 125A


25kA Fixed Thermal

 MCCBs - 125A 25kA Triple Pole Adjustable Thermal Rating.


25A 40A 63A 80A 100A 125A





3.41


630A / 800A Rated Pan Assemblies

Invicta 3 Panelboard System (630A / 800A Rated) DIN Extension Boxes, Cable Spreader Boxes DIN Extensions Boxes have plain or glazed doors and DIN rail chassis.


For dimensions see page 3.48. For a h3 MCCBs see page 4.34 onwards.

DIN Extension Boxes (to fit JF4 & JF8 boards) Supplied with DIN Rail Description

Cat ref. Plain door



JF801E JF803E

JF801EG JF803EG

JF801E

Cable Spreader Box (to fit JF4 & JF8 boards) Description

Cat ref.


JF805E JF806E JF805DK JF806DK

JF805E

JF8 Meter Pack These kits fit into the main panelboard. Please consult Hager if meter pack is used with 800A direct connection kit JF884BD. Description

Cat ref.


JF803BA

JF803BA

3.42


Invicta 3 Panelboard System (630A / 800A Rated) Accessories

HXD039H

Description

Cat ref.

Locking Kit for Incoming Device (All Ratings) Touch Up Paint 30ml Allen Key Set End Plate for Invicta 3 800A Range Key lock with one key x125 Frame 1 pole blank (3x blanks required per triple pole) x250 Frame 3 pole blank (1x blank required per triple pole) Outgoer Locking Kit (fits to toggle for up to 3 padlocks max ø 8mm2)

HXD039H JF95A JF296A JFPLATE JK222PK JN001BP JF003BP HXA039H

For other accessories see MCCB pages 4.42-4.43 & 4.45-4.46.

JN001BP


3.43


Accessories

Invicta 3 Panelboard system (800A MCCB) 800A Incoming 125 / 250A Outgoing The Hager range of 800A panel boards has been designed to complement our Invicta 3 distribution system. The 800A MCCB incomer board is designed specifically for applications where an adjustable 800A MCCB incomer device is required.

Construction The enclosure is manufactured from 1.5mm CR4 cold reduced mild steel, phosphate treated and powder coated to 00A01 BS4800. Busbar Rated current: 800A 35kA for 1 sec. Removable gland plates are provided top and bottom for ease of installation”

Specification Complies with BS EN 61439-2 Enclosures degree of protection: IP3X Internal Separation: Form 3A Cable Capacity: Outgoing devices 125A frame (16 - 125A) Flexible: min 6mm², max 70mm² Rigid: min 6mm², max 95mm² 250A frame (100 - 250A) Lug connection: max width 25mm, M8. For dimensions see page 3.49

Invicta 3 Panelboards (800A Incoming 125 / 250A Outgoing) Max. 125A outgoing devices Description

Cat ref. Plain door

Cat ref. Transparent door

12 Way 18 Way

JHF812B JHF818B

JHF812BG JHF818BG

Description

Cat ref. Plain door

Cat ref. Transparent door

8 Way (2 x 250A  + 6 x 125A ) 8 Way (4 x 250A  +4 x 125A ) 12 Way (2 x 250A  + 10 x 125A ) 12 Way (4 x 250A  + 8 x 125A ) 18 Way (4 x 250A  + 14 x 125A ) 18 Way (6 x 250A  + 12 x 125A )

JHF80206B JHF80404B JHF80210B JHF80408B JHF80414B JHF80612B

JHF80206BG JHF80404BG JHF80210BG JHF80408BG JHF80414BG JHF80612BG

Invicta 3 Panelboards These boards will accept two MCCB frame sizes 125A frame: 16 - 125A 250A frame: 100 - 250A

Incomer Kits

3.44

Description

Cat ref. Plain door

800A 3 Pole MCCB incomer 800A 4 Pole MCCB incomer

JHF883BM JHF884BM


Outgoing Devices  MCCBs - 125A 18kA Single Pole

 MCCBs x250 40kA - Triple Pole Cat ref.

100A HNB100H 125A HNB125H 160A HNB160H 200A HNB200H 250A HNB250H

Rating.

18kA Fixed Thermal

16A 20A 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A 80A 100A 125A


25kA Fixed Thermal


Rating.

 MCCBs - 125A 25kA Triple Pole Adjustable Thermal Rating.


25A 40A 63A 80A 100A 125A





3.45

Invicta 3 Panelboard System Characteristics

250A

400A

630 / 800A

800A

Series Busbar current rating Busbar type Busbar rated short-time withstand current Internal separation

JN2** JF4** 250A 400A Type B Fully Shrouded Copper

JF6**/JF8** 800A

JHF8** 800A (for 800A MCCB only)

25kA for 1 sec

35kA for 1 sec

35kA for 1 sec

Form 3A

Incoming

Up to 250A MCCB, MCS Up to 400A MCCB, MCS

Up to 630A MCCB, 800A LBS 16 - 125A 100A - 250A 415V

16 - 125A 100A - 250A 415V

M10 M12 Up to 50mm² 16A - 125A: Up to 50mm2 100A - 250A: M8 Stud M10

M10 M12 Up to 50mm² 16A - 125A: Up to 50mm2 100A - 250A: M8 Stud M10

35kA for 1 sec

Outgoing

16 - 125A max.

16 - 125A max.

Voltage rating in AC IP Protection Enclosure body type Enclosure paint type Cable entry

415V 415V IP3X Steel Powder coat Grey white RAL 9002 Via Gland Plates

800A MCCB

Terminal Connection capacity Incoming earth terminal Incoming neutral terminal Outgoing earth terminals

M8 M8 Up to 50mm²

M10 M12 Up to 50mm²

Outgoing neutral terminals Up to 50mm²

Up to 50mm²

Enclosure earth stud

M10

M8

Installation Mounting

3.46

Surface (Wall)


Invicta 3 Panelboard System (250A Rated) Dimensions Primary Boards

JN204B/G JN206B/G JN208B/G JN212B/G JN216B/G

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3

Width 700 700 700 700 700

Depth 160 160 160 160 160 Commercial Distribution

ISOLATE BEFORE REMOVING COVER

Dimensions (mm) Height 950 1100 1100 1250 1550

Height


1 2 3 4 5 6

7 1

7

2

8

3

9

4

10

5

11

6

12

8

11 12

B1 B2

L1 L2 L3

Depth

Terminals

9 10

B3

Neutral 2 x 6 x 50mm 2 x 9 x 50mm 2 x 12 x 50mm 2 x 18 x 50mm 2 x 24 x 50mm

Earth 2 x 6 x 50mm 2 x 9 x 50mm 2 x 12 x 50mm 2 x 18 x 50mm 2 x 24 x 50mm

Bond 1 x 3 x 50mm 1 x 3 x 50mm 1 x 3 x 50mm 1 x 3 x 50mm 1 x 3 x 50mm

Cables outgoing ways: 25 - 50mm2 CSA Flex 25 - 70mm2 CSA Solid

Width

MCCB Connections Earth Neutral

250A M8 250A M8 250A M8

Extension Boxes

Height

Dimensions (mm) Height JN201BE/G 300 JN203BE/G 450 JN205BE 300 JN206BE 450

Width 700 700 700 700

Depth 160 160 125 125

Depth

Width


3.47

Invicta 3 Panelboard System (400A, 630A & 800A Rated) Dimensions Primary Boards


L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2

Height

L3


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 1

10

2

11

3

12

4

13

5

14

6

15

7

16

8

17

9

18

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

B1 B2 B3

L1

L2

L3

Dimensions (mm) Height Width 1250 900 1250 900 1400 900 1550 900 1700 900 1250 900 1400 900 1700 900 1250 900 1250 900 1400 900 1400 900 1400 900 1700 900 1700 900

JF406B/G JF408B/G JF412B/G JF416B/G JF418B/G JF808B/G JF812B/G JF818B/G JF60204B/G JF80206B/G JF80404B/G JF80210B/G JF80408B/G JF80414B/G JF80612B/G

Depth 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220

Terminals

Depth

Width

Neutral 2 x 9 x 50mm 2 x 12 x 50mm 2 x 18 x 50mm 2 x 24 x 50mm 2 x 12 x 50mm 2 x 18 x 50mm 2 x 27 x 50mm 2 x 6 x 50mm 2 x 9 x 50mm 2 x 6 x 50mm 2 x 15 x 50mm 2 x 12 x 50mm 2 x 21 x 50mm 2 x 18 x 50mm

Earth 2 x 9 x 50mm 2 x 12 x 50mm 2 x 18 x 50mm 2 x 24 x 50mm 2 x 12 x 50mm 2 x 18 x 50mm 2 x 27 x 50mm 2 x 9 x 50mm 2 x 12 x 50mm 2 x 12 x 50mm 2 x 18 x 50mm 2 x 18 x 50mm 2 x 27 x 50mm 2 x 27 x 50mm

2 x M8 Bolt 2 x M8 Bolt 4 x M8 Bolt 2 x M8 Bolt 4 x M8 Bolt 4 x M8 Bolt 6 x M8 Bolt

Bond 1 x 3 x 50 1 x 3 x 50 1 x 3 x 50 1 x 3 x 50 1 x 3 x 50 1 x 3 x 50 1 x 3 x 50 1 x 3 x 50 1 x 3 x 50 1 x 3 x 50 1 x 3 x 50 1 x 3 x 50 1 x 3 x 50 1 x 3 x 50

Cables outgoing ways: 25 - 50mm2 CSA Flex 25 - 70mm2 CSA Solid 400A M10 630A M12

Earth

400A M10 630A M12

Height

MCCB Connections

Extension Boxes

JF801E/G JF803E/G JF805E JF806E

Depth

Dimensions (mm) Height 300 450 300 450

Width

3.48


Width 900 900 900 900

Depth 220 220 158 158

Invicta 3 Panelboard System (800A Rated) Dimensions Primary Boards

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2

Height

L3


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Depth 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220


JHF812B/G JHF818B/G JHF80206B/G JHF80404B/G JHF80210B/G JHF80408B/G JHF80414B/G JHF80612B/G


Dimensions (mm) Height Width 2050 900 2200 900 1900 900 1900 900 2050 900 2050 900 2200 900 2200 900

10 1

10

2

11

3

12

4

13

5

14

6

15

7

16

8

17

9

18

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

B1 B2 B3

L1

L2

L3

Depth

Width


3.49

Fuse Combination Switches 20 - 800A SPSN, TP&N, TPSN Description The Hager range of fuse combination switches has been designed to complement both the TP&N and panelboard ranges by providing individual protection and control of individual circuits. The enclosures up to 100A have been designed to provide adequate cabling space without the need for additional cable spreader boxes. Operation of the device is through a door mounted rotary handle which is mechanically interlocked to prevent access to live conductors when the switch is in the on position. The handle is also padlockable in the off position.

All versions will accept standard BS88 fuse links and can be converted to switch disconnector by fitting copper links. Utilisation category AC22B - 630 - 800A AC23 - 20 - 400A Product features Complies with: BS EN 60947-3 IP31. Range: SPSN 20-100A (4 ratings) TPN 20-630A (12 ratings) TPSN 20- 630A (12 ratings)

Note:

Maximum rated fuse links are fitted in all fuse combination switches.

Cable Capacity 20A = 16mm2 32A = 16mm2 63A = 25mm2 100A = 95mm2 125A = 95mm2 160A = 95mm2 200A = 240mm2 250A = 240mm2 315A = 240mm2 400A = 240mm2 630A = 2 x 300mm2 800A = 2 x 300mm2 For dimensions see page 3.51. For technical information see page 3.52.

Fuse Combination Switches Single Pole and Switched Neutral

Description Cat ref. Cat ref. Cable extension boxes if required

20A Fuse Combination Switch SP&SN 32A Fuse Combination Switch SP&SN 63A Fuse Combination Switch SP&SN 100A Fuse Combination Switch SP&SN

JFB202U JFB203U JFD206U JFE210U JZA701

JFD206

Fuse Combination Switches Triple Pole and Neutral


20A Fuse Combination Switch TP&N 32A Fuse Combination Switch TP&N 63A Fuse Combination Switch TP&N 100A Fuse Combination Switch TP&N 125A Fuse Combination Switch TP&N 160A Fuse Combination Switch TP&N 200A Fuse Combination Switch TP&N 250A Fuse Combination Switch TP&N 315A Fuse Combination Switch TP&N 400A Fuse Combination Switch TP&N 630A Fuse Combination Switch TP&N 800A Fuse Combination Switch TP&N

3.50


JFB302U JFB303U JFD306U JFE310U JZA701 JFG312U JZA701 JFG316U JZA701 JFG320U JZA701 JFG325U JZA701 JFH331U JZA702 JFH340U JZA702 JFI363U JZA703 JFI380U JZA703

Fuse Combination Switches 20 - 800A SPSN, TP&N, TP&SN cont. Fuse Combination Switches Triple Pole and Switched Neutral


JFG416U

JFB402U JFB403U JFD406U JFE410U JZA701 JFG412U JZA701 JFG416U JZA701 JFG420U JZA701 JFG425U JZA701 JFH431U JZA702 JFH440U JZA702 JFI463U JZA703 JFI480U JZA703


20A Fuse Combination Switch TP&SN 32A Fuse Combination Switch TP&SN 63A Fuse Combination Switch TP&SN 100A Fuse Combination Switch TP&SN 125A Fuse Combination Switch TP&SN 160A Fuse Combination Switch TP&SN 200A Fuse Combination Switch TP&SN 250A Fuse Combination Switch TP&SN 315A Fuse Combination Switch TP&SN 400A Fuse Combination Switch TP&SN 630A Fuse Combination Switch TP&SN 800A Fuse Combination Switch TP&SN

Copper Links For conversion to isolating switches Description

Cat ref.

63A 100A 125 / 200A 315 / 400A 630A

JC60L JC10L JC20L JC40L JC63L


3.51

Switch Disconnectors 20 - 800A TP&N, TP&SN Description The hager range of switch disconnector has been designed to complement the FCS, TPN and panelboard ranges by providing individual protection and control of individual circuits up to 800A.

Operation of the device is through a door mounted rotary handle which is mechanically interlocked to prevent access to live conductors when the switch is in the on position. The handle is also padlockable in the off position.

The enclosures have been designed to provide adequate cabling space without the need for additional cable spreader boxes.

Utilisation category AC-21 AC-22 Product features Complies with: BS EN 60947-3 IP31.

Cable Capacity 20A = 16mm2 32A = 16mm2 63A = 50mm2 100A = 50mm2 125A = 50mm2 160A = 95mm2 200A = 95mm2 250A = 150mm2 315A = 185mm2 400A = 240mm2 630A = 2 x 300mm2 800A = 2 x 300mm2 For technical information see page 3.53.

Switch Disconnectors Triple Pole and Neutral


JAB402

20A Switch Disconnector TP&N 32A Switch Disconnector TP&N 63A Switch Disconnector TP&N 100A Switch Disconnector TP&N 125A Switch Disconnector TP&N 160A Switch Disconnector TP&N 200A Switch Disconnector TP&N 250A Switch Disconnector TP&N 315A Switch Disconnector TP&N 400A Switch Disconnector TP&N 630A Switch Disconnector TP&N 800A Switch Disconnector TP&N

JAB302 JAB303 JAB306 JAB310 JAC312 JZA700 JAC316 JZA700 JAE320 JZA701 JAE325 JZA701 JAG331 JZA701 JAG340 JZA701 JAH363 JZA702 JAH380 JZA702

Switch Disconnectors Triple Pole and Switched Neutral


JAG440

3.52

20A Switch Disconnector TP&SN 32A Switch Disconnector TP&SN 63A Switch Disconnector TP&SN 100A Switch Disconnector TP&SN 125A Switch Disconnector TP&SN 160A Switch Disconnector TP&SN 200A Switch Disconnector TP&SN 250A Switch Disconnector TP&SN 315A Switch Disconnector TP&SN 400A Switch Disconnector TP&SN 630A Switch Disconnector TP&SN 800A Switch Disconnector TP&SN


JAB402 JAB403 JAB406 JAB410 JAC412 JZA700 JAC416 JZA700 JAE420 JZA701 JAE425 JZA701 JAG431 JZA701 JAG440 JZA701 JAH463 JZA702 JAH480 JZA702

IP65 Switch Disconnectors 10 - 80A TP&N Description The hager range of switch disconnectors further complements the existing commercial range giving a range of enclosed switch disconnectors to IP65 for individual isolation.

The devices are padlockable in three positions and offer plenty of cabling space. Clip on auxiliary contacts can be fitted retrospectively. Product features Complies with: BS EN 60947-3 IP65 to BS EN 60529

Cable Capacity 20 - 40A = 16mm2 63 - 100A = 35mm2 For technical information see page 3.54. Commercial Distribution

Range: TPN 10, 16, 25, 40, 63 & 80A

Utilisation category AC-21 AC-22

IP65 Switch Disconnectors Triple Pole and Neutral Description

In AC 21

In AC 22

Cat ref.

IP65 Switch Disconnector IP65 Switch Disconnector IP65 Switch Disconnector IP65 Switch Disconnector IP65 Switch Disconnector IP65 Switch Disconnector

20A 25A 40A 63A 80A 100A

10A 16A 25A 40A 63A 80A

JG00S JG01S JG02S JG03S JG04S JG05S

JG01S

Auxiliary Changeover Contacts Description

Cat ref.

1 NO / 1 NC 3 NO / 2 NC

JG10A JG20A


3.53

Enclosed MCCBs & Switch Fuses 4 Pole versions are available and 4 pole plus RCCB add-on are avialble.

Non-Auto MCCB Triple pole 125A Four pole 125A

The devices are mounted in IP31 enclosures, with cable knock outs top and bottom.

Construction MCCB Single pole 63 - 125A (3 ratings) Triple pole 63 - 125A (3 ratings) Four pole 63 - 125A (3 ratings)

Specification Complies with BS EN 61439-2

Both single and triple pole devices are equipped with fully rated neutral links.

MCCB-RCCB Four pole + RCCB 63A & 100A (2 ratings)

The Hager range of enclosed MCCBs has been designed for individual circuit protection and complements our Invicta 3 distribution system.

Cable Capacity 63 - 125A Flexible: min 6mm², max 70mm² Rigid: min 6mm², max 95mm²

RCCB add-on adjustable from 0.03A, 0.1A, 0.3A, 1A, 3A, 10A Time delay - Instananious, 60ms, 150ms, 300ms, 500ms, 1s For Enclosed MCCB technical details and dimensions see page 3.60. For Switch Fuse dimensions see page 3.61.

Enclosed MCCBs Single Pole and Neutral InA Icu

63A 100A 125A

18kA 18kA 18kA

Cat ref.

JG25BM JG28BM JG31BM

Enclosed MCCBs Triple Pole and Neutral InA Icu

JG31BM

63A (40A-50A 63A) 100A (63A-80A-100A) 125A (80A-100-125A) 125A

18kA 18kA 18kA Non-Auto

Cat ref.

JG26BM JG29BM JG32BM JG34BS

Enclosed MCCBs Four Pole InA Icu

63A (40A-50A 63A) 63A (40A-50A 63A) + RCCB add-on 100A (63A-80A-100A) 100A (63A-80A-100A) +RCCB add-on 125A (80A-100-125A) 125A

18kA 18kA 18kA 18kA 18kA Non-Auto

Cat ref.

JG27BM JG27BR JG30BM JG30BR JG33BM JG35BS

Switch Fuses For dimensions see page 3.61.

IU44-11

3.54

Description

Cat ref.

4 Module Metal Unit 1 x 100A Isolator, AC22A Connection capacity: 50mm2 rigid conductor, 35mm2 flexible conductor, 1 x 63A Fuse 4 Module Metal Unit 1 x 100A Isolator, AC22A Connection capacity: 50mm2 rigid conductor, 35mm2 flexible conductor, 1 x 80A Fuse 4 Module Metal Unit 1 x 100A Isolator, AC22A Connection capacity: 50mm2 rigid conductor, 35mm2 flexible conductor, 1 x 100A Fuse

IU4-16


IU44-18 IU44-11

Fuse Combination Switches & Switch Disconnectors Dimensions Switch Disconnectors

All dimensions are in mm and exclude the handle. Add 70mm to the depth to allow for the handle (110mm for 630 / 800A)

All dimensions are in mm and exclude the handle. Add 70mm to the depth to allow for the handle

JFB202U JFB203U JFB302U JFB303U JFB402U JFB403U JFD206U JFD306U JFD406U JFE210U JFE310U JFE410U JFG312U JFG412U JFG316U JFG416U JFG320U JFG420U JFG325U JFG425U JFH331U JFH431U JFH340U JFH440U JFI363U JFI463U JFI380U JFI480U

Description 20A SPSN 32A SPSN 20A TPN 32A TPN 20A TPSN 32A TPSN 63A SPSN 63A TPN 63A TPSN 100A SPSN 100A TPN 100A TPSN 125A TPN 125A TPSN 160A TPN 160A TPSN 200A TPN 200A TPSN 250A TPN 250A TPSN 315A TPN 315A TPSN 400A TPN 400A TPSN 630A TPN 630A TPSN 800A TPN 800A TPSN

Dimensions (mm) Width Height 200 250 200 250 200 250 200 250 200 250 200 250 300 325 300 325 300 325 375 400 375 400 375 400 375 500 375 500 375 500 375 500 375 500 375 500 375 500 375 500 500 650 500 650 500 650 500 650 600 800 600 800 600 800 600 800

Depth 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 300 300 300 300 350 350 350 350

Cable Extension Boxes for Fuse Combination Switches

JZA701 JZA702 JZA703

Rating 125 / 250A 315 / 400A 630 / 800A

Dimensions (mm) Width Height 375 200 500 250 600 300

JAB302 JAB303 JAB306 JAB310 JAC312 JAC316 JAE320 JAE325 JAG331 JAG340 JAH363 JAH380 JAB402 JAB403 JAB406 JAB410 JAC412 JAC416 JAE420 JAE425 JAG431 JAG440 JAH463 JAH480

Description 20A TPN 32A TPN 63A TPN 100A TPN 125A TPN 160A TPN 200A TPN 250A TPN 315A TPN 400A TPN 630A TPN 800A TPN 20A TPSN 32A TPSN 63A TPSN 100A TPSN 125A TPSN 160A TPSN 200A TPSN 250A TPSN 315A TPSN 400A TPSN 630A TPSN 800A TPSN

Dimensions (mm) Width Height 200 250 200 250 200 250 200 250 250 300 250 300 375 400 375 400 375 500 375 500 500 650 500 650 200 250 200 250 200 250 200 250 250 300 250 300 375 400 375 400 375 500 375 500 500 650 500 650

Depth 150 150 150 150 150 150 200 200 200 200 300 300 150 150 150 150 150 150 200 200 200 200 300 300


Fuse Combination Switches

Cable Extension Boxes for Switch Disconnectors

JZA700 JZA701 JZA702

Rating 125 / 160A 315 / 400A 630 / 800A

Dimensions (mm) Width Height 250 200 375 200 500 250

Depth 200 300 300

Depth 200 300 350


3.55

Fuse Combination Switches Thermal current lth (40ºC) Fuse size: BS

20A A1

32A A1

63A A2-A3

100A A4

125A B1-B2

160A B1-B2 B1-B2

200A B1-B3

800 8000 8000 A B 20 20 9 15

800 8000 8000 A B 32 32 15 45

800 8000 8000 A B 63 63 30 25

800 8000 8000 A B 100 100 51 45

800 8000 8000 A B 125 125 63 55

800 12000 12000 A B 160 160 80 60

800 A B 200 200 100 75

50 20

50 32

50 63

50 100

50 125

50 160

50 200

160

256

500

800

1000

1280

1600

200

320

630

1000

1250

1600

2000

20,000

20,000

10,000

10,000

10,000

10,000

10,000

-

-

-

-

-

-

**

2

2

6

9

9

9

20

Minimum Cu cable section Maximum Cu cable section Fuse types

2.5 16 NIT20

2.5 16 NIT32

10 25 TIS63

25 95 TCP100

35 95 TF125

50 95 TF160

70 240 TF200

Thermal current lth (40ºC) Fuse size: BS

250A B1-B3

315A B1-B4

400A C1-C2

630A* C1-C3

800A*

800

800

800

1000 1000

A B 250 250 ** **

A B 315 315 160 160 125

A B 400 400 220 220 150

A B 630 630 355 355 2 x 125

A B 800 800 ** **

50 250

50 315

50 400

50 630

50 800

2000

2520

3200

**

**

2500

3150

4000

**

**

10,000

10,000

10,000

8000

8000

-

-

-

-

**

-

20

20

40

40

70 240 TKF250

185 240 TKF315

185 240 TMF400

2 x 150 2 x 300 TTM630

2 x 150 2 x 300 TLM800

Rated insulated voltage Ui (V) Impulse voltages Uimp Operational current Ie (A) 415V ac AC-22A/AC-23B Motor power (kW) 400V ac Reactive power 400V ac (kVAR) Overload capacity Short-circuit with fuses (kA Rms) Fuse rating (A) BS88 Making & Breaking Capacity Breaking capacity 400V AC-23B (A Rms) Making capacity 400V AC-23B (A Rms) Withstand mechanical (number of operations) Withstand electrical (number of operations) Tightening torque Connection (mm2)

Rated insulated voltage Ui (V) Impulse voltages Uimp Operational current Ie (A) 415V ac AC-22A/AC-23B Motor power (kW) 400V ac Reactive power 400V ac (kVAR) Overload capacity Short-circuit with fuses (kA Rms) Fuse rating (A) BS88 Making & Breaking Capacity Breaking capacity 400V AC-23B (A R.M.S) Making capacity 400V AC-23B (A R.M.S) Withstand mechanical (number of operations) Withstand electrical (number of operations) Tightening torque (Nm) Connection (mm2) Minimum Cu cable section Maximum Cu cable section Fuse types

3.56


Switch Disconnectors Enclosed thermal current lthe Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated thermal current lthe (A) Rated operational current AC21A 500VAC AC22A AC21A 690VAC AC22A

20 800 20

32 800 32

63 800 63

100 800 100

125 800 125

160 800 160

200 800 200

250 800 250

20 20 20 20

32 32 32 32

63 63 63 63

100 100 100 100

125 125 125 125

160 125 160 125

160 125 160 125

250 250 200 125

1.26

1.26

1.5

1.5

7

7

7

9

0.16 -

0.256 -

0.504 -

0.64 -

1 20

1.28 20

1.28 18

2 30

1.8

1.8

2.1

2.1

11.9

11.9

11.9

15.3

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

Icw rated short time withstand value (kA/s) R.M.S value (kA) Peak withstand value (kA) Rated short circuit making capacity (kA) Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) Mechanical endurance (number of operations) Maximum cable size Tightening torque (Nm)

100,000

100,000

100,000

100,000

10,000

10,000

10,000

10,000

16 2

16 2

50 4

50 4

50 9

95 9

95 9

150 20

Enclosed thermal current lthe Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated thermal current lthe (A)

315 800 315

400 800 400

630 1000 630

800 1000 800

250 250 200 125

250 250 200 125

630 500 500 315

800 800 800 800

9

9

13

26

2 23

2 23

5.04 45

6.4 55

15.3

15.3

26

54.6

8

8

12

12

10,000

5,000

5,000

5,000

185 20

240 20

2 x 300 20

2 x 300 -


Overload capacity

Rated operational current AC21A 500VAC AC22A AC21A 690VAC AC22A Overload capacity Icw rated short time withstand value (kA/s) R.M.S value (kA) Peak withstand value (kA) Rated short circuit making capacity (kA) Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) Mechanical endurance (number of operations) Maximum cable size Tightening torque (Nm)

Table 9


3.57

IP65 Enclosed Isolating Switch IP65 Enclosed Isolating Switch All dimensions are in mm and exclude the handle. Add 27mm to the depth to allow for the handle on 10-25A products. Add 32mm to the depth to allow for the handle on 40-80A products.

JG00S JG01S JG02S JG03S JG04S JG05S

Description 10A TPN 16A TPN 25A TPN 40A TPN 63A TPN 80A TPN

Dimensions (mm) Width Height 100 136 100 136 100 136 136 201 136 201 136 201

Enclosed thermal current lthe Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated thermal current lthe (A)

Depth 74 105 105 105 118 118

16 690 25

25 690 40

40 690 63

63 690 80

80 / 100 690 100

25 16 16 16 16

40 25 20 20 15

63 40 32 32 25

80 63 63 63 40

100 100 100 100 63

4 7.5

5.5 11

7.5 15

11 22

15 30

63 50 5.4 6.6 1

63 50 6.6 7.2 1.1

63 50 7.2 8.3 1.6

80 50 8.3 8.7 1.7

100 50 8.7

250 3000 50,000 1.5 - 16 1.8

270 3000 50,000 1.5 - 16 1.8

320 3000 50,000 1.5 - 16 1.8

480 3000 50,000 2.5 - 35 2.5

504

Rated operational current AC21 400V Ie (A) AC22 230V AC22 400V cos phi 0.65 AC23 230V AC23 400V cos phi 0.35 Rated operational power AC23 230V (kW) AC23 400V Rated fused short circuit current Back-up fuse (A) R.M.S value Ik (kA) Peak value (kA) Rated short circuit making capacity (Icm) (kA) 5.4 Rated short time withstand current (lcm) (kA) 0.9 Rated breaking capacity Icn (A) AC23 400V cos phi 0.35 Electrical endurance (number of operations) Mechanical endurance (number of operations) Terminals mm2 Max. thermal torque (Nm)

3.58


2.3 - 35 2.5

Utilisation Categories and Definitions

Switch Fuse

A switch in which one or more poles have a fuse in series.

Fuse Switch

A switch in which one or more poles have a fuse carrier/link which forms the moving contact.

The definitions of these two basic types of fuse combination units have now been extended to include units suitable for making, breaking and isolation and units which are only suitable for providing isolation for maintenance work. Definition

Symbol

Function

Switch Fuse

Making and breaking current

Disconnector Fuse

Isolating

Switch Disconnector Fuse

Making, breaking and isolating

Fuse Switch

Making and breaking current

Fuse Disconnector

Isolating

Fuse Switch Disconnector

Making, breaking and isolating

Utilisation categories Utilisation categories are not new but they are important because they help the designer or specifier identify the correct unit for a particular application. The designation of the utilisation category is made up of three parts: 1. 2. 3. A B

The prefix AC or DC, which indicates the nature of the current. The two digit number, which indicates the type of application the unit is suitable for: 20 Connecting and disconnecting under no-load. 21 Switching of resistive loads. 22 Switching of mixed resistive and inductive loads. 23 Switching of highly inductive loads. The suffix A or B, which indicates whether the unit is suitable for frequent or infrequent operation. Frequent operation infrequent operation.

For example a fuse-combination unit feeding a 400V AC circuit of mixed resistive and inductive loads which would need to be operated frequently would require a minimum utilisation category of AC-22A. If the load was highly inductive, i.e. motor loads, then the minimum utilisation category would be AC-23A. Generally, category AC-23 does not cover the switching of capacitors. Usually this is the subject of agreement between manufacturer and user. Motor Power Circuit Protection Fuse-combination units can be used very effectively for motor power circuit protection, the energy limiting HRC fuse offering very good protection to its associated starter. Category AC-23A should be specified for this duty. Special motor circuit protection fuse links are available which eliminate the need to fit a larger bodied fuse just to take care of the starting current of the motor. The protection of motor power circuits should not be confused with the direct switching of a single motor. If a fuse-combination unit is required to perform this function then it must comply with the requirements of Appendix A of BS EN 60947-3 which makes provision for different utilisation categories for this application.

However, in order to keep the selection of fuse-combination units as simple as possible, hager offer a range of high performance double break switch-fuses, which also satisfy the isolating requirement of the British standard. These are correctly shown as and defined as a Fuse Combination Switch. Switch disconnectors - BS EN 60947-3. A range of switch disconnectors (isolators) are available for use on lower current ratings from 20A to 125A, these switches are rated at AC-22 and provide a cost effective alternative to the fuse combination switch especially where the utilisation category AC-23 is not required. ie; mixed resistive and inductive loads. These may be used at AC-23 providing they are derated in accordance with Table 9 page 3.53.


3.59


Fuse - Combination Units - BS EN 60947-3 Many people are attracted to fuse-combination units by their simplicity in application and their reliability in operation. They are particularly useful for use on very high prospective fault level systems where the high energy limiting characteristic of the HRC fuse can be effectively utilised. In the past fuse-combination units came in two forms:

Protection devices The complete solution We offer a wide range of protection devices, such as miniature circuit breakers, auxiliaries and accessories, RCCB add-on blocks, single pole and switched neutral devices, 2 and 4 pole RCCB’s, RCCB auxiliaries, RCBO’s, HRC fuse carriers, motor starters, earth fault relays, surge protection devices and the new range of moulded case circuit breakers.

4.2

Miniature Circuit Breakers 10kA & 15kA Type B,C & D

4.3

Miniature Circuit Breakers 80 - 125A

4.7

Single Pole & Switched Neutral Devices MCB

4.13

Single Pole & Switched Neutral Devices Fuse Carriers

4.14

2 & 4 Pole RCCBs

4.15

RCCB Auxiliaries

4.17

RCBO (Domestic)

4.18

RCBO (Commercial / Industrial)

4.19

RCBO Single Pole & Switched Neutral

4.20

HRC Fuse Carriers BS 1361

4.22

HRC Fuse Carriers BS 88

4.23

Motor Starters

4.24

Earth Fault Relays

4.26

Torroids

4.27

Surge Protection Devices

4.28

MCCBs

4.30

Protection Devices

Miniature Circuit Breakers 6kA Type B

Miniature Circuit Breakers 6kA Type B Single Pole Description Protection and control of circuits against overloads and short circuits. • In domestic installations

Technical data Type B tripping characteristics complies with BS EN 60898. Calibration temperature 30°C Breaking capacity: 6kA Voltage rating: 230 - 400V Current rating: 6 - 63A Electrical operations: 20,000

Connection capacity Rigid conductor 25mm2 Flexible conductor 16mm2

Single Pole MCBs 6kA Type B Rating

Width (17.5mm)

Cat ref.

6A 10A 16A 20A 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A

1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod

MTN106 MTN110 MTN116 MTN120 MTN125 MTN132 MTN140 MTN150 MTN163

MTN163

4.2

General Catalogue • Protection Devices

Miniature Circuit Breakers 10kA & 15kA B, C & D Curve In 0.5 to 63A Un : 230V-400V Will accept accessories see page 4.5

Description These MCBs allow you to ensure • Protection of circuits against short circuits • Protection of circuits against overload current • Control • Isolation

Isolation The state of isolation is clearly indicated by the “OFF” mechanical position on the toggle with the green colour.

Connection capacity • 25mm2 flexible conductor • 35mm2 rigid conductor

Rating

Width (17.5mm)

Cat ref. “B” Curve

Cat ref. “C” Curve

Cat ref. “D” Cruve

0.5A 1A 2A 3A 4A 6A 10A 16A 20A 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A

1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod

- - - - - NBN106A NBN110A NBN116A NBN120A NBN125A NBN132A NBN140A NBN150A NBN163A

NCN100A NCN101A NCN102A NCN103A NCN104A NCN106A NCN110A NCN116A NCN120A NCN125A NCN132A NCN140A NCN150A NCN163A

NDN100A NDN101A NDN102A NDN103A NDN104A NDN106A NDN110A NDN116A NDN120A NDN125A NDN132A NDN140A NDN150A NDN163A

Rating

Width (35mm)




0.5A 1A 2A 3A 4A 6A 10A 16A 20A 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A



NCN200A NDN200A NCN201A NDN201A NCN202A NDN202A NCN203A NCN204A NDN204A NCN206A NDN206A NCN210A NDN210A NCN216A NDN216A NCN220A NDN220A NCN225A NDN225A NCN232A NDN232A NCN240A NDN240A NCN250A NDN250A NCN263A NDN263A

Complies with: • BS EN 60898 (10kA) • BS EN 60947-2 (15kA)

NCN116A

Double Pole MCBs

NCN216A


4.3

Protection Devices

Single Pole MCBs

Miniature Circuit Breakers (continued) 10kA & 15kA B, C & D Curve In 0.5 to 63A Un : 230V-400V Will accept accessories see page 4.5

Description These MCBs allow you to ensure • Protection of circuits against short circuits • Protection of circuits against overload current • Control • Isolation

Isolation The state of isolation is clearly indicated by the “OFF” mechanical position on the toggle with the green colour.

Connection capacity • 25mm2 flexible conductor • 35mm2 rigid conductor

Rating

Width (52.5mm)




0.5A 1A 2A 3A 4A 6A 10A 16A 20A 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A





Rating

Width (70mm)




0.5A 1A 2A 3A 4A 6A 10A 16A 20A 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A





Complies with: • BS EN 60898 (10kA) • BS EN 60947-2 (15kA)

Triple Pole MCBs

NCN316A

Four Pole MCBs

NCN416A

4.4


Auxiliaries & Accessories for Devices NBN, NCN, NDN 10kA MCBs All auxiliaries are common to both single and multi-pole 10kA circuit breakers and RCCBs. Connection capacity 4mm2 flexible 6mm2 rigid MZ203 to + MZ201 + MZ201 + MZ202 + MCB MZ206 MZ201 MZ201 MZ201

Description

Width (8.75mm)

Cat Ref.

1NO +1NC Allows remote indication of main contact status

½ Mod

MZ201

Protection Devices

Auxiliary Contacts 5A - 230V~

MZ201

Auxiliary Contacts and Alarm Indiction Description

Width (8.75mm)

Cat Ref.

Allows indication of whether and alarm indication MCB has been turned off or tripped

½ Mod

MZ202

Shunt Trip Allows remote tripping of the associated device. Operation of the coil is indicated by a flag on the product fascia.

MZ204

Description

Width (17.5mm)

Cat Ref.

230V - 415Vac 110V - 130Vdc 24 - 48Vac 12 - 48Vdc

1 Mod

MZ203

1 Mod

MZ204

Under Voltage Release Allows MCB to be closed only when voltage is above 85% of Un. MCB will automatically trip when voltage falls to between 70-35% of Un. Operation of the coil is indicated by a flag on the product facia. Description

Width (17.5mm)

Cat Ref.

230Vac 48Vdc

1 Mod 1 Mod

MZ206 MZ205

Locking Kit Description

Cat ref.

Allows locking of the device in the off position Will accept two padlocks with hasps of 4.75mm diameter max. (supplied without padlock)

MZN175

MZN175


4.5

RCCB Add-on Blocks for MCB Devices NBN, NCN, NDN Description These products provide earth fault protection when associated with the 10kA (types NBN, NCN, NDN) range of MCBs.

58

45

44

They are designed to be fitted to the right hand side of 2 and 4 pole MCBs and the completed unit provides protection against: • Overload • Short circuit • Earth faults

Technical Data 3 Non-Adjustable sensitivities 30, 100 & 300mA nominal voltage 230 - 400V protection against nuisance tripping. 2 pole = 2 Modules 4 pole = 3 Modules

Connection Capacity • 16mm2 Flexible • 25mm2 Rigid All devices have a test facility.

BS EN 61009 Appendix G Selective (time delay) versions are available in 100 & 300mA

3

1

Double Pole RCCB Add-On Blocks 2 4

1

3

5

7

Sensitivity l∆n

In/A

Width (35mm)

Cat ref.

30mA 100mA 300mA Time Delayed Time Delayed

63A 63A 63A 63A 63A

2 Mod 2 Mod 2 Mod 2 Mod 2 Mod

BD264 BE264 BF264 BN264 BP264

Sensitivity l∆n

In/A

Width (52.5mm)

Cat ref.

30mA 100mA 300mA Time Delayed Time Delayed

63A 63A 63A 63A 63A


BD464 BE464 BF464 BN464 BP464

100mA 300mA

2 4 6 8

BD264

Four Pole RCCB Add-On Blocks

4.6

100mA 300mA


Miniature Circuit Breakers 80 - 125A C & D Curve

These circuit breakers are intended for the protection of the circuits against overloads and short circuits.

These circuit breakers are equipped with reinforced screw cages. A label holder is integrated under the toggle to ensure the location of the product. The “OFF” position is clearly shown by a green indicator below the toggle. Suitable for isolation (according to BS EN 60947-2) the isolation of the circuit breakers is indicated by a green indicator on the toggle. These circuit breakers have quick closing : fast and simultaneous closing of the contacts, independent of the handling speed.

Nominal Voltage 230/415 V~ Calibration setting : 30 °C (BS EN 60898 Part 1) Insulation voltage : 500 V Options Auxiliary • To visualise the state ON or OFF of the circuit breaker, • To ON/OFF remotely the circuit breaker • Locking mechanism • Terminal covers and phase separators • RCD add-on blocks

This increases the life of the circuit breaker whatever the type of load.

HMC C Curve 15 kA (BS EN 60898 Part 1) 15 kA for 80 - 100 - 125 A: BS EN 60947-2 Width 1.5 mod/pole

HMF C Curve 10 kA (BS EN 60898 Part 1) 10 kA for 80 - 100 - 125 A: BS EN 60947-2 width 1.5 mod/pole

HMD D Curve 15 kA (BS EN 60898 Part 1) 15 kA for 80 - 100 - 125 A: BS EN 60947-2 Width 1.5 mod/pole

Series HMC, HMD • Mounting capability: bistable DIN-rail latches (2 positions) upstream and downstream facilitate the mounting of the circuit breakers on the DIN-rail. • Terminals with tightening compensation. These circuit breakers are equipped with screw cages with tightening compensation, (reinforcement cage cable holding jaws). These elements contribute to an effective cable tightening over time. • These circuit breakers are equipped with cable terminals of type “fast on” upstream and downstream to feed an auxiliary low voltage circuit (indicating lights, auxiliary control...) Max. current 6A Max. cable csa - 6 mm2

Lockable Toggle MCB can be locked in “Off” position by the integrated locking facility on the toggle. This lock allows to insert a 2.5-3.5mm plastic cable tie where you can fit a warning card if necessary and allows a safer working environment for all personnel. RCD Add-On Blocks Simple, quick, adjustable and fixed 1. Assembly 2. Connection 3. Locking The assembly of the add-on block is carried out very quickly and easily. Simple and fast : it is a Hager innovation. add-on blocks 125A are available in fixed version and adjustable version.

Model

Icc / Curve

Accessories

Fast-on Connection

Tightening Comp. System

Lockable

Front Product Labelling

HMF

10kA / C

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

HMC, HMD

15kA / C, D

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes


4.7

Protection Devices

Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers Curves C & D In 80 to 125 A

Miniature Circuit Breakers 80 - 125A 10kA C Curve Curves C 10 kA BS EN 60898-1 10 kA BS EN 60947-2

Use Commercial and industrial applications.

In 80 to 125A

Connection Capacity • 35mm2 flexible wire (50mm2 possible with some cable pin lugs) • 70mm2 rigid wire

Tripping Curves “C” magnetic setting between 5 to 10 In.

KEMA Approved according to BS EN 60898-1.

Single Pole MCBs 10kA C Curve Rating

Width (26.25mm)

Cat ref.

80A 100A 125A

1 ½ Mod 1 ½ Mod 1 ½ Mod

HMF180T HMF190T HMF199T

HMF199T

Double Pole MCBs 10kA C Curve Rating

Width (52.5mm)

Cat ref.

80A 100A 125A

3 Mod 3 Mod 3 Mod


HMF299T

Triple Pole MCBs 10kA C Curve Rating

Width (75.75mm)

Cat ref.

80A 100A 125A

4 ½ Mod 4 ½ Mod 4 ½ Mod


HMF399T

Four Pole MCBs 10kA C Curve Rating

Width (105mm)

Cat ref.

80A 100A 125A

6 Mod 6 Mod 6 Mod


HMF499T

4.8


Miniature Circuit Breakers 80 - 125A 15kA C Curve Curves C 15 kA BS EN 60898-1 15 kA BS EN 60947-2

Use Commercial and industrial applications.

In 80 to 125A


Tripping Curves “C” magnetic setting between 5 to 10 In.

KEMA Approved according to BS EN 60898-1.

Rating

Width (26.25mm)

Cat ref.

80A 100A 125A

1 ½ Mod 1 ½ Mod 1 ½ Mod

HMC180T HMC190T HMC199T

HMC199T

Double Pole MCBs 15kA C Curve Rating

Width (52.5mm)

Cat ref.

80A 100A 125A

3 Mod 3 Mod 3 Mod


HMC299T

Triple Pole MCBs 15kA C Curve Rating

Width (78.75mm)

Cat ref.

80A 100A 125A

4 ½ Mod 4 ½ Mod 4 ½ Mod


HMC399T

Four Pole MCBs 15kA C Curve Rating

Width (105mm)

Cat ref.

80A 100A 125A

6 Mod 6 Mod 6 Mod


HMC499T


4.9

Protection Devices

Single Pole MCBs 15kA C Curve

Miniature Circuit Breakers 80 - 125A 15kA D Curve Curves D 15 kA BS EN 60898-1 15 kA BS EN 60947-2

Use Commercial an industrial applications.

In 80 to 125A


Tripping Curves “D” magnetic setting between 10 to 20 In.

KEMA Approved according to BS EN 60898-1

Single Pole MCBs 15kA D Curve Rating

Width (26.25mm)

Cat ref.

80A 100A 125A

1 ½ Mod 1 ½ Mod 1 ½ Mod

HMD180T HMD190T HMD199T

HMD199T

Double Pole MCBs 15kA D Curve Rating

Width (52.5mm)

Cat ref.

80A 100A 125A

3 Mod 3 Mod 3 Mod


HMD299T

Triple Pole MCBs 15kA D Curve Rating

Width (78.75mm)

Cat ref.

80A 100A 125A

4 ½ Mod 4 ½ Mod 4 ½ Mod


HMD399T

Four Pole MCBs 15kA D Curve Rating

Width (105mm)

Cat ref.

80A 100A 125A

6 Mod 6 Mod 6 Mod


HMD499T

4.10


Auxiliaries & Accessories for Devices HMF, HMC, HMD 10kA & 15kA MCBs Terminal Covers Screw Cap Description

Cat ref.

To cover connection terminals and screws of circuit breaker. The screw covers can be sealed.

MZN130

Phase Separator Description

Cat ref.

1 Set of 3 Phase Separators

MZN131

MZN131


4.11

Protection Devices

MZN130

RCCB Add-on Blocks Type AC HMF, HMC, HMD Fixed • High sensitivity 30 mA Instantaneous • Low sensitivity 300 mA Instantaneous Settings • Sensitivity I∆n 0.3-0.5 - 1A • Delay ∆t 0 - 60 -150 ms These devices are intended to be fixed on the right side of the circuit breakers to form differential circuit breakers from 80 to 125A, two, three or four pole. This “circuit breaker + block” ensures, in addition to the overload and short circuit protection, the protection of the installations against the insulation defects (300mA and 1A) and the protection of the people against the direct contacts (30mA) and indirect (300mA).

for MCB Devices

Adjustable Blocks The setting is done by actuating the thumb wheel on the front face. The setting thumb wheels are protected by a transparent sealable cover. Disassembly The bistable latch (2 positions) facilitate the assembly or disassembly by the bottom of the “circuit breaker + block.”

High Immunity The products with “reinforced immunity” reduce the unexpected tripping when they protect equipment generating disturbances (micro-processing, electronic ballast, etc.) The earth fault is indicated when the handle is in lower position (yellow colour). Test button for earth fault check.

These RCD add-on blocks exist in version AC and in version A-HI. Version AC The add-on blocks are protected against unexpected tripping caused by the transitory leakage currents: lightning, capacitive loading.

Tightening Compensation Cages These circuit breaker blocks are equipped with screw cages with tightening compensation, reinforcement arch and cable holding jaws. These elements contribute to an effective tightening over time.

Assembly and disassembly facilitated by the drawer assembly system. The terminal cover is dependent of the add-on block. It is provided with keying systems avoiding the omission of terminal tightening downstream of the circuit breaker. Nominal voltage: -15 +10 % 2 Poles: 230V three and four pole: 230 / 400V test button: 230 / 400V. In conformity with the requirements of the Appendix G of the BS EN 61009-1. In conformity with the requirements of standard BS EN 60947-2.

Connection Capacity • 35mm2 flexible connection (50º possible with some terminals), • 70mm2 rigid connection.

Double Pole RCD Add-On Blocks Sensitivity In/A Fixed / Adjustable l∆n

Width (105mm)

Cat ref.

Fixed 30mA Adjustable 0.3-0.5-1A Time Delayed 0-60-150ms

6 Mod 6 Mod

BDC280E BTC280E

Sensitivity In/A Fixed / Adjustable l∆n

Width (105mm)

Cat ref.

Fixed 30mA Adjustable 0.3-0.5-1A Time Delayed 0-60-150ms

6 Mod 6 Mod

BDC380E BTC380E

Sensitivity In/A Fixed / Adjustable l∆n

Width (105mm)

Cat ref.

Fixed 30mA Fixed 300mA Adjustable 0.3-0.5-1A Time Delayed 0-60-150ms

6 Mod 6 Mod 6 Mod

BDC480E BFC480E BTC480E

125A 125A

BTC280E

Triple Pole RCD Add-On Blocks

125A 125A

Four Pole RCD Add-On Blocks

BDC480E

4.12


125A 125A 125A

Single Pole & Switched Neutral (SPSN) Devices MCB Technical Data Type C tripping characteristics Complies with BS EN 60-898 Calibration temperature 30ºC Breaking capacity - 6kA Voltage rating - 230VAC

Connection Capacity Rigid 16mm2 Flexible 10mm2

Protection Devices

Description Protection and control of circuits against overloads and short circuits.

Single Pole and Switched Neutral MCB Rating

Width (17.5mm)

Cat ref.

6A 10A 16A 20A 32A 40A

1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod

MLN706A MLN710A MLN716A MLN720A MLN732A MLN740A

MLN710A

Single Module Blank Description

Cat ref.

Shrouds busbar and blanks spare ways

JK01B

JK01B


Cat ref.

Allows locking of the device in the off position Will accept two padlocks with hasps of 4.75mm diameter max. (supplied without padlock).

MZN175

MZN175


4.13

Single Pole & Switched Neutral (SPSN) Devices Fuse Carriers Description Protection and control of circuits against overloads and short circuits

Technical Data Characteristics type (fuse) gF Breaking capacity 10-20A 4kA 25 & 32A - 6kA Voltage rating - 250VAC

Connection Capacity Rigid 16mm2 Flexible 10mm2

Single Pole and Switched Neutral Fuse Carriers Supplied without fuse fitted Rating

Width (17.5mm)

Cat ref.

10A 16A 20A 25A 32A


L12401 L12501 L12601 L12701 L12801

Rating

Dimensions

Cat ref.

10A 16A 20A 25A 32A

8.5 x 23mm 10.3 x 25.8mm 8.5 x 31.5mm 10.3 x 31.5mm 10.3 x 38mm

LF138 LF139 LF140 LF141 LF142

L12401

Spare Fuse Type gF Supplied without fuse fitted

Single Module Blank Description

Cat ref.

Shrouds busbar and blanks spare ways

JK01B


Cat ref.

Allows locking of the device in the off position Will accept two padlocks with hasps of 4.75mm diameter max. (supplied without padlock)

MZN175

MZN175

4.14


2 & 4 Pole RCCBs AC Sensitive To open a circuit automatically in the event an earth fault between phase and earth, and/or neutral and earth. A wide range of current ratings and sensitivities are available. Suitable for domestic, commercial and industrial applications.

All RCCBs have trip free mechanisms and can be padlocked either on or off.

Terminal capacities 16-63A Rigid 25mm2 Flexible 16mm2 80&100A Rigid 50mm2 Flexible 35mm2

Operating Temperature Range • 5 to 40ºC class AC • 25 to 40ºC class A

Features Positive contact indication is provided by the rectangular flag indicator Red = Closed Green = Open Indication of trip is provided by the oval flag indicator Yellow = Tripped

Operating Voltage 2P 110-230Vac 4P 230 - 400Vac Width 2P - 35mm 4P - 70mm

Protection Devices

Technical Data Complies with BS EN 61008, IEC1008

Sensitivities (Fixed) 10, 30, 100, 300mA & 100 and 300mA time delayed.

2 Pole RCCB Sensitivity 10mA Sensitivity type AC

Current rating

Cat ref.

10mA 16A CCC216U

2 & 4 Pole RCCBs Sensitivity 30mA Sensitivity type AC Current rating

2 Pole Cat ref.

30mA 25A CDC225U 30mA 40A CDC240U 30mA 63A CDC263U 30mA 80A CD280U 30mA 100A CD284U

4 Pole Cat ref.

CDC425U CDC440U CDC463U CD480U CD484U

CDC225U

2 & 4 Pole RCCBs Sensitivity 100mA Sensitivity type AC Current rating

2 Pole Cat ref.

4 Pole Cat ref.

100mA 25A 100mA 40A 100mA 63A 100mA 80A 100mA 100A

CEC225U CEC240U CEC263U CE280U CE284U

CEC425U CEC440U CEC463U CE480U CE484U

Sensitivity type AC Current rating

2 Pole Cat ref.

4 Pole Cat ref.

300mA 25A 300mA 40A 300mA 63A 300mA 80A 300mA 100A

CFC225U CFC240U CFC263U CF280U CF284U

CFC425U CFC440U CFC463U CF480U CF484U

2 & 4 Pole RCCBs Sensitivity 300mA

CFC425U


4.15

2 & 4 Pole RCCBs cont. Time Delayed, DC Sensitive & Accessories To open a circuit automatically in the event an earth fault between phase and earth, and/or neutral and earth. A wide range of current ratings and sensitivities are available. Suitable for domestic, commercial and industrial applications. Technical Data Complies with BS EN 61008, IEC1008

Sensitivities (Fixed) 10, 30, 100, 300mA & 100 and 300mA time delayed.

All RCCBs have trip free mechanisms and can be padlocked either on or off.

Terminal capacities 16-63A Rigid 25mm2 Flexible 16mm2 80&100A Rigid 50mm2 Flexible 35mm2

Operating Temperature Range • 5 to 40ºC class AC • 25 to 40ºC class A

Features Positive contact indication is provided by the rectangular flag indicator Red = Closed Green = Open Indication of trip is provided by the oval flag indicator Yellow = Tripped

Operating Voltage 2P 110-230Vac 4P 230 - 400Vac Width 2P - 35mm 4P - 70mm

Time Delayed AC Sensitive Sensitivity type AC Current rating

2 Pole Cat ref.

100mA 100A CN284U 300mA 100A CP284U

4 Pole Cat ref.

CN484U CP484U

CP284U

Type A DC Sensitive Sensitivity type AC Current rating

2 Pole Cat ref.

4 Pole Cat ref.

10mA 16A 30mA 25A 30mA 40A 30mA 63A

CCA216U CDA225U CDA425U CDA240U CDA440U CDA263U CDA463U

CDA425U

Terminal Covers

4.16

Current rating

2 Pole Cat ref.

4 Pole Cat ref.

16 - 63A 80 - 100A

CZN005 CZ007

CZN006 CZ008


RCCB Auxiliaries

MZ203 CZ001 to MZ206

RCCB

Time Delayed

Description

Width (17.5mm)

Cat ref.

2 NO / 2NC 6A AC1 230V

1 Mod

CZ001

Protection Devices

Indicates the position of the associated RCCB on, off or tripped. Also acts as RCCB interface with standard MCB auxiliaries MZ203-MZ206.

CZ001

Shunt Trip Allows remote tripping of the associated device. Operation of the coil is indicated by a flag on the product fascia.

MZ203

Description

Width (17.5mm)

Cat ref.

230Vac - 400Vac 110V - 130Vdc 24 - 48Vac 12 - 48Vdc

1 Mod

MZ203

1 Mod

MZ204

Under Voltage Release Allows RCCB to be closed, only when voltage is above 85% of Un. RCCB will automatically trip when voltage falls to between 70-35% of Un (230V). Operation of the release is indicated by a flag on the product facia. Description

Width (17.5mm)

Cat ref.

230Vac 48Vac

1 Mod 1 Mod

MZ206 MZ205

MZ206


Cat ref.

Allows locking of the device in the off position. Will accept two padlocks with hasps of 4.75mm diameter max. (supplied without padlock).

MZN175

MZN175


4.17

RCBO (Domestic) Single Pole 6kA Compact protection devices which combine the overcurrent functions of an MCB with the earth fault functions of an RCCB in a single unit. A range of sensitivity and current ratings are available for use in domestic installations.

Technical Data Insulated DIN clip Complies with BS EN 61009, IEC1009 Sensitivities (fixed) 10mA and 30mA Breaking capacity: 6kA Flying neutral lead: 200mm Terminal Capacities 16mm2 rigid, 10mm2 flexible

Application 1 module devices provide a compact solution for installation in consumer units. These devices are 1pole & solid neutral. Operating Voltage 127-230V AC

Sensitivity 30mA (6kA) Current rating

Width (17.5mm)

Type B Cat ref.

6A 10A 16A 20A 32A 40A 45A 50A

1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod

ADN106 ADN110 ADN116 ADN120 ADN132 ADN140 ADN145 ADN150

ADN120


Cat ref.

This allows locking of the device toggle in the off position. Will accept two padlocks with hasps of 4.75mm diameter max. (supplied without padlock).

MZN175

MZN175

4.18


RCBO (Commercial / Industrial) Single Pole 10kA Compact protection devices which combine the overcurrent functions of an MCB with the earth fault functions of an RCCB in a single unit. A range of sensitivity and current ratings are available for use in commercial and industrial applications.

Technical Data Insulated DIN clip Complies with BS EN 61009, IEC1009 Sensitivities (fixed) 10mA, 30mA & 100mA Breaking capacity: 10kA Flying neutral lead: 700mm

Terminal Capacities 16mm2 rigid, 10mm2 flexible Application 1 module devices provide a compact solution for installation in consumer units and Invicta 3 distribution boards.

These devices are single pole & solid neutral. Operating Voltage 127-230V AC

Current rating

Width (17.5mm)

Type B Cat ref.

Type C Cat ref.

6A 16A 25A 32A

1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod

ACB106 ACB116 ACB125 ACB132

ACC106 ACC116 ACC125 ACC132

Current rating

Width (17.5mm)

Type B Cat ref.

Type C Cat ref.

6A 10A 16A 20A 25A 32A 40A 45A 50A

1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod

ADB106 ADB110 ADB116 ADB120 ADB125 ADB132 ADB140 ADB145 ADB150

ADC106 ADC110 ADC116 ADC120 ADC125 ADC132 ADC140 ADC145 ADC150

Current rating

Width (17.5mm)

Type B Cat ref.

Type C Cat ref.

10A 16A 20A 25A 32A


- - - - -

AEC110 AEC116 AEC120 AEC125 AEC132

ACB125 Sensitivity 30mA (10kA)

ADB106

Sensitivity 100mA (10kA)

AEC132


Cat ref.

Allows locking of the device in the off position. Will accept two padlocks with hasps of 4.75mm diameter max. (supplied without padlock).

MZN175

MZN175


4.19

Protection Devices

Sensitivity 10mA (10kA)

RCBO Single Pole & Switched Neutral Compact protection devices which provide MCB overcurrent protection and RCCB earth fault protection in a single unit. Complies with BS EN 61009

Technical Data The units are available with current ratings of 6A, 10A, 16A, 20A, 25A, 32A and 40A. The device switches both the phase and neutral conductors. All ratings have 30mA earth fault protection. The units feature indicators which show whether tripping is due to an overcurrent or earth fault.

Breaking capacity: 6kA Voltage rating: 110-230V. Current rating: 6-40A. Operations Mechanical life: 20,000 operations Connection Capacity Rigid conductor 25mm2 Flexible conductor 16mm2

RCBO Single Pole and Switched Neutral RCBO tripping current (30mA) with flying 700mm lead for neutral connection. Note: For use in consumer units and distribution boards only. Current rating

Width (35mm)

Type B Cat ref.

Type C Cat ref.

6A 10A 16A 20A 25A 32A 40A

2 Mod 2 Mod 2 Mod 2 Mod 2 Mod 2 Mod 2 Mod

ADA906U ADA910U ADA916U ADA920U ADA925U ADA932U ADA940U

ADA956U ADA960U ADA966U ADA970U ADA975U ADA982U ADA990U

ADA990U

4.20


RCBO Single Pole & Switched Neutral Type C 4.5kA Technical Data The units are available with current ratings of 6A, 10A, 16A, 20A, 25A, 32A and 40A. The device switches both the phase and neutral conductors. All ratings have 30mA earth fault protection. The units feature indicators which show whether tripping is due to an overcurrent or earth fault.

Breaking capacity:4.5kA Voltage rating: 110-230V. Current rating: 6-40A. Operations Mechanical life: 20,000 operations Connection Capacity Rigid conductor 25mm2 Flexible conductor 16mm2

Protection Devices

Compact protection devices which provide MCB overcurrent protection and RCCB earth fault protection in a single unit. Complies with BS EN 61009

RCBO Single Pole and Switched Neutral Type C 4.5kA All terminal version for cable in cable out applications e.g. local protection, caravan pitches, festive illuminations, street lighting. Note: Not for use in fixed busbar consumer units or distribution boards. Current rating

Width (35mm)

Type C Cat ref.

6A 10A 16A 20A 25A 32A

2 Mod 2 Mod 2 Mod 2 Mod 2 Mod 2 Mod

ADC806F ADC810F ADC816F ADC820F ADC825F ADC832F

ADC816F


4.21

HRC Fuse Carriers BS 1361 Protection and control of circuits against overloads and short-circuits:

58 37

Technical Data Fuse carriers suitable for fuses which fully comply with the dimensional, power loss, fusing factor, discrimination and time-current characteristic of BS 1361

45

Complies with BS 1361-1971 • Short-circuit rating:16.5kA (i.e. no further consideration of fault levels is necessary) • Colour coded ratings. Connection Capacities Top: 16 mm2 flexible cable & busbar

BS 1361 Fuse Carriers Complete with cartridge fuse. For single phase applications Current rating

Colour

Width (17.5mm)

Cat ref.

5A 230V 15A 230V 20A 230v 30A 230V

White Blue Yellow Red


LB113 LB115 LB116 LB118

LB113

BS 1361 HRC Spare Cartridge Fuses

4.22

Current rating

Colour

Cat ref.

5A (23 x 6.35 x 4.8mm) 15A (26 x 10.32 x 6.4mm) 20A (26 x 10.32 x 6.4mm) 30A (29 x 12.7 x 8mm) Spare Fuse Holder up to 20A

White Blue Yellow Red -

L15300 L15500 L15600 L15800 L14700


HRC Fuse Carriers BS 88 Fuse carrier 32A max. Protection and control of circuits against overloads and short circuits in three phase circuits.

58 37

45

Suitable for fuses which comply with BS 88-1-1975 and with the standardised performance requirements for industrial fuse links specified in BS 88 Part 2.

Rating voltage: 415 V a.c. 250 V d.c. • Fusing factor: class Q 1 • Rated breaking capacities: 80 kA at 415 V a.c. 40 kA at 250 V d.c.

Protection Devices

BS 88 Fuse Carriers Supplied without BS 88 fuses Characteristics

Width (17.5mm)

Cat ref.

32A max.

1 Mod

LS201

LS201

BS 88 HRC Spare Cartridge Fuses Characteristics

Cat ref.

2A (29 x 12.7 x 8mm) 4A (29 x 12.7 x 8mm) 6A (29 x 12.7 x 8mm) 8A (29 x 12.7 x 8mm) 10A (29 x 12.7 x 8mm) 16A (29 x 12.7 x 8mm) 20A (29 x 12.7 x 8mm) 25A (29 x 12.7 x 8mm) 32A (29 x 12.7 x 8mm)

L17100 L17200 L17300 L17400 L17500 L17600 L17700 L17800 L17900


4.23

Motor Starters 83 38

To ensure localised control and protection of single and three phase motors. Technical Data • Adjustable thermal relay • AC3 utilisation category • Connection capacity 45 2 conductors max size: Flexible 1 to 4mm2 Rigid 1.5 to 6mm2

Options Undervoltage release: MZ528N, MZ529N Auxiliary contacts: MZ520N, MZ527N Alarm contact: MZ527N

Note: Please consult us for enclosure selection

Complies With IEC 947-1, IEC 947-2 (appropriate parts of)

Motor Starters

MM501N

Current setting

Standard power ratings of 3 phase motors 50/60Hz (AC3 category) 230V (kW) 400V (kW)

Width (43.75mm)

Cat ref.

0.1 - 0.16A 0.16 - 0.25A 0.25 - 0.4A 0.4 - 0.6A 0.6 - 1.0A 1.0 - 1.6A 1.6 - 2.5A 2.5 - 4A 4 - 6A 6 - 10A 10 - 16A 16 - 20A 20 - 25A

- - 0.06 0.09 0.09 0.25 0.55 0.8 1.5 2.5 4 5.5 7.5

- 2 ½ Mod 2 ½ Mod 2 ½ Mod 2 ½ Mod 2 ½ Mod 2 ½ Mod 2 ½ Mod 2 ½ Mod 2 ½ Mod 2 ½ Mod 2 ½ Mod 2 ½ Mod

MM501N MM502N MM503N MM504N MM505N MM506N MM507N MM508N MM509N MM510N MM511N MM512N MM513N

- 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.12 0.55 0.8 1.5 2.5 4 7.5 9 12.5

Auxiliary Contacts Act as an indicating device to monitor the ON or OFF position. Characteristics

Width (8.75mm)

Cat ref.

1C + 1O 2A AC1 - 400V~

½ Mod

MZ520N

MZ520N

Alarm Contact Mounted inside the motor starter

4.24

Characteristics

Cat ref.

1C 1A AC1 - 400V~ / 2A AC1 - 230V~

MZ527N


Motor Starters cont. To ensure localised control and protection of single and three phase motors. Technical Data • Adjustable thermal relay • AC3 utilisation category • Connection capacity 45 2 conductors max size: Flexible 1 to 4mm2 Rigid 1.5 to 6mm2

Options Undervoltage release: MZ528N, MZ529N Auxiliary contacts: MZ520N, MZ527N Alarm contact: MZ527N

Note: Please consult us for enclosure selection

Complies With IEC 947-1, IEC 947-2 (appropriate parts of)

Protection Devices

83 38

Under Voltage Release To prevent automatic restarting of the controlled device Characteristics

Cat ref.

230V~ 50Hz 400V~ 50Hz

MZ528N MZ529N

Surface Mounting Enclosure Weatherproof IP55 with a removable window Dimensions (mm)

Cat ref.

W. 78 x H. 150 x D. 95

MZ521N

MZ521N

Emergency Stop Button Description

Cat ref.

IP65, mounted on surface mounting enclosure MZ521N

MZ530N


4.25

Earth Fault Relays Supply

Contactor/trip

Earth leakage relay

Conforms to IEC 1008

Detection torroid

These units ensure the protection of electrical installations. 30mA versions can provide supplementary protection against direct connection. This range of electronic earth fault relays provides monitoring of earth fault currents. When the fault current rises above the selected level, the output contacts of the product operate.

Depending on the relay selected, it can have either fixed or adjustable sensitivity, a time delay is also available for selectivity purposes. The relays are linked with detection torroids, 14 separate types are available, circular and rectangular in section (4.28). Common characteristics • Positive safety: the relay trips in the event of a break in the relay/torroid link. • Positive reset required after a fault is detected. • Test button for simulation of a fault. • Protected against nuisance tripping from transients. • DC sensitive. • Output: 1 C/O contact

250V~ 5/6A AC1. • Visual display of fault by red LED. Specific device features • LCD display on HR525 & HR534. • Adjustment of sensitivity and delay (selectable). • Extra positive safety contact (1C/O 250V~ 6A AC1). • Display of fault current before it triggers the relay (5% to 75%). • Extra output contact (250V 0.1A max.) to enable remote indication if fault currents over 50% of IΔn. • Remote test and reset (opto-coupled).

Torroids Circular dia. 35, 70, 105, 140, 210mm Rectangular 70 x 175, 115 x 305, 150 x 350mm Connection capacity Relay - 1.5 to 6mm2 Relay - torroid link 2 wires, 25m max. Test and remote reset link 3 wires, 20m max. For enclosure selection, please consult us. Width 1 Mod - 17.5mm 3 Mod - 52.5mm 4 Mod - 70mm 6 Mod - 105mm

Earth Fault Relay with Separate Detection Torroids

4.26

Designation

Characteristics

Earth fault relay C/O contact 5A AC1 Earth fault relay C/O contact 5A AC1 Earth fault relay C/O contact 6A AC1 Earth fault relay C/O contact 6A AC1 Earth fault relay C/O contact 6A AC1 Earth fault relay C/O contact 6A AC1 Earth fault relay C/O contact 6A AC1 Trip / reclose input feature Earth fault relay C/O contact 6A AC1 Solid State relay output Trip / reclose input feature

Instant trip, fixed sensitivity 1 Mod I∆n = 30mA Instant trip, fixed sensitivity 1 Mod I∆n = 300mA Adjustable sensitivity 3 Mod I∆n = 30mA, 100mA, 300mA 500mA, 1A, 3A, 10A Instant trip or time delay 0.1 - 0.3 - 0.4 - 0.5 - 1 - 3 secs Adjustable sensitivity 3 Mod I∆n = 30mA, 100mA, 300mA 500mA, 1A, 3A, 10A LED optical scale Instant trip or time delay 0.1 - 0.3 - 0.4 - 0.5 - 1 - 3 secs Adjustable sensitivity 3 Mod I∆n = 30mA, 100mA, 300mA 500mA, 1A, 3A, 10A LED optical scale Instant trip or time delay 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.25 - 0.3 - 0.4 - 0.5 secs Adjustable sensitivity 3 Mod I∆n = 500mA, 1A, 3A, 5A, 10A, 20A & 30A LED optical scale Instant trip or time delay 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.25 - 0.3 - 0.4 - 0.5 secs Adjustable sensitivity 3 Mod I∆n = 30mA, 100mA, 300mA, 500mA, 1A, 3A, 5A, 10A & 30A LCD Display Instant trip or time delay 0.02 - 0.1 - 0.3 - 0.4 - 0.5 - 1 3 - 5 - 10 secs Adjustable sensitivity 3 Mod I∆n = 30mA, 100mA, 300mA, 500mA, 1A, 3A, 5A, 10A & 30A LCD Display Instant trip or time delay 0.02 - 0.1 - 0.3 - 0.4 - 0.5 - 1 3 - 5 - 10 secs


Width

Cat ref.

HR500 HR502 HR510

HR520

HR522

HR523

HR525

HR534

Earth Fault Relays with Integral Torroids Earth Fault Relays with Integral Torroids Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

Earth fault relay with integral torroid adjustable sensitivity 25mm2 max. cable size Earth fault relay with integral torroid adjustable sensitivity 35mm2 max. cable size

Adjustable sensitivity I∆n - 30mA, 100mA, 300mA, 500mA, 1A & 3A Instant trip or time delay 0.1 - 0.3 - 0.5 - 0.75 - 1 secs Adjustable sensitivity I∆n - 30mA, 100mA, 300mA, 500mA, 1A & 3A Instant trip or time delay 0.1 - 0.3 - 0.5 - 0.75 - 1 secs

4 Mod

HR440

6 Mod

HR441

Protection Devices

Designation

Torroids Circular Section Torroid

HR702

Characteristics

Cat ref.

ø 30mm ø 35mm ø 70mm ø 105mm ø 140mm ø 210 mm

HR700 HR701 HR702 HR703 HR704 HR705

Rectangular Section Torroid Dimensions

Cat ref.

70 x 175mm 115 x 305mm 150 x 350mm

HR830 HR831 HR832

HR830

Rectangular Split Torroid Dimensions

Cat ref.

20 x 30mm 50 x 80mm 80 x 80mm 80 x 121mm 80 x 161mm

HR820 HR821 HR822 HR823 HR824

HR820


4.27

Surge Protection Devices and Surge Protection Kit SPD’s protect electrical and electronic equipment against transients, originating from lightning, switching of transformers, lighting and motors

3. Main protection - class 3 To cut-down the transient surge as low as possible to protect very sensitive equipment.

SPDs can be used in any supply system e.g TNCS, TNS, TT.

These transients can cause premature ageing of equipment, downtime, or complete destruction of electronic components and materials.

Technical Data Complies with IEC61643-1

Connected in parallel to the equipment to be protected.

Reserve Status Indicator (R versions)

Protection is assured in both common and differential modes. SPDs with Low Let Through Voltage Levels Type 3 To protect very sensitive electronic equipment. This fine protection complements the main protection and can protect 1 or many electronic devices.

SPDs are strongly recommended on installations that are exposed to transients, to protect sensitive and expensive electrical equipment such as TV, video, washing machines, Hi-Fi, PC, alarm etc. The choice of SPD depends on a number of criteria such as: • The risk of lightening strikes • The exposure of the building to transients. • The sensitivity and value of the electrical equipment that requires protection. • Earthing system • Level of protection The range of SPDs is separated into 3 types of protection: 1. Main protection - class 1 SPDs with higher discharge current (Imax 10/350), to evacuate as much of the transient overvoltages associated with lightening strikes 2. Main protection - class 2 With a discharge current (Imax 8/20), to evacuate as much of the transient overvoltage to earth as possible protection level (Up ≤ 1000V).

Options: Replacement cartridges.

End of Life Indicator (D versions)

Optimal coordination is obtained when cascaded with a main protection device. Discharge current Imax. 8kA (8/20 wave) a green LED on the front face indicates the status of the SPD SP202N, connected in series with the equipment that needs to be protected (with a maximum line current of 25A). Protection is assured in both common and differential modes

OK OK Auxiliary contact for remote signalling (R versions only) 11

12

power supply. Cartridges are available for all discharge currents (40kA and 15kA) with and without condition indication. A keying system exists to prevent a line cartridge being interchanged by mistake with a neutral one and visa versa neutral cartridges have a discharge current of 65kA For technical details see page 4.30-4.33

SPA201 SPA400 SPA401 SPN800 SPN801 SPN802 SPN215D SPN240D SPN415D SPN440D SP202N

TNS TNC-S                      

TT           

Connection Capacity Terminal blocks L, N & E • Rigid conductor: 10mm2 • Flexible conductor: 6mm2

14

230V~ 1A 12V ... 10mA Installation and Connection The main protection SPDs are installed directly after the main incoming switch or RCCB (type S).

Replacement Cartridges The cartridges replace the cartridge in the main SPN* devices. They allow simple replacement without the need to cut-off the

Class 1 + 2 (Class 1 + 2 + 3 if less than 5m) (with lifetime indicator) Poles Iimp kA L-N

Iimp kA N-PE

In L-N

In N-PE

Up kV

Single or Width (mm) Cat ref. Three Phase

2 3 4 3 4 4

25 37.5 50 75 100 100

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

≤1.5 ≤1.5 ≤1.5 ≤1.5 ≤1.5 ≤1.5

Single 35 SPA201* Three 70 SPA400* Three 70 SPA401 Three 105 SPN800 SPN800R Three 140 SPN801 SPN801R Three AI1_SP115P_T1_02 140 SPN802 SPN802R

12.5 12.5 12.5 25 25 25

Cat ref. with remote contact

AI1_SP115P_T1_02 * These SPD devices are of the monoblock type construction. At end of life, the complete product should be replaced. SPN800R

Replacement Cartridges (SPN8* range) Dimensions

Cat ref.

Phase replacement for SPN800, SPN800R, SPN801, SPN801R, SPN802 & SPN802R Neutral replacement for SPN801, SPN801R, SPN802, SPN802R

SPN080 SPN080N

SPN080N

4.28


Class 2 (with lifetime indicator) Poles Iimp Iimp In kA L-N N-PE L-N

In kA N-PE

Up kV


2 2 4 4

15 40 15 40

≤ 1.2 ≤ 1.5 ≤ 1.5 ≤ 1.5

Single Single Three Three

- - - -

- - - -

5 15 5 15

35 35 70 70


SPN215D SPN215R SPN240D SPN240R SPN415D SPN415R SPN440D SPN440R

Replacement Cartridges Cat ref.

Phase replacement for SPN140D Phase replacement for SPN215D & SPN415D Phase replacement for SPN215R & SPN 415R Neutral replacement for SPN215D, SPN415D, SPN215R & SPN415R

SPN040D SPN015D SPN015R SPN040N Protection Devices

SPN415D

Dimensions

SPN040D

Class 3 (fine protection) (with lifetime indicator) Poles Iimp Iimp In kA L-N N-PE L-N

In kA N-PE

Up kV


2

-

≤ 1.5

Single

-

-

3

35


SP202N -

PV Applications (DC side) (with lifetime indicator) Poles Iimp Iimp In kA L-N N-PE L-N

In kA N-PE

Up kV


3

25

≤ 4

-

-

-

12.5

52.5


SPV325 -

SPV325

Consumer Unit Kit Type 2 SPD with SPN215D (with lifetime indicator) Consists of: Neutral terminal bar, 3x 20mm neutral link bar 370mm, 300mm & 200mm lengths, 4mm2 neutral, live & earth cables, 2 connector busbar, 4 way terminal bar, terminal bar clip, 1x Double Pole SPD’s, 32A MCB

VA02SPD installed inside a consumer unit

Poles Iimp Iimp In kA L-N N-PE L-N

In kA N-PE

Up kV


2

15

≤ 1.2

Single

-

-

5

35


VA02SPD -


4.29

Type 1 / Class I Surge Protection Devices SPA201 / SPA4** Tested to SPD type / class Energy-coordinated protection effect on terminal equipment Energy-coordinated protection effect on terminalequipment ≤ 5 m Type of connexion Type of power supply system Type of protection Nominal voltage UN Rated voltage

SPA201 EN 61643-11 2002-12 LÞN N Þ PE T1 / Class I Type 1 + Type 2

SPA400

SPA401

L1/L2/L3 Þ PEN

L1/L2/L3 Þ N

TN-C system

TT / TN-S system

common modes

common and differential modes

N Þ PE

Type 1 + Type 2 + Type 3 Parallel connection TT / TN system common and differential modes 230V/400V ac

Uc

255V ac

Voltage protection level

Up

≤ 1.5kV

TOV Voltage Rated load current

UT I(L) I(L-L) Ifi

440V / 5s nc nc 25kA rms

1200V / 200ms

440V / 5s

440V / 5s

1200V / 200ms

100A rms

25 kA rms

25kA rms

100A rms

In

12.5kA

25kA

12.5kA (L-PEN) 37.5kA (total)

12.5kA

50kA

Iimp fuse MCB fuse MCB

12.5kA 160A gL / gG nc 25kA rms nc

25kA

12.5kA (L-PEN) 37.5kA (total)

12.5kA

50kA

tA J

≤ 100ns - 40°C ….+ 80°C Green/Red flag on L1, L2, L3

Green/Red flag on L1, L2, L3 and N

Follow current interrupting rating Nominal discharge current (8/20) Impulse current (10/350) Maximal rating of overcurrent protection Short-circuit withstand capability with max. overcurrent protection Response time Operating temperature range Indication of SPD disconnector Cross sectional area Tightening torque for terminals Mounting on Enclosure material Degree of protection Modular width Weight Approval marking

4.30

Green/Red flag on L and N min max

1,5mm2 solid / flexible 35mm2 stranded / 25mm2 flexible 4 Nm 35mm DIN rail in accordance with EN 60715 grey thermoplastic, UL 94V-0 IP20 2 4 275 g 385.9 g KEMA

General Catalogue • Protection Devices • Technical

4 479.9 g

Type 1 / Class I Surge Protection Devices SPN8***

SPD type / class Type of connexion Type of power supply system Type of protection Nominal voltage

UN

SPN800 / SPN800R EN 61643-11 (VDE0675-6-11) 2002-12 L1/L2/L3 Þ PEN T1 / I / B Parallel connection TN-C - System Common modes 230V / 400V ac

Rated voltage

Uc

255V ac


Up

≤ 1.5kV

255V ac

TOV-voltage

UT

440V / 5s

1200V / 200ms

Rated load current

I(L)

315Aeff

SPN801 / SPN801R EN 61643-11 (VDE0675-6-11) 2002-12 L1/L2/L3/N Þ PE

SPN802 / SPN802R EN 61643-11 (VDE0675-6-11) 2002-12 L1/L2/L3 Þ N

TN-S - System

TT - System Common and differential modes

N Þ PE

I(L-L)

125Aeff

Ifi

50 kAeff

Nominal discharge current (8/20)

In

75kA

100kA

25kA

100kA

Impulse current (10/350)

Iimp

75kA

100kA

25kA

100kA

Follow current interrupting rating

Residual current Maximal rating of overcurrent protection

IPE fuse MCB Short-circuit withstand capability fuse with max. overcurrent protection MCB Response time tA Isolationswiderstand Risol Operating temperature range J Indication of SPD disconnector Cross sectional area min L1, L2, L3, PE max L1', L2', L3', PE max Tightening torque for terminals Mounting on Enclosure material Degree of protection Modular width Weight Approval marking

100kA

Protection Devices

Tested to

≤ 100mA 125A gL / gG serial or 315A parallel 125A serial or 160A parallel C curve 50kA eff ac 25kA eff ac 50kA eff ac 25kA eff ac < 100ns --- 40°C ….+ 60°C Green - red on L1, L2, L3 Green - red on L1, L2, L3, N 10mm2 solid / flexible 50mm2 multi-stranded / 35mm2 flexible 35mm2 multi-stranded / 25mm2 flexible 7.0 Nm 35mm DIN rail in accordance with EN 60715 grey thermoplastic, UL 94V-0 IP20 6 8 970 g 1260 g 1272 g VDE


4.31

Type 2 / Class II Surge Protection Devices SPN215*, SPN240*, SPN415*, SPN440* & SPV325 SPN215D/R SPN240D/R SPN415D/R EN 61643-11 (VDE0675-6-11) 2002-12 Type 2 according to EN61643-11 Class II according to IEC61643-1 Parallel connection Phase / Neutal ≤ 255V Neutral/ PE ≤ 275V ≤ 1kV ≤ 1.2kV ≤ 1kV Up 5kA 15kA 5kA In

Tested to SPD type SPD class Type of connexion Maximum continuous operationg voltage Uc

Voltage protection level Nominal discharge current (8/20 µs) [(DC+/DC-) --> PE] Max. discharge current (8/20 µs) [(DC+/DC-) --> Imax PE] Short-circuit withstand capability with max. overcurrent protection Operating temperature range J Indication of SPD disconnector Cross sectional area min max Tightening torque for terminals Mounting on Enclosure material Degree of protection Modular width (DIN 43880) Auiliary contact. Voltage/ nominal current (only applicable on the R suffix products)

40kA

15kA

40kA

10kA - 32A

20kA - 32A

10kA - 32A

20kA - 32A

- 40°C ….+ 80°C Green - Yellow - Red 1,5mm2 solid / flexible 35mm2 multi-stranded / 25mm2 flexible 4.0 Nm 35mm DIN rail in accordance with EN 60715 grey thermoplastic, UL 94V-0 IP20 2 4 2 230V/ 0.5A 12Vdc 10mA

UcPV

SPV325 EN 61643-11 (VDE0675-6-11) 2002-12 Type 2 according to EN61643-11 Class II according to IEC61643-1 Parallel connection ≤ 1000V


Up

≤ 4kV

Voltage protection level for 5kA

Up

≤ 3,5kV

Total discharge current (8/20 µs)

Itotal

40kA

Nominal discharge current (8/20 µs) [(DC+/DC-) --> PE]

In

12.5kA

Max. discharge current (8/20 µs) [(DC+/DC-) --> PE]

Imax

25kA

Short-circuit withstand capability with max. overcurrent protection

IscwPV

50 A / 1000 V DC

Response time Operating temperature range Indication of SPD disconnector Cross sectional area

tA J

≤ 25ns - 40°C ….+ 80°C green - red 1.5mm2 solid / flexible 35mm2 multi-stranded / 25mm2 flexible 4.0 Nm 35mm DIN rail in accordance with EN 60715 Grey thermoplastic, UL 94V-0 IP20 3 modules, DIN 43880 316g

Tightening torque for terminals Mounting on Enclosure material Degree of protection Installation width Weight

4.32

≤ 1.2kV 15kA

15kA

Tested to SPD type SPD class Type of connexion Maximum continuous operationg voltage

min max

SPN44D/R


4

Characteristics Tested to SPD type / class Ports Type of connexion Type of power supply system Nominal voltage

UN

EN 61643-11 (VDE0675-6-11) 2007-08 T3 / III one port Parallel connection TT / TN system 230V ac

Rated voltage

Uc

255V ac

Voltage protection level ( L- N)

Up

≤ 1.25kV

Voltage protection level (L/N - PE)

Up

≤ 1.5kV

TOV - Characteristic (L - N)

UT

335V / 5s

TOV - Characteristic (L/N - PE) (I)

UT

400V / 5s

TOV - Characteristic (L/N - PE) (II)

UT

1200V / 200 ms

Rated load current

IL

16 Aeff

Nominal discharge current (8/20)

In

3kA

Maximal discharge current (8/20)

Imax

5kA

Combination wave (1,2/50 - 8/20) (L - N)

Uoc

6 kV

Combination wave (1,2/50 - 8/20) (L/N - PE) Residuel current Remplacement cartridge Maximal rating of overcurrent protection

Uoc IPE

10 kV ≤ 5μA NO 16 A gL / gG 16A B curve 6kA eff ac 1kA eff ac ≤ 25ns - 25°C ….+ 40°C NO Green light off 1.5mm2 solid / flexible 10mm2 stranded / 6mm2 flexible 1.2 Nm 35mm DIN rail in accordance with EN 60715 Grey thermoplastic, UL 94V-2 IP20 2 modules, DIN 43880

Short-circuit withstand capability with max. overcurrent protection Response time Operating temperature range Indication of SPD disconnector Remote signalisation contact Cross sectional area Tightening torque for terminals Mounting on Enclosure material Degree of protection Installation width

fuse MCB fuse MCB tA J

min max

Protection Devices

Type 3 / Class III Surge Protection Devices SP202N

Reserve Indicator Light Neutral cartridges cannot be put into spares reserved for phase cartridges and visa versa. Normal

Reserve

End of Life


4.33

MCCBs Low voltage protection devices The new range of MCCBs provides safe and easy solutions for low voltage electrical circuit protection. The state of the art circuit breakers offer both designers and installers a wide range of features and beneftis.

Protection Devices

MCCBs

x160 MCCBs and Switch Disconnectors

4.38

x160 Accessories for MCCBs and Switch Disconnectors

4.40

x250 MCCBs and Switch Disconnectors

4.42

x250 Accessories for MCCBs and Switch Disconnectors

4.43

H400 - H630 MCCBs and Switch Disconnectors

4.45

H400 - H630 Accessories for MCCBs and Switch Disconnectors

4.46

H800 MCCBs and Switch Disconnectors

4.48

H800 Accessories for MCCBs and Switch Disconnectors

4.49

MCCBs and Switch Disconnectors 16 to 800A The new range of MCCBs provides safe and easy solutions for low voltage electrical circuit protection. The state of the art circuit breakers offer both designers and installers a wide range of features and benefits. Special attention has been given to ergonomics, especially with the integration of these devices in the TP&N and panelboard range.


Technical data:

• Ease of installation.

• Comply with BS EN 60947-2.

• Quick, easy and safe mounting of accessories.

• 4 frame sizes: x160, x250, h400 / h630, h1000.

• Wide range of rated current ratings and breaking capacities.

• Breaking capacity: 18, 25, 40, 50.

• Calibrated at 50º centigrade.

• Thermal magnetic and electronic trip units.

• Switch disconnector variants.

• 1 pole to 4 poles. • Current limiting type. • Complete range of accessories.

Quick tips 1 2 3 4

Hager design Suites with Hager enclosures and modular products.

Electronic trip unit (LSI) Permits total selectivity and generator protection.

Breaking capacity 18 to 70kA, Icu 415V AC.

Easy mounting of auxiliaries Easy opening of secondary cover, clip-on type auxiliaries.

5 6 7 8

Visibility of auxiliaries fitted Indicates type of auxiliary mounted in breaker.

Integrated padlocking facility Effective solution for maintenance.

Complete range of accessories Rotary handles, padlocks, motors, terminal covers, auxiliaries, shunts, UVR’s, shields etc.

Flexible connection Collar terminals, front and rear connections, extended connections, and spreaders.

MCCBs and Switch Disconnectors x160 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers x160 1P, 3P and 4P Mechanical test button, lockable settings, integrated padlocking handle ø 4mm.

Thermal magnetic trip, 2 versions: • Z version: fixed thermal and fixed magnetic • U version: adjustable thermal and fixed magnetic • 18 & 25kA

Connection Capacity 95mm2 rigid cables 70mm2 flexible cables Complies with IEC 60947-2 Switch Disconnectors Allows tripping at distance using a shunt trip unit (optional) Complies with BS EN 60947-3 AC22A / AC23A For technical details see pages 4.60-4.67.

MCCB x160 18kA (400/415V AC) - Single Pole Breaking capacity Icu: 18kA Fixed thermal 1x In, fixed magnetic > 10x In

HDA123Z

In

Cat ref.

16A 20A 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A 80A 100A 125A

HDA014Z HDA018Z HDA023Z HDA030Z HDA038Z HDA048Z HDA061Z HDA078Z HDA098Z HDA123Z

MCCB x160 18kA (400/415V AC) - Three Pole Breaking capacity Icu: 18kA Adjustable thermal 0.63 - 0.8 - 1x In, fixed magnetic > 10x In In

Cat ref.

25A 40A 63A 80A 100A 125A

HDA025U HDA040U HDA063U HDA080U HDA100U HDA125U

HDA025U

MCCB x160 18kA (400/415V AC) - Four Pole Breaking capacity Icu: 18kA Adjustable thermal 0.63 - 0.8 - 1x In, fixed magnetic > 10x In In

Cat ref.

25A 40A 63A 100A 125A

HDA026U HDA041U HDA064U HDA101U HDA126U

HDA101U

4.38


MCCB x160 25kA (400/415V AC) - Single Pole Breaking capacity Icu: 25kA Fixed thermal 1x In, fixed magnetic > 10x In Cat ref.

16A 20A 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A 80A 100A 125A

HHA014Z HHA018Z HHA023Z HHA030Z HHA038Z HHA048Z HHA061Z HHA078Z HHA098Z HHA123Z Protection Devices

HHA123Z

In

MCCB x160 25kA (400/415V AC) - Three Pole Breaking capacity Icu: 25kA Adjustable thermal 0.63 - 0.8 - 1x In, fixed magnetic > 10x In

HHA125U

In

Cat ref.

25A 40A 63A 80A 100A 125A 160A

HHA025U HHA040U HHA063U HHA080U HHA100U HHA125U HHA160U

Switch Disconnectors x160 - Three & Four Pole Suitable for AC22A / AC23A Ue: 415V AC Icw (1s): 2kA In

Cat ref.

125A 3 Pole 125A 4 Pole

HCA125Z HCA126Z

HCA125Z


4.39

Accessories for MCCBs and Switch Disconnectors x160 Indication Contacts • 1 changeover switch (ON/ OFF): indicates the position of the MCCB is “open” or “closed”. • 1 changeover alarm contact: indicates MCCB tripping. Coil Connection Connection capacity: 0.75mm2 flexible cables.

Shunt Trip Remote tripping of MCCBs or switch disconnectors. Operating voltage: 0.7 to 1.1x Un Under Voltage Release Allows the tripping of MCCBs or switch disconnectors when voltage level drops between 35 and 70% of Un. Pick up voltage 0.85x Un.

Direct Rotary Handle • Padlockable • Equipped with front cover and handle • Fitting without any additional fixings Extended Rotary Handle • IP55 • Supplied complete with shaft and handle For technical details see pages 4.56-4.63.

125A Earth Leakage Add-on Block Description

3P 4P Cat ref. Cat ref.

Sensitivity - Adjustability 0.03A, 0.1A, 0.3A, 1A, 3A, 10A Time Delay Settings - Instantaneous, 60ms, 150ms, 300ms, 500ms, 1s

HBA125H

HBA126H

HBA125H

Auxiliary Contacts (AX, AL) Description

Cat ref.

1 Changeover Contact (ON/OFF), 250V AC/3A, 125V DC/0.4A, 1 NO + 1 NC AX 1 Changeover Alarm Contact, 250V AC/3A, 125V DC/0.4A, 1 NO + 1 NC AL

HXA021H HXA024H

HXA021H

Shunt Trip (SH) Description

Cat ref.

24V DC 110V AC 220 - 240V AC 380 - 440V AC

HXA001H HXA003H HXA004H HXA005H

Undervoltage Release (UV) Description

Cat ref.

220 - 240V AC 380 - 450V AC

HXA014H HXA015H

HXA014H

4.40


Rotary Handles Description

Cat ref.

Direct rotary handle, max ø 6mm, Padlockable Exended rotary handle, max ø 8mm, Padlockable

HXA030H HXA031H

Multi Padlock Adapter Description

Cat ref.

To mount on MCCB for handle locking 3 padlocks, max ø 8mm

HXA039H

Extended Connections Description


Set of 4 extended connections for lug connection outgoing Set of 3 or 4 spreaders

HYA013H * HYA014H

HYA013H * HYA015H

* Use extended connection terminal cover HYA021H HYA015H

Interphase Barriers Description

3P & 4P Cat ref.

Set of 3, height: 50mm Set of 3, height: 97mm

HYA019H HYB019H

Terminal Cover (1 Set) Description


For extended connections For spreaders For rear connections (shorts)

HYA021H HYA023H HYA025H

HYA022H HYA024H HYA026H

HYA023H

DIN Rail Adaptor Description


DIN Rail Adaptor

HYA033H


HYA034H

4.41

Protection Devices

HXA030H

MCCBs and Free Switch Disconnectors x250 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers x250 3P and 4P Mechanical test button, lockable settings, integrated padlocking handle ø 4mm.

Connection Capacity Directly on copper cable terminal, with end lug max. width: 25mm Connection capacity: 185mm2 rigid cables Complies with BS EN 60947-2

For technical details see pages 4.68-4.76.

MCCB x250 40kA - Three Pole & Four Pole Adjustable thermal 0.63 - 0.8 - 1x In Adjustable magnetic 6 - 8 - 10 - 13x In (100 - 200A) 5 - 7 - 9 - 11x In (250A) In


100A 125A 160A 200A 250A

HNB100H HNB125H HNB160H HNB161H HNB200H HNB201H HNB250H HNB251H

HNB250H

HNB161H

Switch Disconnectors x250 Capacity suitable for AC 22/23A Icw (1s): 3.6kA

4.42

In


250A

HCB250H


HCB251H

Accessories for MCCBs and Switch Disconnectors x250

Coil Connection Connection capacity: 0.75mm2 flexible cables. Optional connection cables. The cable capacity of the terminals is 0.5 to 1.25mm2.



250A Earth Leakage Add-on Block (4 Pole) Description

Cat ref.

Sensitivity - Adjustability 0.03A, 0.1A, 0.3A, 1A, 3A, 10A Time Delay Settings - Instantaneous 60ms, 150ms, 300ms, 500ms & 1s

HBB251H

Auxiliary Contacts (AX, AL) Description

Cat ref.

1 Changeover Contact (ON/OFF), 250V AC/3A, 125V DC/0.4A, 1 NO + 1 NC AX 1 Changeover Alarm Contact, 250V AC/3A, 125V DC/0.4A, 1 NO + 1 NC AL

HXA021H HXA024H

HXA024H


Cat ref.

24V DC 220 - 240V AC 380 - 440V AC

HXA001H HXA004H HXA005H


Cat ref.

220 - 240V AC 380 - 450V AC

HXA014H HXA015H

HXA014H


Cat ref.

Direct rotary handle, max ø 6mm, Padlockable Extended rotary handle, max ø 8mm, Padlockable

HXB030H HXB031H


4.43

Protection Devices

Indication Contacts • 1 changeover switch (ON/ OFF): indicates the position of the MCCB is “open” or “closed” • 1 changeover alarm contact: indicates MCCB tripping

Accessories for MCCBs and Switch Disconnectors x250 Multi Padlock Adapter Description

Cat ref.

To mount on MCCB for handle locking 3 padlocks, max ø 8mm

HXA039H

Extended Connections Description


Extended Connections (set of 4 pieces) Spreaders

HYB010H HYB011H

HYB010H HYB012H

HYB012H

Interphase Barriers Description

3P & 4P Cat ref.

Set of 3, height: 97mm

HYB019H

Terminal Cover (1 set) Description


For extended covers For spreaders For rear connections short

HYB021H HYB023H HYB025H

HYB022H HYB024H HYB026H

HYB024H

Rear Connection Description


Rear connection

HYB031H

HYB032H

HYB031H

Contained Palm Lugs for Circuit Breakers

øi

B

d

4.44

N

M

L

Conductor Size Flexible sqmm Ø Stud mm Øi B M N L d Bag qty.

Cat ref.

95 120 120 150 150 185 240 240 240 300 300

HA19B-M8/15 HA24B-M8/19 HA24B-M10/19 HA30B-M8/19 HA30B-M10/19 HA37B-M10/24 HA48-M10/31 HA48-M12/31 HA48-M16/31 HA60B-M10/31 HA60B-M12/31

8 8 10 8 10 10 10 12 16 10 12

13.5 15.5 9 8 52.5 8.4 25 15.2 19 14 9 60 8.4 25 15.2 19 14 9 60 10.5 25 16.7 19 18 9 70 8.4 25 16.7 19 18 9 70 10.5 25 19.2 24.5 18 9 77 10.5 25 21.1 31 13 9 80 10.5 15 21.1 31 16 12 86 13.2 15 21.1 31 19 17 94 17 15 23.7 31 16 12 95 10.5 10 23.7 31 16 12 95 13.2 10


MCCBs and Switch Disconnectors H400 - H630 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers H400, H630 2 versions of trip unit: Thermal magnetic trip unit TM: • Thermal adjustment: from 0.63 to 1x In • Magnetic adjustment: from 6 to 12x In Electronic trip unit LSI: • Long delay (thermal equivalent) adjustable: Ir = 0.4 to 1x In

• Short delay (magnetic equivalent) adjustable: 2.5 to 10x Ir (400A) 2.5 to 8x Ir (630A) • Time delay: 0.1 - 0.2s 3P & 4P (adjustable neutral 0 - 50 - 100%). Mechanical test button, lockable settings.

Connection Capacity Directly on copper cable terminal, with end lug max. width: 25mm. Connection capacity: 185mm2 rigid cables. Complies with IEC 60947-2. Switch Disconnectors Allows tripping at distance using a shunt trip unit (optional). Complies with BS EN 60947-3 AC 23A / DC 22A.

Protection Devices

For technical details see pages 4.77-4.86.

MCCBs H400 50kA TM - Three Pole & Four Pole Breaking capacity Icu: 50kA (400/415V AC) Ics: 50kA Adjustable thermal 0.63 to 1x In Adjustable magnetic 6 to 12x In In


250A 400A

HND250H HND400H

HND251H HND401H

HND401H

MCCBs H630 50kA LSI Breaking capacity Icu: 50kA (400/415V AC) Ics: 50kA Overload protection = 0.4 to 1x In Adjustable magnetic 2.5 to 8x Ir Time delay: 0.1 - 0.2s In


630A

HND630H

HND631H

HND631H

Switch Disconnectors Suitable for AC22A / AC23A Ue: 415V AC Icw (0.3s) = 5kA In


400A 630A

HCD400H HCD630H

HCD401H HCD631H

HCD400H


4.45

Accessories for MCCBs and Switch Disconnectors H400 - H630 Indication Contacts • 1 changeover switch (ON/ OFF): indicates the position of the MCCB is “open” or “closed” • 1 changeover alarm contact: indicates MCCB tripping Coil Connection Connection capacity: 0.75mm2 flexible cables. Optional connection cables. The cable capacity of the terminals is 0.5 to 1.25mm2.



RCD Add-on Block Description

400A 630A Cat ref. Cat ref.

Sensitivity - Adjustability 0.03A, 0.1A, 1A, 3A, 10A Time Delay Settings - Instantaneous, 60ms, 150ms, 300ms, 500ms

HBD401H

HBD631H

Auxiliary Contacts (AX, AL)

HXC021H

Description

Cat ref.

1 Changeover Contact, 250V AC/3A, 125V DC/0.4A, 1 NO + 1 NC AX 1 Changeover Alarm Contact, 250V AC/3A, 125V DC/0.4A, 1 NO + 1 NC AL

HXC021H HXC024H

HXC024H


Cat ref.

24V DC 200 - 240V AC 380 - 450V AC

HXC001H HXC004H HXC005H

HXC004H


Cat ref.

200 - 240V AC 380 - 450V AC

HXC014H HXC015H

HXC014H

4.46



Cat ref.

Direct rotary handle, max ø 6mm, Padlockable Extended rotary handle, max ø 8mm, Padlockable

HXD030H HXD031H

Padlock Description

Cat ref.

To mount on MCCB for handle locking 3 padlocks, ø 5-8mm2 max

HXD039H

HXD039H

Extended Connections

HXD015H

Description


400A set of 4 pieces 630A set of 4 pieces 400A spreaders 630A spreaders

- - HYD011H HYD014H

HYD010H HYD013H HYD012H HYD015H

Terminal Covers (1 set) Description


For extended connections For spreaders For rear connections short

HYD021H HYD023H HYD025H

HYD022H HYD024H HYD026H

HYD022H

Rear Connections Description


400A 630A

HYD031H HYD033H

HYD032H HYD034H

HYD033H


4.47

Protection Devices

HXD030H

MCCBs and Switch Disconnectors H800 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers H800 Electronic trip unit LSI: • Long delay (thermal equivalent) adjustable: Ir = 0.4 to 1x In • Short delay (magnetic equivalent) adjustable: 2.5 to 10x Ir • Time delay: 0.1 - 0.2s

3P & 4P (adjustable neutral 0 - 50 - 100%). Mechanical test button, lockable settings.

Connection Capacity Directly on copper cable terminal, with end lug max. width: 25mm. Connection capacity: 185mm2 rigid cables. Complies with IEC 60947-2. For technical details see pages 4.87-4.94.

MCCBs H1000 50kA LSI Breaking capacity Icu: 50kA (400/415V AC) Ics: 50kA Adjustable thermal Ir = 0.4 to 1x In Adjustable magnetic 2.5 to 10x Ir Time delay: 0.1 - 0.2s Neutral setting from 0 - 50 - 100% In


800A

HNE800H

HNE801H

HNE800H

Switch Disconnectors Suitable for AC22A / AC23A Ue 415V AC Icw (0.3s) = 10kA In


800A

HCE800H

HCE800H

4.48


HCE801H

Accessories for MCCBs and Switch Disconnectors H800

Coil Connection Connection capacity: 0.75mm2 flexible cables. Optional connection cables. The cable capacity of the terminals is 0.5 to 1.25mm2.



Auxiliary Contacts (AX, AL)

HXC021H

Description

Cat ref.

1 Changeover Contact, 250V AC/3A, 125V DC/0.4A, 1 NO + 1 NC AX 1 Changeover Alarm Contact, 250V AC/3A, 125V DC/0.4A, 1 NO + 1 NC AL

HXC021H HXC024H

HXC024H


Cat ref.

24V DC 200 - 240V AC 380 - 450V AC

HXC001H HXC004H HXC005H

HXC004H


Cat ref.

220 - 240V AC 380 - 415V AC

HXE014H HXE015H

HXC014H


Cat ref.

Direct rotary handle, Padlockable Extended rotary handle, Padlockable

HXE030H HXE031H


4.49

Protection Devices

Indication Contacts • 1 changeover switch (ON/ OFF): indicates the position of the MCCB is “open” or “closed”. • 1 changeover alarm contact: indicates MCCB tripping.

Accessories for MCCBs and Switch Disconnectors H800 cont. Padlock Description

Cat ref.

To mount on MCCB for handle locking 3 padlocks, ø 5-8mm2 max

HXD039H

HXD039H

Terminal Cover (1 set) Description


For extended connections For rear connections short

HYE021H HYE025H

HYE022H HYE026H

HYE021H

Rear Connection

4.50

Description


800A

HYE031H


HYE032H

MCCBs Reference Guide Switches and Accessories Version

Poles

In A / Ue V

x160

125

HCA125Z

160

HCA160Z

250 3P

x250

h400-h630

HCB250Z

400

HCD400U

630

HCD630U

Switches

800

HCE800U

1000

HCE970U

125

HCA126Z

160

HCA161Z

250 4P

h800 / h1000

HCB521Z

400

HCD401U

630 800

HCE801U

Shunt Trip Release

Auxiliaries

Undervoltage Release

3/4P

3/4P

HXA001H

HXC001H

48V DC

HXA002H

HXC002H

110V AC

HXA003H

HXC003H

230V AC

HXA004H

HXC004H

400V AC

HXA005H

HXC005H

24V DC

HXA011H

HXC011H

HXE011H

110V AC

HXA013H

HXC013H

HXE013H

230V AC

HXA014H

HXC014H

HXE014H

400V AC

HXA015H

HXC015H

HXE015H

HXC021H

Auxiliary Contact

3/4P

1NO + 1NC

HXA021H

Alarm Contact

3/4P

1NO + 1NC

HXA024H

HXC024H

Direct Rotary Handle

HXA030H

HXB030H

HXD030H

HXE030H

Extended Rotary Handle

HXA031H

HXB031H

HXD031H

HXE031H

Padlock

HXA039H

Motor Operator

3/4P

Interlocking Wire Type

3/4P

Collar Terminal Extended Connection Straight Extended Connection Spreaders

Interphase Barrier Terminal Cover for Extended Connections Terminal Cover Large for Spreaders Connections

HCE971U

24V DC

Terminal Cover Short for Rear Connections Terminal Cover for Collar Terminals

HXD039H

24V DC

-

HXB040H

HXD040H

HXE040H

220V AC

-

HXB042H

HXD042H

HXE042H HXE065H

-

HXB065H

HXD065H

3P

Included

HYA001

HYD003H (400)

-

4P

Included

HYA002H

HYD004H (400)

-

3/4P

HYA013H

HYB010H

3P

HYA014H

HYB011H

HYA015H

HYB012H

4P 3/4P 3P

Short Long

HYA019H

HYD010H (400) HYD013H (630) HYD011H (400) HYD014H (630) HYD012H (400) HYD015H (630) -

HYB019H HYA021H

Protection Devices

1000

HYB021H

Included -

Included

Included

HYD021H

HYE021H

4P

HYA022H

HYB022H

HYD022H

HYE022H

3P

HYA023H

HYB023H

HYD023H

-

4P

HYA024H

HYB024H

HYD024H

-

3P

-

HYB025H

HYD025H

HYE025H

4P

-

HYB026H

HYD026H

HYE026H

3P

HYA027H

HYB027H

HYD027H

-

4P

HYA028H

HYB028H

3P

-

HYB031H

4P

-

HYB032H

HYA033H

-

Rear Connections

HYD028H

-

HYD031H (400) HYD033H (630) HYD032H (400) HYD034H (630)

HYE031H (400) HYE033H (630) HYE032H (400) HYE034H (630)

Din Rail Adaptor

3/4P

-

-

Compact lugs 120mm2 D:10

3/4P

HYD093H

-

Compact lugs 150mm2 D:8.5

3/4P

-

-


3/4P

HYD095H

-


3/4P

HYD096H

-


3/4P


3/4P

HYD097H (with spreaders) HYD098H (with spreaders)


-

4.51

MCCBs Technical Characteristics Frame

x160

Product

Switch

MCCB

x250

Reference

HCA

HDA

Number of poles

3-4

1-3-4

Switch

MCCB

HHA

HCB

HNB

1-3-4

3-4

Electrical Characteristics Rated current (In A)

160

250

Current rated range (A)

125-160

Rated service voltage (AC) (Ue V)

220-440

220 - 440

Frequency (f Hz)

50/60

50/60

Rated insulation voltage (Ui V)

690

800

Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp kV)

8

8

16-125 (1P), 16-160 (4P)

250

100-250

Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (Icu) (AC) 50-60Hz 220/230V (Icu kA)

25

35

-

85

(AC) 50-60Hz 380/415V (Icu kA)

-

18

25

-

40

(AC) 50-60Hz 480/500/525V (Icu kA)

-

-

-

-

-

(AC) 50-60Hz 660/690V (Icu kA)

-

-

-

-

-

(DC) 250V - 2 poles in series (Icu kA)

-

10

10

-

9

Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (Ics) (AC) 50-60Hz 220/230V (Icu kA)

-

25

25

-

40

(AC) 50-60Hz 380/415V (Icu kA)

-

18

20

-

20

(AC) 50-60Hz 480/500/525V (Icu kA)

-

-

-

-

-

(AC) 50-60Hz 660/690V (Icu kA)

-

-

-

(DC) 250V - 2 poles in series (Icu kA)

-

5

5

-

5

Rated short-circuit making capacity (Icm kA)

2.8

-

-

9

-

Rated short-time withstand current for 1s (Icw kA)

2

-

-

3.6

-

Selection Category (BS EN 60947-2)

-

A

-

A

Calibration temperature

-

-

50ºC

-

50ºC

Derating

40ºC

-

100%

-

100%

50ºC

-

100%

-

100%

55ºC

-

95%

-

94%

60ºC

-

93%

-

91%

65ºC

-

90%

-

88%

Suitability for isolation

OK

OK

Electric endurance in number of cycles

10,000

10,000

Mechanical endurance in number of operations

20,000

20,000

Operating temperature

-25 to +70ºC

-5 to +70ºC

Storage temperature

-35 to +70ºC

-35 to +70ºC

Power loss (at In for 3P) (W)

39

Reference standard

IEC60947-3

IEC60947-2

IEC 60947-3

IEC 60947-2

Releases: switch

OK

-

OK

-

Releases: TM (thermomagnetic)

-

OK

-

OK

T fixed, M fixed

-

OK

-

OK

T adjustable, M fixed

-

OK

-

-

T adjustable, M adjustable

-

-

-

OK

Thermal adjustment value

-

0.63 to 1x In

-

0.63 to 1x In

Magnetic adjustment value

-

-

-

6-8-10-13 x In (200A) 5-7-9-11 x In (250A)

Releases: LSI (electronic)

-

-

-

-

Long delay

-

-

-

-

Short delay

-

-

-

-

Time delay

-

-

-

-

4.52

60


h400

h630

MCCB

Switch

MCCB

h800 / h1000 Switch

MCCB

HND

HCD

HND

HCE

HNE

3-4

3-4

3-4

400

630

1000

250-400

400-630

220-690

220-690

220-690

50/60

50/60

50/60

800

800

800

8

8

8

85

-

85

-

85

50

-

50

-

50

30

-

30

-

30

20

-

20

-

20

40

-

-

-

-

85

-

85

-

85

50

-

50

-

50

30

-

30

-

30

15

-

15

-

15

40

-

-

-

-

-

9

-

20

-

-

5 (0.3)

-

10kA (0.3s)

-

A

-

B (400A - A (630A)

-

B (800A)

50ºC

-

50ºC

-

50ºC

100%

-

100%

-

100%

100%

-

100%

-

100%

95%

-

95%

-

95%

92%

-

90%

-

90%

89%

-

80%

-

80%

OK

OK

OK

4,500

4,500

4,500

15,000

15,000

15,000

-25 to +70ºC

-25 to +70ºC

-25 to +70ºC

-35 to +70ºC

-35 to +70ºC

-35 to +70ºC

75

150

IEC 60947-2

IEC 60947-3

IEC 60947-3

IEC 60947-3

IEC 60947-3

-

OK

-

OK

-

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

OK

-

-

0.63 to 1x In

-

-

6-8-10-12 x In

-

-

-

-

OK

-

OK

-

-

0.4 to 1x Ir

-

0.4 to 1 x Ir

-

-

2.5 to 10x Ir (400A) 2.5 to 8x Ir (630A)

-

2.5 to 10x Ir (800A) 2.5 to 8x Ir (1000A)

-

-

0.1-0.2s

-

0.1-0.2s

800

Protection Devices

250-630

150


4.53

MCCBs Technical Characteristics (cont.) Frame

x160

Product

Switch

MCCB

x250

Reference

HCA

HDA

Number of poles

3-4

1-2-3-4

Switch

MCCB

HHA

HCB

HNB

1-2-3-4

3-4

Accessories Auxiliary switches

1

1

Alarm switches

1

1

Shunt release

1

1

Undervoltage release

1

1

Rotary handle mechanism

OK

OK

Motor operator

-

OK

Padlockable handle

Integrated

Integrated

Interphase barriers

OK

Integrated

DIN rail adapter

OK

-

Standard terminal type

Cage

Lugs

Maximum terminal capacity

95mm2

185mm2 (Cage)

Terminal width (mm)

-

25

Terminal shields

OK

OK

Cage terminal

Integrated

OK

Extended connections

OK

OK

Rear connections

No

OK

130

165

Terminations

Dimensions Height (mm) Width (mm)

1P

-

25

-

2P

-

50

-

3P

75

105

4P

100

140

Depth (mm)

68

68

Weight (kg)

1P

-

0.29

-

2P

-

0.48

-

3P

0.715

1.3

4P

0.95

1.6

4.54


h630

MCCB

Switch

MCCB

h800 / h1000 Switch

MCCB

HND

HCD

HND

HCE

HNE

3-4

3-4

3-4

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

3

OK

OK

OK

OK

OK

OK

OK

OK

OK

Integrated

Integrated

Integrated

-

-

-

Lugs

Lugs

Lugs

240mm2 (Cage)

-

-

30

30

45

OK

OK

OK

-

-

-

Integrated

Integrated

Integrated

OK

OK

OK

260

260

273/433

-

-

-

-

-

-

140

140

210

185

185

280

97

97

99.5

-

-

-

-

-

-

4.3

4.3

11

5.7

5.7

14.8


Protection Devices

h400

4.55

MCCBs Selectivity Chart 240 / 415 V AC according to BS EN 60947-2 Breaking capacity according to BS EN 974-2. Network: 3 phases + neutral 220 / 380 ~ 240 / 380 V AC Notes: “T” = total discrimination (up to the breaking capacity of the downstream device) = no discrimination UPSTREAM

DOWNSTREAM

Limits (kA) In 1A 2A 6A MLN MCB Ph+N 1 Module 10A ADA RCBO Ph+N 2 Modules 16A 20A C Curve 25A 32A 40A 6A 10A 13A 16A MTN / NBN MCB 20A 25A B Curve 32A 40A 50A 63A 0.5A 1A 2A 3A 4A 6A 10A NCN MCB 13A C Curve 16A 20A 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A 0.5A 1A 2A 3A 4A 6A 10A NDN MCB 13A D Curve 16A 20A 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A 80A HMF / HMC 1.5 Mod MCB 100A C Curve 125A 80A HMD 1.5 Mod MCB 100A D Curve 125A

16A 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.1

20A 1.6 1.6 1.4 1.2

25A 1.8 1.8 1.6 1.4 1.2

32A 2.3 2.3 1.9 1.7 1.5 1.5

40A 2.9 2.9 2.3 2 1.8 1.8 1.6

50A 4 4 2.9 2.4 2 2 1.8 1.8

1.4 1.2

1.5 1.3 1.2

1.6 1.4 1.3 1.3

1.9 1.7 1.5 1.5 1.5

2.3 2 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.7

3 2.4 2.1 2.1 2.1 1.9 1.9

1.3 1.3 1.3 1.1 1.1 1.1 1

1.4 1.4 1.4 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.1 1

1.6 1.6 1.6 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.25 1.1 1.1

2 2 2 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.3

2.5 2.5 2.5 2 2 2 1.8 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.4

3.5 3.5 3.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.1 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.6 1.6

5.6 5.6 5.6 3.4 3.4 3.4 2.5 2.1 2.1 2.1 1.8 1.8 1.3

8.8 8.8 8.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 3 2.4 2.4 2.4 2 2 1.5 1.1

1 1 1 0.9 0.9 0.9

1.1 1.1 1.1 1 1 1 0.9

1.3 1.3 1.3 1.1 1.1 1.1 1 0.95

1.6 1.6 1.6 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.2 1.1 1.1

2 2 2 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.4 1.3 1.3 1.3

3 3 3 2.1 2.1 2.1 1.7 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.2

4.5 4.5 4.5 2.7 2.7 2.7 2 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.4 1.4

7.4 7.4 7.4 3.8 3.8 3.8 2.4 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.6 1.6 1.2

All values are given with MCCB at the maximum setting.

4.56

x160 TM 18 / 25 kA 63A 80A T T T T 3.9 5.5 2.8 3.4 2.3 2.7 2.3 2.7 2 2.2 2 2.2 1.4 1.7 4 5.5 2.8 3.4 2.4 2.8 2.4 2.8 2.4 2.8 2.1 2.3 2.1 2.3 1.6 1.7 1.4


100A T T T 4 3 3 2.4 2.4 1.9 6.7 4 3.2 3.2 3.2 2.5 2.5 1.9 1.5 1.5 12 12 12 5.8 5.8 5.8 3.5 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.2 2.2 1.7 1.5 1.5 10 10 10 4.7 4.7 4.7 2.8 2.2 2.2 2.2 1.8 1.7 1.5 1.5

160A T T T T 4.6 4.6 3.6 3.6 2.8 12 6.4 4.6 4.6 4.6 3.6 3.6 2.8 2.3 1.8 23 23 23 8.5 8.5 8.5 5.6 4.1 4.1 4.1 3.2 3.2 2.5 2 1.6 18 18 18 7.3 7.3 7.3 4.4 3.3 3.3 3.3 2.5 2.5 1.8 1.6 1.6 8.2 8.2

100A T T T 4.6 3.6 3.6 2.9 2.9 2.2 7.8 4.7 3.8 3.8 3.8 3 3 2.3 1.8 1.4 14 14 14 6.8 6.8 6.8 4.1 3.2 3.2 3.2 2.6 2.6 2 1.5 1.3 12 12 12 5.5 5.5 5.5 3.3 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.1 2.1 1.5

125A T T T T 4.6 4.6 3.6 3.6 2.8 11 6.2 4.7 4.7 4.7 3.7 3.7 2.8 2.3 1.8 20 20 20 8.6 8.6 8.6 5.4 4.1 4.1 4.1 3.2 3.2 2.5 1.9 1.625 16 16 16 7.2 7.2 7.2 4.3 3.2 3.2 3.2 2.5 2.5 1.9 1.9 6.6

200A T T T T T T T T 5.5 T 14 9.9 9.9 9.9 7.4 7.4 5.9 4.9 4.2 T T T 17 17 17 12 8.3 8.3 8.3 6.3 6.3 5 4.2 3.8 T T T 14 14 14 8.6 6.8 6.8 6.8 5.3 5.3 4.1 4.1 3.1 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.9

250A T T T T T T T T T T 23 17 17 17 1 13 9.9 8.6 7.7 T T T T T T 20 14 14 14 11 11 8.5 7.3 6.7 T T T 23 23 23 14 11 11 11 8.6 8.6 6.8 6.8 5.3 11 11 11 12 10

250A T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T

h630 LSI 50 kA 400A T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T

630A T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T

h800 / h1000 LSI 50 kA 630A 800A 1000A T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T


4.57

Protection Devices

125A T T T 4.9 3.6 3.6 2.9 2.9 2.2 8.6 4.9 3.7 3.7 3.7 2.9 2.9 2.2 1.8 1.5 16 16 16 6.8 6.8 6.8 4.3 3.2 3.2 3.2 2.6 2.6 2 1.5 1.5 13 13 13 5.7 5.7 5.7 3.4 2.6 2.6 2.6 2 2 1.5 1.5 1.5 7.4

x250 TM 40 kA 160A T T T T T T 4.8 4.8 3.7 16 8.6 6.2 6.2 6.2 4.9 4.9 3.8 3.2 2.4 T T T 12 12 12 7.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 4.3 4.3 3.4 2.7 2.2 24 24 24 9.9 9.9 9.9 5.9 4.5 4.5 4.5 3.4 3.4 2.4 2.4 2.08 7.3 7.3

4.58


h800 LSI

h630 LSI

h400 TM 50kA

x250 TM 40kA

x160 TM 40kA

Icc (kA)

(A) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 100 125 160 200 250 250 400 250 400 630 630 800

16

20

UPSTREAM

25

32

All values are given with MCCB at the maximum setting Ipf prospective fault current

DOWNSTREAM

40

x160 TM 50 63 2 2 2 1.8 1.6 1.6 80 2 2 2 1.8 1.6 1.6

100 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.6 2.35 2.35 2.15 2.15

125 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.6 2.35 2.35 2.15 2.15

MCCB x160, x250, h400, h630, h800 Breaking capacity according to BS EN 974-2. Network: 3 phases + neutral 220 / 380 ~ 240 / 415 V AC Notes: “T” = total discrimination (up to the breaking capacity of the downstream device) = no discrimination

160 3 3 3 2.8 2.4 2.4 2.2 2.2 2.1 2.1

100 2.15 2.15 2.15 2 1.8 1.8 1.7 1.7

125 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.6 2.35 2.35 2.15 2.15 1.95 1.95 1.95 1.95

x250 TM 160 200 4.1 5.6 4.1 5.6 4.1 5.6 3.6 5 3.3 4.3 3.15 4.23 3 4.05 2.9 3.9 2.75 3.7 2.65 3.5 2.6 3.45 2.5 3.15 2.5 3.15 3.15 250 5.4 5.4 5.4 4.8 4.2 4.15 3.9 3.8 3.6 3.4 3.35 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3

5.75

h400 TM 250 400 6.5 13 6.5 13 6.5 13 5.6 10.5 4.95 9.2 4.8 8.8 4.6 8.3 4.35 7.9 4.15 7.5 4 7 3.9 6.6 3.6 5.75 3.6 5.75 3.6 5.75 3.6 5.75 3.6 5.75 5.75 250 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T

h630 LSI 400 630 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T 5.2 6.3 6.3

h800 / h1000 LSI 630 800 1000 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T 9.6 10 10

MCCBs Selectivity Chart 380V ~ 415V AC according to BS EN 60947-2

DOWNSTREAM

h630 Frame MCCB h800 / h1000 Frame MCCB

h400 Frame MCCB

x250 Frame MCCB 40kA

x160 Frame MCCB 18 & 25kA Versions

Fuse Rating Breaker Rating

800

16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 100 125 160 200 250 250 400 630

48 46

65 62 60

UPSTREAM 20 25

88 83 79 75

32 143 140 125 122 116

40 220 207 190 200 150 122

50 316 300 280 320 250 200 170

63 T T T T T T 450 440

80

580 547

427

125 T T T T T T T T 770 820

100 T T T T T T 630 630 515

Fault level to which discrimination is achieved (A) Fuses upstream / circuit breakers downstream BS88 Fuses Notes: “T” = represents maximum discrimination to kA rating level of the downstream device = no discrimination

T T T T T T T T 1200 1200 1140 T 985 755

160 T T T T T T T T T T T T T 1226 909

200

T

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T 1642 1402 1200

250

T

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T 2300 T

315

T

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T

355

Protection Devices

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T

400 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T



560

T


630

T


710

T


800

MCCBs Overload & Short Circuit Discrimination (Selectivity)


4.59

x160 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors

HDA HHA HCA

Icu Ics Icu Ics Icm Icw

220/240V AC IEC 60 947-2 25 kA 25 kA 35 kA 25 kA -

380/415 AC IEC 60 947-2 18 kA 18 kA 25 kA 20 kA 2.8 kA 2 kA - 1s

PUSH TO TRIP

Magnetic and Thermal Settings 1.

2.

5,5

TRIP

3. In Imag

15 - 50A 600A

6

Thermal adjustment from 0.63 to 1 x In Magnetic adjustment fixed > 10 x In

4.60


63 - 80A 1000A

100 - 125A 1500A

160A 1600A

x160 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Tripping Curve Tripping Curve MCCB x160 10000

Protection Devices

1000

16A 15A

20A

From warm state (rated current)

1

25A

Cold State

10

125A, 50A 80A 75A 100A, 40A 63A 60A 32A 30A

The magnetic threshold tripping curves is mean value. The tripping area is Irm ±20%

160A

Tripping time (sec)

100

0.1

0.01 1

10


1

xIn

4.61

x160 MCCBs ,Switch Disconnectors Thermal Constraint and Current Limiting Curves Let-Through Curve MCCB x160

10000

160A 125A

I²t (kA²s)

1000

100A 75-80A 60-63A 50A 40A 30-32A 15-16-20-25A

HDA...up to 18kA HHA...up to 25kA HNA...up to 40kA

100

10 0,1

1

10

100

Prospective Current (kA)

Current Limiting Curve MCCB x160

100 0,25

0,3

0,5 10 0,7

160A 125A 100A 80A 75A 60-63A 50A 40A 30-32A 15-16-20-25A

Ip (kA)

0,8 0,9

1

HDA...up to 18kA HHA...up to 25kA HNA...up to 40kA

0.1 0,1

1

10

100


4.62


x160 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Dimensions Dimensions MCCB x160

11

96,1

1P 2P 3P 4P

A (mm) 24.8 49.5 74.5 99.5

B (mm) 25 25 25 25

C (mm) 111 111 111 111

1P 3P 4P

A (mm) 24.4 74.5 99.5

B (mm) 50 50 50

C (mm) 60.5 60.5 60.5

3P 4P

A (mm) 106.5 141.5

B (mm) 50 50

C (mm) 60.5 60.5

45

130 114 C

A B

25

15

Protection Devices

25

68

Terminal Covers Front Connections (for straight bars) C

230

B

A

Terminal Cover for Extended Connections (spreaders) C

B

A


4.63

x160 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Connection Connection with End Lugs

5

16 mm Max.

min. 6mm2

max. 70mm2

min. 6mm2

max. 95mm2

6.6 Nm

4

Interphase Barriers

L

55

HYA019H HYB019H

4.64


L (mm) 50 97

x160 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Extended Connections

Protection Devices

Extended Connection: Straight Bars and Spreaders

4

4

3P

3P Ø8

28

28

Ø8

87 203 mm

203 mm

67

92

4P

25

25

122

4P

25

35

35

35


øi

B

d

N

M

L

Conductor Size Ø Stud mm Øi B M N L d Bag qty. Flexible mm2

Cat ref.

95 120 120 150 150 185 240 240 240 300 300

HA 19 B-M 8/15.5 HA 24 B-M 8/19 HA 24 B-M 10/19 HA 30 B-M 8/19 HA 30 B-M 10/19 HA 37 B-M 10/24.5 HA 48-M 10/31 HA 48-M 12/31 HA 48-M 16/31 HA 60 B-M 10/31 HA 60 B-M 12/31

8 8 10 8 10 10 10 12 16 10 12

13.5 15.5 9 8 52.5 8.4 25 15.2 19 14 9 60 8.4 25 15.2 19 14 9 60 10.5 25 16.7 19 18 9 70 8.4 25 16.7 19 18 9 70 10.5 25 19.2 24.5 18 9 77 10.5 25 21.1 31 13 9 80 10.5 15 21.1 31 16 12 86 13.2 15 21.1 31 19 17 94 17 15 23.7 31 16 12 95 10.5 10 23.7 31 16 12 95 13.2 10


4.65

x160 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Accessories Direct Rotary Handle 127

74.5

53.7

45

101.8

48.5

Extended Rotary Handle 12

74.5

112

45

101.8

200

74.5

4.66

10


x160 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Auxiliaries Auxiliaries Auxiliaries for MCCBs and Tripping Switches

5.5

Protection Devices

TRIP PUSH TO TRIP

Mounting Combination for Auxiliaries and Releases

Auxiliary contact

4P 3P

AX

AX

Alarm contact

AL

Shunt trip

SH / UV

AL Undervoltage release


4.67

x250 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors

HNB HCB

Icu Ics Icu Ics

220/240V AC IEC 60 947-2 85 kA 40 kA -

380/415 AC IEC 60 947-2 40 kA 20 kA 9 kA 3.6 kA - 1s

PUSH TO TRIP

Magnetic and Thermal Settings 1.

2.

6

TRIP 0,63

8

0,8

PUSH TO TRIP

1

l r (xIn)

10 13

5

l i (xIn)

6

Thermal adjustment from 0.63 to 1 x In Magnetic adjustment from 6 to 13 x In (100 - 200A) from 5 to 11 x In (250A)

4.68


x250 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Tripping Curve 3 hour

2

1 40 30

minute

20

10 6 4

2

Protection Devices

Cold start 1 40 30

Tripping Time

20

10 6 4

From warm state (rated current)

2

0.6 0.4

0.2

0.1 0.06 0.04

0.02

0.01

Percent Rated Current

8000

5000

4000

3000

2000

1500

1000

600

500

400

300

200

125

100

0.005 80

second

1

IN


4.69

x250 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Thermal Constraint and Current Limiting Curves Let-Through Curve MCCB x250 109

250A 100A

107

I2t (x106A2sec)

Max. Let-through Energy (I2t) Characteristics

108

106

HHB...up to 25kA HNB...up to 40kA

105

104

103 101

102

103

104

105


Current Limiting Curve MCCB x250 1000

Peak Current (kA)

100

10

HHB...up to 25kA HNB...up to 40kA

1

0.1

2

3

5

10

20

30

50

100

200 300


4.70


x250 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Dimensions Dimensions MCCB x160 3P 4P

A (mm) 104.5 139.5

B (mm) 35 35

C (mm) 126 126

3P 4P

A (mm) 104.8 139.8

B (mm) 54.5 54.5

C (mm) 64 64

A 35

45

165 mm 144 mm C

35

96 mm

Protection Devices

PUSH TO TRIP

22

B

68

Terminal Covers Front Connections (for straight bars) C

B

A

PUSH TO TRIP


4.71

x250 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Accessories Terminal Covers for Extended Connections (spreaders) 3P 4P

A (mm) 147.5 196

B (mm) 54.5 54.5

C (mm) 64 64

3P 4P

A (mm) 104.8 139.8

B (mm) 28.5 28.5

C (mm) 64 64

C

B

A

PUSH TO TRIP

Terminal Covers for Collar Terminals

B

A

C

PUSH TO TRIP

4.72


x250 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Connections Extended Connection with Spreaders M10 M10

6

Protection Devices

6

PUSH TO TRIP

3P

3P

Ø 11

29.5

29.5

Ø 11

120 226

226

93

168

128

4P

4P 35

35

50

35

50

50

4P 3P

11

35

16

57

144 mm

35

11

35

6

92

PUSH TO TRIP


4.73

x250 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Connections Connection with End Lugs

9 mm Max.

Ø8

25 mm Max.

6

5

12.7 Nm

Interphase Barriers 1.

2.


øi

B

d

4.74

N

M

L

Conductor Size Ø Stud mm Øi B M N L d Bag qty. Flexible mm2

Cat ref.

95 120 120 150 150 185 240 240 240 300 300

HA 19 B-M 8/15.5 HA 24 B-M 8/19 HA 24 B-M 10/19 HA 30 B-M 8/19 HA 30 B-M 10/19 HA 37 B-M 10/24.5 HA 48-M 10/31 HA 48-M 12/31 HA 48-M 16/31 HA 60 B-M 10/31 HA 60 B-M 12/31

8 8 10 8 10 10 10 12 16 10 12

13.5 15.5 9 8 52.5 8.4 25 15.2 19 14 9 60 8.4 25 15.2 19 14 9 60 10.5 25 16.7 19 18 9 70 8.4 25 16.7 19 18 9 70 10.5 25 19.2 24.5 18 9 77 10.5 25 21.1 31 13 9 80 10.5 15 21.1 31 16 12 86 13.2 15 21.1 31 19 17 94 17 15 23.7 31 16 12 95 10.5 10 23.7 31 16 12 95 13.2 10


x250 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Accessories Rotary Handle

116

53.7

45

101.8

48.5

Protection Devices

PUSH TO TRIP

104.5

12

Extended Rotary Handle A

107.5

45

101.8

200

PUSH TO TRIP

10


4.75

x250 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Auxiliaries Auxiliaries for MCCBs and Tripping Switches

6

TRIP PUSH TO TRIP

Mounting combination for auxiliaries and releases Auxiliary contact

4P 3P

AX

AX

Alarm contact

4.76

AL

SH

Shunt Trip

SH / UV

AL

UV


Undervoltage release

h400 - h630 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors

Icu Ics Icm Icw

h400/h630 HNB

380/415 AC (kA) 50 50 9 5kA - 0.3s

660/690 V AC (kA) 20 15 -

Protection Devices

h630 HCB

220/240V AC (kA) 85 85 -

Settings

B A

Magnetic and Thermal Settings TM 400 A

0,8

0,63

8

10

1 12

6

Ir (x In)

Ii (x In)

Thermal adjustment from 0.63 to 1 x In Magnetic adjustment from 6 to 12 x In


4.77

h400 - h630 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Electronic Trip Unit Setting (LSI) L - Long delay - protection against overload: Ir and tr settings S - Short delay - protection against short circuits: Isd and tsd settings I - Instantaneous - max. instantaneous threshold (< 10ms) in case of short circuit: 2.5 to 10 x Ir (400A) and 2.5 to 8 x Ir (630A). Neutral Settings: 1. Long delay current Ir setting 2. Other curve characteristics setting (tr, Isd, tsd) 3. Neutral protection against overloads setting

2 B

1

Characteristics

Ir (A) 0,8

0,85

0,9

0,63 0,5 0,4

4 0,95

3

1

2

50 %

100 %

5

6 7

1

3

ON OFF

PICK UP

TEST IN

In A

Adjustable IR T

250A / 400A LSI

7 6 5

Ir (x In) 4

1 2 5,6,7 0.2S 0.1S

1. Ir (x In)

3

1,2 2.5

3 5

4 10 14 xIR

I

isd (xlr) tsd (s)

Inst Ii (xlr)

Short Time Delay

Long Time Delay Ir (x In)

0.4

OK

OK

0.5

OK

OK

0.63

OK

OK

0.8

OK

OK

0.85

-

OK

0.9

OK

OK

0.95

OK

OK

1

OK

Inst

tr (s)

isd (xlr) tsd (s)

Ii (xlr)

11s at 2 xlr

2.5

14 (max 10 x In)

OK

1

11s at 2 xlr

2

21s at 2 xlr

2.5

0.1

5

14 (max 13 x In)

10s at 6 xlr

6

19s at 6 xlr

16s at 6 xlr

7

29s at 6 xlr

-

5s at 6 xlr

10 0.2

0% 50% 100%


0.1

21s at 2 xlr

3 2. 4 Characteristics 5

3. Neutral protection

4.78

tr (s)

630A

Short Time Delay

Long Time Delay

5 5s at 6 xlr 10s at 6 xlr

8 0.2

-

h400 - h630 MCCBs, Switch Disconnector Tripping Curve, Electronic Trip Unit Setting MCCB h630 LSI (250A and 400A) 3

T

hour

2

Ir

Ip

1 40 30

tr

tp Isd

20 minute

tsd 10

Ii

6

I

4 2

Overlapped characteristics

1

Protection Devices

40 30

Tripping Time

20 10 6 4 2

second

1 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.1 0.06 0.04 0.02 0.01

8000

5000

4000

3000

2000

1500

1000

600

500

400

300

200

125

80

100

0.005

Percent Rated Current I R Electronic Trip Unit Setting (LSI) MCCB h630 LSI (250A and 400A) IR (A) LTD Pick-up Current Characteristics

IR

LTD Standard

STD INST

Optional

N

rR

x/n No. (s)

Isd tsd Ii In tN

x/R (s) x/R x/n (s)

0.4 0.5 1 2 11 21 200% x Ir 2.5 0.1 14 (max : 13 x In 0 - 0.5 - 1 tN = tR

0.63 3 21 5

0.8 4 5 600% x Ir 10 0.2

0.9 5 10


0.95 6 19

1 7 29

4.79

h400 - h630 MCCBs, Switch Disconnector Tripping Curve, Electronic Trip Unit Setting MCCB h630 LSI (630A electronic) 3

T

hour

2

IR Ip

1 40 30

tR

tp Ig

20

Isd tsd

minute

10

tg

Ii

6

I

4 2

Overlapped characteristics

1 40 30

Tripping Time

20 10 6 4 2

second

1 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.1 0.06 0.04 0.02 0.01

8000

5000

4000

3000

2000

1500

1000

600

500

400

300

200

125

80

100

0.005

Percent Rated Current I R Electronic Trip Unit Setting (LSI) MCCB h630 LSI (630A electronic) IR (A) LTD Pick-up Current Characteristics

IR

LTD Standard

STD INST

Optional

4.80

N

rR

x/n No. (s)

Isd tsd Ii In tN

x/R (s) x/R x/n (s)

0.4 0.5 1 2 11 21 200% x I R 2.5 0.1 14 (max : 13 x In) 0 - 0.5 - 1 tN=tR

0.63 3 21 5

0.8 0.85 4 5 5 10 600% x I R 8 0.2


0.9 6 16

0.95

1

h400 - h630 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Thermal Constraint and Current Limiting Curves Thermal Constraint Curve MCCB h630 (630A)

30

30

20

20

10

10

5

5

3

3

2

2

1

0.5 0.3

1

Protection Devices

I2t (x106A2sec)

I2t (x106A2sec)

MCCB h630 (250A and 400A)

0.5 0.3

0.2

0.2

HND...up to 50kA HED...up to 70kA

0.1

0.1

0.05

0.05

0.03

0.03

0.02

0.02

2

3

5

10

20

30

50


100

200 300

2

3


5

10

20

30

50

100

200 300

100

200 300


Current Liming Curve MCCB h630 (250A and 400A)

MCCB h630 (630A)

30

30

20

20

10

10

5 3

Ip (kA)

Ip (kA)

2

1

0.5

0.5

0.3

0.3

0.2

0.2


0.1

0.1

0.05

0.05

0.03

0.03

0.02

0.02

2

3

5

10

20

30

50



100

200 300

2

3

5

10

20

30

50



4.81

h400 - h630 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Dimensions MCCBs A

145 45

45

A (mm) 139.7 184.7

B (mm) 45 45

C (mm) 214 214

102

260 228 C

3P 4P

B

32 97

3P 4P

A (mm) 180 240

480

B

Terminal Covers Front Connections (for Straight Bars) A D C

4.82


B (mm) 126 130

C (mm) 94.5 98

D (mm) 93 93

h400 - h630 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Accessories Terminal Covers for Extended Connections (spreaders) A (mm) 140 185

B (mm) 110 114

C (mm) 97 99

D (mm) 96 98

Protection Devices

E

3P 4P

Terminal Covers for Rear Connections and Collar Terminal A

C

B' B

D

3P 4P

A (mm) 140 185

B (mm) 3 3

B’ (mm) 4.5 4.5


C (mm) 97 97

D (mm) 93 93

4.83

h400 - h630 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Connections Extended Connection and Spreaders 60

148

45

60 4P

30

45

30

3P

163 45

Ø14

Ø14

30

349 mm

8

4P 60

60 208

60

Rear Connections 4P 15

3P 45

56

45

15

228 mm

45

15

6/8

96

Connection with End Lugs 1.

2.

12 Max.

M 10 30 mm Max.

8

4.84


h400 - h630 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Accessories Direct Rotary Handle 200 103

Protection Devices

241.5 127

139.5

Extended Rotary Handle 139.5

180.5

23.8

241.5 127

200

27


4.85

h400 - h630 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Auxiliaries Auxiliaries for MCCBs and Free Tripping Switches

6

6

TRIP

Mounting Combination for Auxiliaries and Releases

Shunt trip

Auxiliary contact SH

AX

AX

AL

SH / UV

Undervoltage release UV

Alarm contact AL

4.86


h800 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors

HCD

Icu Ics Icm Icw

380/415 V AC (kA) 50 50 20 1 kA - 0.3s

660/690 V AC (kA) 20 20 -

LSI 800/1000 A

2 B

1 Ir (A) 0,8

0,85

Characteristics 0,9

0,63 0,5

4 0,95

3

1

2

0,4

60 %

100 %

5

6 7

1

3

ON OFF

PICK UP

TEST IN

L - Long delay - protection against overloads: Ir and tr settings S - Short delay - protection against short circuits: Isd and tsd settings I - Instantaneous - max. instantaneous threshold (< 10 ms) in case of short circuit: 2.5 to 10 x Ir

T

Adjustable IR 7 6 5

4

1 2

1

}

LSI

2

5,6,7 0.2S 0.1S

3

1,2 2.5

LSI

3 5

4 10 14 xIR

I

1. Ir(A) 2. Im 0.4 - 1 In 2 - 10 Ir

3. N 0% 50% 100%

In A 250A / 400A Short Time Delay isd (xlr) tsd (s)

Long Time Delay Ir (x In) tr (s) 0.4 OK 0.5 OK 0.63 OK 0.8 OK 1. Ir (x In) 0.85 0.9 OK 0.95 OK 1 OK 1 11s at 2 xlr 2.5 2 21s at 2 xlr 3 5 2. 4 5s at 6 xlr 10 Characteristics 5 10s at 6 xlr 6 19s at 6 xlr 7 29s at 6 xlr 3. 0% Neutral 50% protection 100%


0.1

Inst Ii (xlr)

14 (max 12 x In)

0.2

4.87

Protection Devices

HNE

220/240 V AC (kA) 85 85 -

h800 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Tripping Curve MCCB h800 LSI (800A) 4 3 hour

2 1 50 40 30 20

minute

10 8 6 5 4 3

5

2

6 7

Tripping Time

1 50 40 30 20 10 8 6 5 4 3

1 2

2

3

second

1 0.8 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3

4 5,6,7

0.2 0.1 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03

1,2,3,4

0.02

7000 8000

6000

5000

4000

3000

2500

2000

1500

700 800 900 1000

600

500

250

200

150

125

0.005

80 90 100

0.01

Ir (%)

Electronic Trip Unit Setting (LSI) MCCBs 800A electronic IR (A) LTD Pick-up Current Characteristics LTD Standard

STD INST

Optional

4.88

NP

IR rR

x/n No. (s)

Isd tsd Ii In tN

x/R (s) x/R x/n (s)

0.4 0.5 1 2 11 21 200% x Ir 2.5 0.1 14 (max : 10 x In) 0.8 In = tR

0.63 3 21 5

0.8 4 5 600% x Ir 8


0.9 5 10

0.95 6 16

0.2

1

h800 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Thermal Constraint and Current Limiting Curve Thermal Constraint Curve MCCB h800 30 20

10

5 3 2

Protection Devices

1

0.5 0.3 0.2

HNE...up to 50kA HEE...up to 70kA

0.1

0.05 0.03 0.02

2

3

5

10

20

30

50

100

200 300

100

200 300


Current Limiting Curve MCCB h800 30 20

10

5 3

Ip (kA)

2

1

0.5 0.3 0.2

HNE...up to 50kA HEE...up to 70kA

0.1

0.05 0.03 0.02

2

3

5

10

20

30

50



4.89

h800 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Dimensions MCCBs A B

145

A (mm) 209.6 279.6

B (mm) 180 250

C (mm) 243 243

90

D 331 403

433 273

3P 4P

35 70

70

99,5

Terminal Covers Front Connectors (for straight bars) C

A

C

534

534

B

B

A

3P 4P

A (mm) 215 285

B (mm) 130 130

C (mm) 99.5 99.5

3P 4P

A (mm) 206 280

B (mm) 18 18

C (mm) 102 102

Terminal Covers for Rear Connections C

B

A

4.90


h800 MCCBs, Switch Disconnectors Connection Extended Connection 1.

2.

36

Ø 13

Protection Devices

40

19

Rear Connections

90°

6 8

58

12

58

12

122 mm

12

243,5 mm

288,5 mm

20 36

Ø 13


4.91

Modular devices Simple energy saving solutions Time based switches such as time switches and programmers provide selectable on-off periods during the day, week and year or a combination of all to control various electrical loads. Simple and effective energy savings can be achieved by setting these devices so that the various loads are only switched on when they are actually needed, thereby saving unnecessary usage of energy.

Energy saving solutions

5.2

2 Way / Centre-Off Changeover

5.3

Relays

5.4

Contactors

5.7

Time Switches

5.10

Light Sensitive Switch

5.14

Emergency Lighting Module

5.15

Staircase Time Lag Switches

5.16

Delay Timers

5.17

Pushbuttons Impulse & Latching

5.18

Indicator Lights

5.19

Transformers, Bells & Buzzers

5.20

Thermostats

5.21

Voltmeters & Ammeters

5.23


5.24

Selector Switches for Voltmeters & Ammeters

5.25

kWh Meters

5.26

Dimmers

5.29

Modular Devices

Switch Disconnector

Switch Disconnectors For use as a switch disconnector in all types of circuits. Complies with BS EN 60947-3 all ratings. In: 25 -32A Shrouded cable clamps Connection capacity: 16mm² rigid conductor 10mm² flexible conductor

In 40 - 63A Shrouded cable clamps Connection capacity: 25mm² rigid conductor 16mm² flexible conductor

On position “I” in red & Off position “0” in green giving positve contact indication

In 80 - 125A Shrouded cable clamps Connection capacity: 50mm² rigid conductor 35mm² flexible conductor

1 Mod = 17.5mm 2 Mod = 35mm 3 Mod = 525mm 4 Mod = 70mm For technical details see page 5.30 - 5.31

Single Pole Switch Disconnector

SBN125

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

1x 25A 250V 1x 25A 250V Indicator Light 1x 32A 250V 1x 32A 250V Indicator Light 1x 40A 250V 1x 63A 250V 1x 80A 250V 1x 100A 250V


SBN125 SBB125 SBN132 SBB132 SBN140 SBN163 SBN180 SBN190

Double Pole Switch Disconnector

SBN225

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

2x 25A 250V 2x 25A 250V Indicator Light 2x 32A 400V 2x 32A 250V Indicator Light 2x 40A 400V ac 2x 63A 400V ac 2x 80A 400V ac 2x 100A 400V ac


SBN225 SBB225 SBN232 SBB232 SBN240 SBN263 SBN280 SBN290

Triple Pole Switch Disconnector

SBN325

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

3x 25A 400V ac 3x 32A 400V ac 3x 40A 400V ac 3x 63A 400V ac 3x 80A 400V ac 3x 100A 400V ac 3x 125A400V ac 3x 125A 400V ac red toggle


SBN325 SBN332 SBN340 SBN363 SBN380 SBN390 SBN399 SBR399

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

Switch 4x 25A 400V neutral left Switch 4x 32A 400V neutral left Switch 4x 40A 400V neutral left Switch 4x 63A 400V neutral left Switch 4x 80A 400V neutral left Switch 4x 100A 400V neutral left Switch 4x 125A 400V neutral left


SBN425 SBN432 SBN440 SBN463 SBN480 SBN490 SBN499

Four Pole Switch Disconnector N

SBN425

5.2

General Catalogue • Modular Devices

2 Way / Centre-Off Changeover Modular Switches 2 Way Single Pole

1

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

1 x 25A 1P 250V ac

1 Mod

SFH125

2

1 NO x 1 NC Double Pole 1

2

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

2 x 25A NO/NC 1P 250V ac

1 Mod

SFM125

1

2

1

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

2 x 25A 2P 250V ac

2 Mod

SFH225

Modular Devices

2 Way Double Pole

2

Centre-Off Changeover Single Pole

1

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

1 x 25A 1P 250V ac

1 Mod

SFT125

2

Centre-Off Changeover Double Pole

1

2

1

2

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

2 x 25A 2P 250V ac~ 2 x 40A 2P 400V ac 2 x 63A 2P 400V ac

2 Mod 2 Mod 2 Mod

SFT225 SFT240 SF263

SFT225 / 240 1

2

1

2

SF263

Lockable Rotary Switch On/Off (4 Positions) 0

1 3 1 2 4

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

10A 400V ac

3 Mod

SK606

1 0

Internal Sales Hotline • 01952 675612 Technical Support Helpline • 01952 675689

5.3

Latching Relays Description Latching relays - operate when impulsed by a signal voltage. The impulse can be provided via a pushbutton or pushswitch. The first pulse operates the relay and latches it to its set (opposite) state, the next operation of the

pushbutton returns the relay to its reset (original) state.

easily combined with the latching relays.

Auxiliary Contacts (EPN050, EPN051) Are available for remote signalling and centralised control applications and can be

Connection: 10mm2 flexible 6mm2 rigid

1 Mod = 17.5mm 2 Mod = 35mm 3 Mod = 52.5mm 4 Mod = 70mm

Latching Relay 1 NO Coil

Power circuit AC1

Width

Cat ref.

230V 50Hz 24V 50Hz

16A - 250V~ 16A - 25V~

1 Mod 1 Mod

EPN510 EPN513

Coil

Power circuit AC1

Width

Cat ref.

230V 50Hz 24V 50Hz 12V 50Hz

16A - 250V~ 16A - 250V~ 16A - 250V~

1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod

EPN520 EPN524 EPN521

Coil

Power circuit AC1

Width

Cat ref.

230V 50Hz 24V 50Hz 12V 50Hz

16A - 250V~ 16A - 250V~ 16A - 250V~

1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod


Coil

Power circiut AC1

Width

Cat ref.

230V 50Hz 24V 50Hz 12V 50Hz

16A - 250V~ 16A - 250V~ 16A - 250V~

2 Mod 2 Mod 2 Mod


Coil

Power circuit AC1

Width

Cat ref.

230V 50Hz 24V 50Hz

16A - 400V~ 16A - 400V~

2 Mod 2 Mod

EPN540 EPN541

Description

Power circiut

Width (8.75mm)

Cat ref.

Auxiliary Contact Auxliary Contacts for Centralised Control

2A - 250V~ 24A - 230V~

½ Mod ½ Mod

EPN051 EPN050

EPN510

Latching Relay 2 NO

Latching Relay 1 NC + 1NO

Latching Relay 2 NC + 2 NO

Latching Relay 4 NO

EPN540

Auxiliary Contacts

5.4


Relays Description To provide control of low power circuits max 16A; associated with push buttons, switches, time switches etc for remote control applications.

The relays will accept an auxiliary contact for remote signalling applications (ESC080). For the command of ELV circuits use interface relays EN145 and EN146.

For the command of high power circuits (20, 40 & 63 Amps) use contactors as shown on page 5.7 - 5.9.


Relays 1 NC + 1 NO Coil AC Voltage

Power circuit AC1

Width (17.5mm)

Cat ref.

230V 50Hz 24V 50Hz 8/12V 50Hz

16A - 250V~ 16A - 250V~ 16A - 250V~

1 Mod 1 Mod 1 Mod

ERC218 ERD218 ERL218

Coil AC Voltage

Power circuit AC1

Width (in 17.5mm)

Cat ref.

230V 50Hz 24V 50Hz 8/12V 50Hz

16A - 250V~ 16A - 250V~ 16A - 250V~

2 Mod 2 Mod 1 Mod

ERC418 ERD418 ERL418

Modular Devices

ERD218

Relays 2 NC + 2 NO

ERC418

Auxiliaries and Accessories

ESC001

Description

Power circuit AC1

Width

Cat ref.

Sealable Terminal Cover for 1 Module Contactors Sealable Terminal Cover for 2 Module Contactors Sealable Terminal Cover for 3 Module Contactors 1NO + 1NC Auxiliary Contact

- - - 6A - 250V~

- - - ½ Mod

ESC001 ESC002 ESC003 ESC080

ESC002

ESC080


5.5

Interface Relays Description To interface between low voltage and extra low voltage circuits to ensure galvanic isolation to 4kV.

Application Interface between fire alarm, burglar alarm and other ELV systems and main distribution circuits.

Connection Flexible 4mm2 Rigid 6mm2


Interface Relay ELV/LV 1 Way A1

A2

1

1

4

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

Coil Voltage: 10 to 26V ac/dc Output: 1 Changeover Contact Max. 5A 230V~ Min. 10mA 12V dc

1 Mod

EN145

EN145

Interface Relay LV/ELV 1 Way A1

A2

1

1

4

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

Coil Voltage: 230V~ 50Hz Output: 1 Changeover Contact Max. 5A 230V~ Min. 10mA 12V dc

1 Mod

EN146

EN146

5.6


Standard Contactors

Technical Data The choice of contactor depends upon a number of parameters, e.g. • The nature of the supply. • The power it is switching. • The characteristics of the load. • The control voltage required. • Number of operations

All contactor ratings are for AC1 loads only – if the load differs from AC1 the contactor may need de-rating (see technical characteristics on page 5.31). The use of LZ060 (heat dissipation inserts) between all contactors installed or between contactors and adjacent devices is required.

Standard Contactors Description

ESC225

ESC425

Options Contact choice • Normally open (NO) • Normally closed (NC)


Auxiliary All contactors will accept auxiliary, ESC080 contact.

Coil AC voltage

Power circuit AC1

Width

25A 1NO 230V 50Hz 25A - 250V~ 1 Mod 25A 2NO 230V 50Hz 25A - 250V~ 1 Mod 25A 2NO Manual Override 230V 50Hz 25A - 250V~ 1 Mod 40A 2NO 230V 50Hz 40A - 400V~ 3 Mod 63A 2NO 230V 50Hz 63A - 400V~ 3 Mod 25A 2NO 24V 50Hz 25A - 250V~ 1 Mod 25A 2NO Manual Override 24V 50Hz 25A - 250V~ 1 Mod 40A 2NO 24V 50Hz 40A - 250V~ 3 Mod 25A 2NC 230V 50Hz 25A - 250V~ 1 Mod 25A 1NO 1NC 24V 50Hz 25A - 250V~ 1 Mod 25A 3NO 230V 50Hz 25A - 400V~ 2 Mod 25A 3NO Manual Override 230V 50Hz 25A - 400V~ 3 Mod 40A 3NO 230V 50Hz 40A - 400V~ 3 Mod 40A 3NO + 1NC 230V 50Hz 40A - 400V~ 3 Mod 63A 3NO + 1NC 230V 50Hz 63A - 400V~ 3 Mod 25A 4NO 230V 50Hz 25A - 400V~ 2 Mod 40A 4NO 230V 50Hz 40A - 400V~ 3 Mod 63A 4NO 230V 50Hz 63A - 400V~ 3 Mod 25A 4NO 24V 50Hz 25A - 400V~ 2 Mod 25A 4NC 230V 50Hz 25A - 400V~ 2 Mod 40A 4NC 230V 50Hz 40A - 400V~ 3 Mod 63A 4NC 230V 50Hz 63A - 400V~ 3 Mod 63A 2NC + 2NO 230V 50Hz 63A - 250V~ 3 Mod


Cat ref.

ESC125 ESC225 ERC225 ESC240 ESC263 ESD225 ERD225 ESD240

Modular Devices

Description For the remote switching and control of power circuits (20A-63A AC1)

ESC226 ESD227 ESC325 ERC326 ESC340 ESC443 ESC466 ESC425 ESC440 ESC463 ESD425 ESC426 ESC441 ESC464 ESC465

Description

Power circuit AC1

Width

Cat ref.

Heat Dissipation Insert NO+NC Auxiliary Contact

- 2A - 25V~

½ Mod ½ Mod

LZ060 EP071

LZ060


5.7

Low Noise Contactors Description For the remote switching and control of power circuits where noise may be a concern i.e hotel bedrooms etc.(20A-63A AC1).

All contactor ratings are for AC1 loads only – if the load differs from AC1 the contactor may need de-rating (see technical characteristics on page 5.31).

Technical Data The choice of contactor depends upon a number of parameters, e.g. • The nature of the supply. • The power it is switching. • The characteristics of the load. • The control voltage required. • Number of operations

The use of LZ060 (heat dissipation inserts) between all contactors installed or between contactors and adjacent devices is required.


Description

ESC225S

Options Contact choice • Normally open (NO) • Normally closed (NC)


Coil AC voltage

Width

Power circuit AC1

25A 2NO 230V 50Hz 25A - 400V~ 1 Mod 40A 2NO 230V 50Hz 40A - 400V~ 3 Mod 63A 2NO 230V 50Hz 63A - 400V~ 3 Mod 25A 3NO 230V 50Hz 25A - 400V~ 2 Mod 40A 3NO 230V 50Hz 40A - 400V~ 3 Mod 25A 3NO + 1NC 230V 50Hz 25A - 400V~ 2 Mod 25A 4NO 230V 50Hz 25A - 400V~ 2 Mod 40A 4NO 230V 50Hz 40A - 400V~ 3 Mod 63A 4NO 230V 50Hz 63A - 400V~ 3 Mod 25A 4NC 230V 50Hz 25A - 400V~ 2 Mod

Cat ref.


ESC463S


Description

Power circuit AC1

Width

Cat ref.

Heat Dissipation Insert Sealable Terminal Cover for 1 Module Contactors Sealable Terminal Cover for 2 Module Contactors Sealable Terminal Cover for 3 Module Contactors 1NO + 1NC Auxiliary Contact

- - - - 6A - 250V~

½ Mod - - - ½ Mod

LZ060 ESC001 ESC002 ESC003 ESC080

ESC463S

ESC080

5.8


Override Contactors Description Manual override facility allows temporary override, with automatic return at next coil energisation. Permanent off can also be selected. ET201 low noise version.

Technical Data The choice of contactor depends upon a number of parameters, e.g. • The nature of the supply. • The power it is switching. • The characteristics of the load. • The control voltage required. • Number of operations All contactors ratings are for AC1 loads only – if the load differs from AC1 the contactor may need de-rating (see technical characteristics on page 5.31).

2 NO

The use of LZ060 (heat dissipation inserts) between all contactors installed or between contactors and adjacent devices is recommended. Options Contact choice • Normally open (NO) • Normally closed (NC)

Auxiliary All contactors will accept auxiliary, ESC080 contact. 1 Mod = 17.5mm 2 Mod = 35mm 3 Mod = 52.5mm 4 Mod = 70mm

Coil AC voltage

Power circuit AC1

Width

Cat ref.

230V 50 Hz 230V 50 Hz

25A - 250V~ 25A - 250V~

1 Mod 1 Mod

ETC225S ¹ ETC225

Coil AC voltage

Power circuit AC1

Width

Cat ref.

230V 50 Hz 230V 50 Hz

20A - 400V~ 40A - 400V~

2 Mod 3 Mod

ETC325 ETC340

Coil AC voltage

Power circuit AC1

Width

Cat ref.

230V 50 Hz 230V 50 Hz

20A - 400V~ 40A - 400V~

2 Mod 3 Mod

ETC425 ETC440

Modular Devices

¹ Hum free device

ETC225S

3 NO

4 NO

ETC425

Auxiliary for 20A Contactors Power circuit AC1

Width

Cat ref.

2A - 250V~

½ Mod

ESC080


Width

Cat ref.

Heat Dissipation Insert

½ Mod

LZ060


5.9

Electromechanical and Digital Time Switch Selection Guide

Programming Cycle

24 Hours

Electromechanical Time Clocks

Digital Time Clocks

1 Channel

1 Channel

2 Channels

4 Channels

1 Modules

3 Modules

1 Modules

2 Modules

2 Modules

4 Modules

EH010 EH011

EH110 EH111 EH171

EG071 EG010

EG103 EG103V EG103E

EG203 EG203E

EG493E

2 Channels 2 Modules

4 Channels 4 Modules

Electromechanical

Digital

1 Channel 1 Module

3 Modules

EH010 EH011

EH110 EH111

EG010

EH171

EG071

7 Days

1 Channel 1 Modules

2 Modules

EG103 EG103V EG103E

EG203 EG203E

Annual

EG493E

Electromechanical Time Switches Description Electromechanical time switches 1 and 2 channel. For hourly, daily or weekly programming. To control lighting, heating, ventilation, household appliances etc. To save energy and to improve comfort.

Technical Data • Programming by captive segments • Manual override: For 1 module products: • Automatic • Permanent ON For 3 module products: • Automatic • Permanent ON • Permanent OFF

Minimum Switching Time • 15 min for daily dial • 2h for weekly dial Connection Protected tunnel terminals. 1-4mm2


1 Channel Time Switches without Supply Failure Reserve Quartz: Without supply failure reserve. Characteristics

Voltage supply

Width

Cat ref.

Daily Dial, 1 Changeover contact, 16A 250V~ AC1 Daily Dial, 1 NO Contact, 16A 250V~ AC1

230V~ 50Hz 230V~ 50Hz

1 Mod 3 Mod

EH010 EH110

1 Channel Time Switches with Supply Failure Reserve Quartz: With supply failure reserve 200 hours after being connected for 120 hours.

5.10

Characteristics

Voltage supply

Width

Cat ref.

Daily Dial, 1 Changeover contact, 16A 250V~ AC1 Daily Dial, 1 NO Contact, 16A 250V~ AC1 Weekly Dial, 1 NO Contact, 16A 250V~ AC1

230V~ 50/60Hz 230V~ 50/60Hz 230V~ 50/60Hz

1 Mod 3 Mod 3 Mod

EH011 EH111 EH171


Digital Time Switches For the control of lighting, heating, household appliances, shop windows, signage etc., to improve comfort and to save energy. EG103 and EG203 (Basic Version) Product set at current time and date when delivered. Automatic change of Summer / Winter time.

Programming Key • To allow easy back up and re-installation of the program to allow permanent program overrides • Programming per day or group of days • 56 ON / OFF programme steps • Permanent ON/OFF overrides • Temporary ON/OFF overrides bar graph indication showing the daily profile • Possibility of locking the keyboard with EG004

• Programming without the need to be energised EG103E/V and EG203E (Evolution Versions) Same characteristics as EG103 and EG203 plus more: • Holidays mode: forcing ON or OFF between two dates • Presence simulation - random switching • Backlit screen • Impulse programming capability (1s to 30 min)

Connection EG010 / EG 071 : 0.5 to 4mm2 EG 103 and EG 203/E : 1 to 6mm2 Flexible 1.5 to 10mm2 Rigid Operating Voltage 230~ 50/60 Hz (except EG103V - 12/24V AC/DC)

Not compatible with program key

EG071

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

Daily Cycle, 5 Adjustable pre-recorded programs 6 Switchings per day (3 on and 3 off), Output: 1 changeover contact 16A - 250V~ AC 1, 3 year reserve Weekly Cycle, Output: 1 changeover contact, µ16A - 250V~ AC 1, Capacity 20 program steps, 3 year reserve

1 Mod

EG010

1 Mod

EG071

Modular Devices

1 Channel Digital Time Switch

1 Channel Digital Time Switch

EG103

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

Weekly Cycle (Basic Version), Output: 1 changeover contact 16A - 250V~ AC 1, Delivered with key EG005 Weekly Cycle (Evolution Version), Output: 1 changeover contact 16A - 250V~ AC 1, Delivered with key EG005 Weekly Cycle (Evolution Version), Output: 1 changeover contact 16A - 250V~ AC 1, Operating Voltage 12/24V AC/DC, Delivered with key EG005

2 Mod

EG103

2 Mod

EG103E

2 Mod

EG103V

2 Channel Digital Time Switch Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

Weekly Cycle (Basic Version), Output: 2 changeover contact 16A - 250V~ AC 1, Delivered with key EG005 Weekly Cycle (Evolution Version), Output: 2 changeover contact 16A - 250V~ AC 1, Delivered with key EG005

2 Mod

EG203

2 Mod

EG203E

Pack qty.

Cat ref.

PC Interface and Software Tool Interface between PC and key interface module with software on CD Connection

RS232 1 EG003 USB 1 EG003U


Pack qty.

Cat ref.

Locking key (yellow colour) to prevent unauthorised re-programming of all EG time clocks (except EG010, EG071) Spare programming key (grey colour) for timers EG103, EG103V, EG203, EG103E, EG203E DIN Rail storage module for EG004 or EG005

1

EG004

1

EG005

1

EG006


5.11

Astrological Time Switches Description The hager range is composed of two astrological time switches EE180/EE181. The range offers the following features: • Programming of the lighting interruption • Automatic change of winter / summer time

• Astro program and expert program with individual Astro program steps • Programming for day or group of days (same concept as our existing clocks with key) • Weekly programming • Permanent override • Temporary overrides

• Programming of holiday period • Programming via the PC software and the associated interface (EG003)


For technical information see page 5.38

1 Channel Astrological Time Switch Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

Weekly Cycle, 230V~, 50Hz Changeover Contact 16A AC1, Operating reserve lithium battery 5 years, Delivered with key EG005

2 Mod

EE180

EE180

2 Channel Astrological Time Switch Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

Weekly Cycle, 230V~, 50Hz 2 Changeover Contact 16A AC1, Operating reserve lithium battery 5 years, Delivered with key EG005

2 Mod

EE181

EE181

5.12


4 Channel Digital Time Switch 4 Channel Digital Time Switch Weekly and Annual Cycle In commercial premises timed programming often requires the use of multi-circuit equipment with large programming capacities for a weekly or annual cycle.

Applications • Command of lighting circuits • Control of heating • Ventilation control • Bell • Alarm Functions • Summer/winter time pre-programmed • Delivered with time set • External input for override (permanent, temporary, timed) • Easy programming with words in display • The output can be defined as ON/OFF, impulse or cycle

• 4 different cycles can be defined • Calculates automatically all dates linked with easter. • Holidays program • 10 specific weekly programs • Random mode • Input for external mode • Hour counter on each output • Keyboard locking with PIN code


Connection Quick connect terminals Capacity: 0.75 to 2.5mm2

Modular Devices

4 Channel Yearly Time Switch EG493E

EG493E

PC Interface and Software Tool Interface between PC and key interface module with software on CD Connection

Cat ref.

RS232 USB

EG003 EG003U

EG003


Cat ref.

Programming key for EG493E

EG002

EG002


5.13

Light Sensitive Switch Description A photo-electric cell measures the light level and in conjunction with the relay provides on/off control of a circuit. This device controls lighting circuits in relation to ambient light, based on user settings. Front cover sealability

Applications Street lighting, display lighting, illuminated signs etc. Connection Protected cable clamps Capacity: Rigid: 1.5 to 10mm2 Flexible: 1 to 6mm2 On board LED shows status of changeover contact.

Technical Data 4 position override switch allowing: • Auto: normal operating mode • On: permanently switched on • Off: permanently switched off • Test: setting mode for easy adjustment.


Light Sensitive Switch 2 sensitivity ranges: 5 to 50 lux, 50 to 2000 lux Delivered with a separate surface photo-electric cell EE003 Must be used in conjunction with a suitably rated contactor (page 5.7 - 5.8) where load conditions demand

EE100

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

Voltage rating: 230V~ 50/60Hz Outputs: 1 changeover AC 1 contact 16A AC1 - 230V~ Maximum distance: 50m between photocell and controller

3 Mod

EE100

Light Sensitive Programmer Description To control the lighting installation in relation to time and ambient light. It is a weekly programmer associated with a light sensitive switch.

Working Principle The user programmes both on/ off periods and a desired light level. The cell measures the light level within the on period. Depending on the light level (below or above the programmed threshold, the output will be switched on/off. 20 program steps, 1 minute switching increments

Programming Function Programming by keys and display on LCD screen. On/off override facility, permanent working. Display and control of the programme. Test setting for easy adjustment.


Light Sensitive Programmer 2 sensitivity ranges: 5 to 50 lux, 50 to 2000 lux Delivered with a separate surface photo-electric cell EE003 Must be used in conjunction with a suitably rated contactor (page 5.7 - 5.8) where load conditions demand

EE171

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

Voltage rating: 230V~ 50/60Hz Outputs: 1 changeover AC 1 contact 16A AC1 - 230V~ Maximum distance: 50m between photocell and controller

3 Mod

EE171

Replacement Photo Electric Cell Mounting

For Cat ref.

Pack qty.

Cat ref.

Flush Surface

EE100, EE171 EE100, EE171

1 1

EE002 EE003

EE003

5.14


Emergency Lighting Module Application For both residential and commercial applications

Installed in a consumer unit or distribution board, the lamp can be configured to light automatically in the event of power failure.

It can also be withdrawn from it’s base, thereby acting as a mini torch with an operating duration of 1 hour 30 mins


Emergency Lighting Module Description

Width

Cat ref.

Emergency Lighting Module

3 Mod

EE960

Modular Devices

EE960


5.15

Timers Switches Selection Guide Areas of use Residential Communal Stairwells and Landlord Areas External Lighting

Communal / Landlords Areas

Commercial

Industrial

EMN001 & EMN005 EMN001 & EMN005

Landlords Areas / Bathrooms

EZN002 EZN006

Heating Overrides

EZN001 EZN006

Shop Windows / Signage

EZN005 EZN006

Timer Function

EZN004 EZN006

Door Closing Mechanisms

EZN004 EZN006

Alarm Bell

EZN004 + EZN006 EZN006

Variation of Alarm Frequency

EZN005 EZN006

Staircase Time Lag Switches Description To provide control of lighting circuits with automatic switch-off after a pre-set time. Compact design with a 2 position switch permanent / timed lighting control facility.

EMN005 incorporates a pre-warning of switch OFF to improve the safety for users and a double delay function: 30 sec. to 10 min, or 1 hour by pressing the push-button more than 3 seconds.


Basic Staircase Time Lag Switches Adjustable time delay setting 30 sec. to 10 minutes Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

Supply voltage 230V~ 50/60Hz 16A - 250V AC1 2300W incandescent halogen and flurescent

1 Mod

EMN001

Multifunction Staircase Time Lag Switches Basic staircase time lag switch Pre-warning mode Double delay mode 30 sec. to 10 min or 1 hour Double delay with pre-warning mode Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

Supply voltage 230V~ 50/60Hz μ16A - 250V AC1 2300W incandescent halogen and flurescent

1 Mod

EMN005

EMN005

5.16


Delay Timers Applications For timing and automation in domestic and commercial premises. The input signal can be via various switching devices (pushbutton, latching switch, timeclock etc.) and the timed output used to control the application.

Technical Data Voltage range: 12 to 48V DC 12 to 230V AC Adjustable: Time delay from 0.1s to 10hrs. Complies with BS EN 60669-2-1

Terminal Capacity 6mm2 max flexible 1.5 - 10mm2 rigid 1 Mod = 17.5mm 2 Mod = 35mm 3 Mod = 52.5mm 4 Mod = 70mm

Delay On Cde S T

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

1 changeover contact 10A / 230V~ AC1 Time delay T:0.1s to 10hr

1 Mod

EZN001

Cde S Cde

T

S

Delay Off T Cde S Cde T S T

Cde Cde S S Cde

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.


1 Mod

EZN002

Modular Devices

Description To provide all types of automatic control i.e. lighting, ventilation, watering, machine pre-heating, automatic door and visual audible indication, cycle control etc. with automatic switch off after preset time.

TT

S Cde Cde

T

Adjustable Time On S S Cde

T

T

S Cde Cde

T

S T

S Cde S Cde Cde S

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.


1 Mod

EZN003

T T

S Cde

T T

S

T

Cde Cde

Timer S S Cde S

T

T

T Cde S Cde T

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.


1 Mod

EZN004

S T

Cde S Cde

T

S

Symmetrical Flasher T Cde S T

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.


1 Mod

EZN005

Multifunction Characteristics

Functions

1 changeover contact Delay On, Delay Off, Adjustable 10A / 230V~ AC1 Time On, Adjustable Time Off, Time delay T:0.1s to 10hr Timer, Symmetrical Flasher (On, Off)

Width

Cat ref.

1 Mod

EZN006


5.17

Pushbuttons Impulse & Latching Description Pushbuttons to actuate loads either directly or via contactors etc. Technical Data Modular pushbuttons • Without light With grey button, red/green optional • With light With red, green button

Light Technology LED Connection Cage terminals


Terminal Capacity 10mm2 rigid conductor. 6mm2 flexible conductor. BS EN 60947-5-1

Pushbuttons (Impulse) 16A - 250V~ Without indicator light

SVN311

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

Contacts: 1 NO Contacts: 2 NO Contacts: 2 NO, Double Pushbutton Contacts: 1 NC Contacts: 2 NC Contacts: 1 NO + 1 NC Contacts: 1 NO + 1 NC, Double Pushbutton


SVN311 SVN331 SVN371 SVN321 SVN341 SVN351 SVN391

Pushbuttons (Impulse) 16A - 250V~ With indicator light

SVN411

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

Contacts: 1 NO : Green Contacts: 2 NO : Red Contacts: 1 NC : Red Contacts: 2 NC : Green Contacts: 1 NO + 1 NC


SVN411 SVN432 SVN422 SVN441 SVN452

Pushbuttons (Latching) 16A - 250V~ Without indicator light

SVN312

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

Contacts: 1 NO Contacts: 2 NO Contacts: 1 NC Contacts: 2 NC Contacts: 1 NO + 1 NC


SVN312 SVN332 SVN322 SVN342 SVN352

Pushbuttons (Latching) 16A - 250V~ With indicator light Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

Contacts: 1 NO : Green Contacts: 2 NO : Green

1 Mod 1 Mod

SVN413 SVN433

SVN413

5.18


Indicator Lights Modular Indicator Lights Available with red, green, amber, blue, colourless lens Light Technology LED

Options DIN rail mountable Connection Cage terminals

Capacity 10mm2 rigid conductor 6mm2 flexible conductor BS EN 62094-1


Indicator Lights (230V~) Width

Cat ref.

Green Red Orange Blue Clear Red & Green (Double Indicator) Red (Triple Indicator)


SVN121 SVN122 SVN123 SVN124 SVN125 SVN126 SVN127

Modular Devices

Indicator Colour

SVN122

Indicator Lights (12/48V) Indicator Colour

Width

Cat ref.

Green Red

1 Mod 1 Mod

SVN131 SVN132


5.19

Transformers, Bells & Buzzers Description Provide separated extra low voltage 8, 12, 24V~.

Output Bells: 85 dBA Buzzers: 78 dBA

Technical Data Secondary voltages: 8V, 12V, 24V~ Bell transformers are short-circuit protected. Bells/buzzers: Max. continuous duty ≤ 30 minutes. Cable capacities: 6mm2 Cable clamp type

When a bell transformer is installed in an enclosure with mains voltage equipment, 230V cable should be used on the secondary side of the transformer or extra low voltage cable should be sheathed within the enclosure.

Note The transformers have a higher no load voltage. The stated voltages correspond to the voltages on nominal load. 1 Mod = 17.5mm 2 Mod = 35mm 3 Mod = 52.5mm 4 Mod = 70mm 6 Mod = 95mm

Safety Transformers Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

230V/12-24V~ 50Hz, 25VA 50/60 Hz 230V/12-24V~ 50Hz, 16VA 50/60 Hz 230V/12-24V~ 50Hz, 40VA 50/60 Hz 230V/12-24V~ 50Hz, 63VA 50/60 Hz


ST312 ST313 ST314 ST315

ST313

Bell Transformers Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

230V/8V~ 50/60 Hz, 8-12V, 4VA 230V/8-12V~ 50/60 Hz, 8-12V, 8VA 230V/8-12V~ 50/60 Hz, 8-12V, 16VA

2 Mod 2 Mod 3 Mod

ST301 ST303 ST305

ST301

Bells Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

8/12V~, 5VA - 0.33A 230V~, 6.5VA - 0.03A

1 Mod 1 Mod

SU212 SU213

Buzzers

5.20

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

8/12V~, 4VA - 0.33A 230V~, 6.5VA - 0.03A

1 Mod 1 Mod

SU214 SU215


Thermostats Description Electronic thermostats for any application requiring temperature control (from cold room to steam room). Applications EK081 fixed ambient probe for night temperature regulation. EK083 used as floor probe to limit floor temperature. EK083 used to control hot water

temperature (with its collar) in case of probe disconnection. 3 working modes are possible (selected by wiring): 1. Permanent off 2. Permanent on 3. Cyclic operation 1 minute in every 4.

EK187 Electronic Thermostat Suitable for Heating Control Two adjustable temperature levels are selected by external signals (operation by time switch or digital programmer).

Output status is displayed by an LED.

Additionally there is an adjustable low level temperature for frost protection etc. In the event of probe disconnection the heating system is switched on one minute in every four. 1 Mod = 17.5mm 2 Mod = 35mm 3 Mod = 52.5mm 4 Mod = 70mm

Multi-range Thermostats Delivered without probe. Compatible with EK081 or EK083 probes Width

Cat ref.

Voltage rating: 230V~ - 50/60 Hz Output: 1 changeover contact, 2A AC1 - 230V~ 4 ranges: -30 to 0°C, 0 to +30°C, 30 to +60°C, 60 to +90°C To associate with contactors (page 6.8 - 6.10)

3 Mod

EK186

Modular Devices

Characteristics

Multi-order Thermostats Delivered without probe. Compatible with EK081 or EK082 probes Characteristics

EK187

Width

Accuracy ±0.2°C, Voltage rating: 230V~ - 50/60 Hz 3 Mod Output: 1 changeover contact, 2A AC1 - 230V~ Temperature Level 1 (Comfort) Adjustable 5 - 30°C Temperature Level 2 (Night setting) Adjustable 2 - 8°C less than Level 1 setting Temperature level 3 (Frost setting) Adjustable 5 - 30°C To associate with contactors (page 6.8 - 6.10)

Cat ref.

EK187

Fixed Ambient Probe Can be associated with

Cat ref.

EK186, EK187 thermostats EG502 programmable thermostat

EK081

Adjustable Ambient Probe This probe is equipped with a potentiometer for the correction of the set temperature (±3°C) Can be associated with

Cat ref.

EK187 thermostats EG502 programmable thermostat

EK082

EK082

Universal Probe (Removable Collar) Can be associated with

Cat ref.

EK186 thermostats EG502 programmable thermostat

EK083

EK083


5.21

Programmable Thermostat Programmable Thermostat Description To save energy by managing the heating system according to the periods of occupation. It is a weekly programmer associated with a 3 setting thermostat: • “Comfort”, • “Reduced”, • “Anti-frost” Connection: Protected Cable Clamps Capacity: 1.5 to 10 mm2 rigid Capacity: 1 to 6 mm2 flexible

Thermostatic Function • Adjustable comfort and reduced temperature • Fixed anti-frost temperature • Display of state of output, • Display of selected mode, • Push button selection of working mode: • Automatic cycle comfort Tº / reduced Tº • Permanent comfort temperature • Permanent reduced temperature • Permanent anti-frost temperature.

Probes EG502 can be associated with: • EK081 fixed ambient probe, • EK082 adjustable ambient probe • EK083 universal probe (see page 5.21) 1 Mod = 17.5mm 2 Mod = 35mm 3 Mod = 52.5mm 4 Mod = 70mm

Programmable Thermostat Delivered without probe. Compatible with EK081, EK082t or EK083 probes Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

Voltage rating: 230V; 50 Hz Output: 1 changeover contact, 2A – 250V; AC1 2 Temperature settings “comfort” and “reduced” adjustable + 8ºC to + 28ºC, Anti-frost temperature setting + 8ºC (constant)

4 Mod

EG502

EG502

5.22


Analogue Voltmeters & Ammeters Analogue Voltmeters For domestic and commercial installations • Single phase: direct connection • Three phase: use of a voltmeter selector switch SK602 (see page 5.25).

Frequency 50 Hz Connection Capacity Rigid conductor 10mm2 Flexible conductor 6mm2

Analogue Ammeters For domestic and commercial installations. Indirect reading via current transformers: 50-100-150-250400A


Voltmeter Consumption

Accuracy

Width

Cat ref.

2.5VA

2%

4 Mod

SM500

Ammeters

Scale

Accuracy

Width

Cat ref.

0 - 50A 0 - 100A 0 - 150A 0 - 250A 0 - 400A

2% 2% 2% 2% 2%


SM050 SM100 SM150 SM250 SM400

Digital Ammeters SM151, SM401, SM601: reading via a current transformer (see below)


Modular Devices

Connection via a current transformer (CT) (page 5.24)

SM050

Digital Voltmeters & Ammeters Digital Voltmeters SM501 For domestic and commercial installations

• Three phase: use of a voltmeter selector switch SK602

Digital Voltmeter Voltage rating: 220/230V; 50/60Hz Accuracy: ± 1% Consumption: 4 VA Scale

Width

Cat ref.

0 - 500V

4 Mod

SM501

SM501

Digital Ammeters Voltage rating: 220/230V; 50/60Hz Accuracy: ± 1% Consumption: 4 VA Description

Scale

Width

Cat ref.

Reading via CT 150/5A (SR150) Reading via CT 400/5A (SR400) Reading via CT 600/5A (SR600)

Scale: 0 - 150A Scale: 0 - 400A Scale: 0 - 600A

4 Mod 4 Mod 4 Mod

SM151 SM401 SM601


5.23

Current Transformers (C.T) Current transformers are used to feed analogue and digital ammeters and kilowatt hour meters.

The current on the secondary circuit (0 - 5A) is proportional to the current on primary circuit class: 1.

Can be mounted on copper bar or on cable. Can be mounted on DIN rail.

Current Transformers (C.T) Ratio

Cat ref.

50/5 100/5 150/5 200/5 250/5 300/5 400/5 600/5

SR051 SR101 SR150 SR200 SR250 SR300 SR400 SR600

SR300

5.24


Selector Switches for Voltmeters & Ammeters Description For use with Voltmeters and Ammeters.

Applications Complies with IEC 947-3 BS EN 60947-3 Terminal Capacity 1 - 6mm2 Flexible 1.5 - 10mm2 Rigid

Isolating voltage 500VAC Nominal current 10-20A 1 Mod = 17.5mm 2 Mod = 35mm 3 Mod = 52.5mm 4 Mod = 70mm

Voltmeter Selector 3 Ph&N 3 Readings between phases 3 Readings between phase & neutral Null position (no reading) 1

3

V

L1 L2 L3 N

L1 L2 L2 L3

0

L1

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

20A 400Vac

3 Mod

SK602

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

20A 400Vac

3 Mod

SK603

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

10A 400Vac

3 Mod

SK606

L2

L3 L1

L3

10 6 2 12

11

9

A

L2

L3

L3 3

Modular Devices

0

L1

L1

4 10 2

L2

SK602

0

1 3 1

1

2 4

0

Ammeter Selector 4 Positions 1 3 Use Vin 3 Ph&N Reading by phase 0 L1 L1 L1 L2 L2 L2 L2 L3 Null position (no reading) L3 L3 L1 N Should be used with L3Current Transformer (see page 5.24) 10 6 2 12 11 1 L1

9

A

V

3

0

L1 L2 L2 L3 L3 N 3 4 10 2 10 6 2 12

11 L1

0

L1

L2

L1

L3

L2

9

A

00

1 3

L2 L3

L1 L2 L3 L2 L3 L3 L1

L3

L1

1 1 Lockable Rotary Switch 3

4 102 2

4

L2 0

On / Off (4 Positions) 0

1 3 1 2 4

1 0

SK606


5.25

kWh Meters Single Phase Description Energy meters are used to measure the active energy consumed by an installation. They allow the user to understand and control the real cost of an installation and to divide the consumption between the different appliances. MID approval for sub billing on EC154M.

Characteristics • Fully compliant with the European standard EN 50470-3 • Class B • Accuracy 1% • Energy readout: 7 digits • Backlit display • Indication of instantaneous power consumption • Total / partial counter (expected MID references)

• Pulsed output • Unlimited saving of measurements • LED flashes according to consumption • Option: tariff 1/ tariff 2 • Three phase energy meters are adapted to all kind of networks • Display indication in case of incorrect wiring

1 Mod = 17.5mm 2 Mod = 35mm 3 Mod = 52.5mm 4 Mod = 70mm Note: Use of heat dissipation inserts (cat ref. LZ060) are recommended on each side of direct connection meters.

Single Phase kWh Meters Voltage 230V~ 50Hz Direct connection In = 320mA - 32A

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

Total counter, non resettable counter Total counter, non resettable counter, pulsed output 1 pulse = 100Wh

1 Mod 1 Mod

EC050 EC051

EC050

Single Phase kWh Meters - Direct 63A Voltage 230V~ 50/60Hz Starting current = 40mA Base current = 10A Max current = 63A Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

Energy meter with pulsed output and total / partial counter Energy meter with pulsed output - total / partial counter and 2 tariffs Energy meter with pulsed output - with MID approval

3 Mod 3 Mod 3 Mod

EC150 EC152 EC154M

EC150

EC154M

5.26


kWh Meters Three Phase Description Energy meters are used to measure the active energy consumed by an installation. They allow the user to understand and control the real cost of an installation and to divide the consumption between the different appliances. MID approval for sub billing on EC364M.

Characteristics • Fully compliant with the European standard EN 50470-3 • Class B • Accuracy 1% • Energy readout: 7 digits • Backlit display • Indication of instantaneous power consumption • Total / partial counter (expected MID references)

• Pulsed output • Unlimited saving of measurements • LED flashes according to consumption • Option: tariff 1/ tariff 2 • Three phase energy meters are adapted to all kind of networks • Display indication in case of incorrect wiring

1 Mod = 17.5mm 2 Mod = 35mm 3 Mod = 52.5mm 4 Mod = 70mm 7 Mod = 122.5mm Note: Use of heat dissipation inserts (cat ref. LZ060) are recommended on each side of direct connection meters.


Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.


4 Mod 4 Mod

EC350 EC352

Modular Devices

Voltage 230/400V~ 50/60Hz Starting current = 40mA Base current = 10A Max current = 63A

EC350

Three Phase kWh Meters - Direct 100A Voltage 230/400V~ 50/60Hz Starting current = 80mA Base current = 20A Max current = 100A

EC364M

Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.



EC360 EC362 EC364M EC365B TE360

Three Phase kWh Meters - Connection via Current Transformers To be connected to CT with 5A on the secondary Voltage 230/400V~ 50/60Hz Starting current = 10mA Max current on CT secondary = 6A Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

Energy meter with pulsed output and total / partial counter Energy meter with pulsed output - total / partial counter and 2 tariffs Energy meter with KNX output

4 Mod 4 Mod 4 Mod

EC370 EC372 TE370

EC370


5.27

Hours Counter Description To measure the total operating time of any circuit/load non resettable

Application Example • Total time of plant running • Connection in parallel with contactor coil • Recording of lighting hours for relamping purposes


Hours Counter Voltage

Width

Cat ref.

230V - 50Hz

2 Mod

EC100

EC100

5.28


Dimmers Description Hager dimmers control the lighting level of all types of lighting source: incandescent, LV halogen, VLV halogen with electronic or ferromagnetic transformer, LED VLV lamps with electronic transformer, fluorescent with electronic ballast. The EVN 300W and 500W dimmers also allow lighting level adjustment for dimmable CFL and dimmable LED lamps.

Dimming controlled by push button: • Start / stop by short press • Increasing / decreasing by maintaining pressure

For technical details see page 5.55 1 Mod = 17.5mm 2 Mod = 35mm

Common characteristics • Universal dimmers with automatic load recognition • Softstart (progressive start) to increase the working life of lamps • Memorisation of last dimming level • Protection against overheating

Universal Dimmers 300W

Characteristics

Width

Standard version 1 Comfort version • Expert mode 1 • Scene by 2 short double presses on the PB (progressive switch off, night light, 100%, no function)

Modular Devices

• Compatible with dimmable CFL and LED • 3 modes for load learning: auto, advanced, expert (comfort version) • Can replace a latching relay, with lighting level function • Push button (phase or neutral). • Very low consumption. Cat ref.

EVN011 EVN012

EVN011

Universal Dimmers 500W • Compatible CFL and LED • 3 modes for load learning: auto, advanced, expert (comfort version) • Very low consumption Characteristics

Width

Cat ref.

Standard version Comfort version • Expert mode • 100% via 2 short preses on the dim input PB • One scene PB (scene, time delayed scene, progressive switch-off, night light) • Multi-voltage dim PB

2 2

EVN002 EVN004

EVN004


5.29

Modular Load Break Disconnectors 16A - 125A Electrical Characteristics Family Number of poles Frame size Thermal current Ith (40°C) Operational frequency Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp Protection degree Working temperature Storage temperature

SB 1P - 2P - 3P - 4P Frame size 1

Frame size 2

Frame size 3

16A

25A

32A

40A

63A

80A

100A

125A

50 / 60 Hz

50 / 60 Hz

50 / 60 Hz

50 / 60 Hz

50 / 60 Hz

50 / 60 Hz

50 / 60 Hz

50 / 60 Hz

500 V

500 V

500 V

500 V

500 V

500 V

500 V

500 V

3 KV

3 KV

3 KV

6 KV

6 KV

6 KV

6 KV

6 KV

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

-20 to 50°C

-20 to 50°C

-20 to 50°C

-20 to 50°C

-20 to 50°C

-20 to 50°C

-20 to 50°C

-20 to 50°C

-40 to 80°C

-40 to 80°C

-40 to 80°C

-40 to 80°C

-40 to 80°C

-40 to 80°C

-40 to 80°C

-40 to 80°C

16A 16A 16A TBA

25A 25A 25A TBA

32A 32A 32A TBA

40A 40A 40A TBA

63A 63A 63A TBA

80A 80A 80A TBA

100A 100A 100A TBA

125A 125A 125A TBA

Operational Currents Ie Rated voltage 400V AC 400V AC 400V AC 400V AC

Load duty category AC 21A AC 22B AC 22A AC 23A

Short circuit characteristic Rated short time withstand current 1s Icw (rms) Prospective short circuit current (rms) Associated fuse links (gG)

IEC 60947-3 480A / 1sec

945A / 1 sec

1500A / 1sec

3kA

3kA

3kA

6kA

6kA

n/a

n/a

n/a

16A

25A

32A

40A

63A

n/a

n/a

n/a

16 mm² 10 mm² 1.8 Nm 20

16 mm² 10 mm² 1.8 Nm 20

16 mm² 10 mm² 1.8 Nm 20

25 mm² 16 mm² 2.8 Nm 20

25 mm² 16 mm² 2.8 Nm 20

50 mm² 35 mm² 3.6 Nm 20

50 mm² 35 mm² 3.6 Nm 20

50 mm² 35 mm² 3.6 Nm 20

100,000

100,000

100,000

30,000

30,000

20,000

20,000

20,000

25,000

25,000

25,000

5,000

5,000

2,500

2,500

2,500

17.5 17.5 35 35 83 72

17.5 17.5 35 35 83 72

17.5 17.5 35 35 83 72

17.5 35 52.5 70 83 72

17.5 35 52.5 70 83 72

17.5 35 52.5 70 83 72

17.5 35 52.5 70 83 72

17.5 35 52.5 70 83 72

EN 60669

Mechanical characteristic Rigid cable section flexible cable section Tightening torque IP protection degree Mechanical endurance (number of cycle) Electrical endurance @ AC22 (number of cyles) Overall dimension

Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth (mm)

5.30

1P 2P 3P 4P

General Catalogue • Modular Devices • Technical

Modular Changeover Switches Electrical Characteristics Family Modular size Reference Thermal current Ith (40°C) Operational frequency Rated operation voltage in AC Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp Protection degree Working temperature Storage temperature

SF 1 module SFH125 25A 50 / 60 Hz 230V 440V

SFM125 25A 50 / 60 Hz

SFT125 25A 50 / 60 Hz

2 module SFH225 25A 50 / 60 Hz

SFT225 25A 50 / 60 Hz

SFT240 40A 50 / 60 Hz

4 module SF263 63A 50 / 60 Hz

440V

440V

440V

440V

440V

500V

4 KV

4 KV

3 KV

6 KV

6 KV

6 KV

4 KV

2

2

2

3

2

2

2

-20 to 50°C

-20 to 50°C

-20 to 50°C

-20 to 50°C

-20 to 50°C

-20 to 50°C

-20 to 50°C

-40 to 80°C

-40 to 80°C

-40 to 80°C

-40 to 80°C

-40 to 80°C

-40 to 80°C

-40 to 80°C

Load duty category AC 22A AC 22B

25A 25A

25A 25A

25A 25A

25A 25A

25A 25A

40A 40A

63A 63A

IEC 60947-3

375A / 1sec

600A / 1sec

4.5kA cond.

EN 60669

3kA

3kA

3kA

6kA

6kA

n/a

n/a

35 mm² 10 mm² 1.8 Nm 20

35 mm² 10 mm² 1.8 Nm 20

35mm² 10 mm² 1.8 Nm 20

25 mm² 16 mm² 1.8 Nm 20

25 mm² 16 mm² 1.8 Nm 20

25 mm² 16 mm² 1.8 Nm 20

25 mm² 16 mm² 1.8 Nm 20

200,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

100,000

25,000

25,000

25,000

5,000

5,000

2,500

5,000

17.5 83 68

17.5 83 68

17.5 83 68

35 83 68

35 83 68

35 83 70

71.5 90 68

Operational Currents Ie Rated voltage 400V AC 400V AC Rated short time withstand current 1s Icw (rms) Prospective short circuit current (rms)

Modular Devices

Short circuit characteristic

Mechanical characteristic Rigid cable section flexible cable section Tightening torque IP protection degree Mechanical endurance (number of cycle) Electrical endurance @ AC22 (number of cyles) Overall dimension Width ( mm ) Height (mm) Depth (mm)


5.31

Latching Relays Technical Characteristics

Voltage Start Consumption Contact Rating AC1 Electrical Endurace AC1 - 16A Mechanical Endurance Current in Open Position Max Duration of Voltage Supply to Coil Min Duration of Current Supply to Coil Working Temperature Storage Temperature

EPN510 EPN515 EPN520 230V 24VA -

EPN513 EPN518 EPN524 24V 24VA -

EPN519

EPN525 EPN540

12V 230V 24VA 48VA 16A 250V~¹ 150,000 Operations 500,000 Operations 8 mA 1h 0.1s -5 to +40ºC -40 to +80ºC

EPN528 EPN541

EPN529

24V 47VA -

12V TBC -

Connections Coil: Flexible Rigid Power: Flexible Rigid

0.5 to 4mm2 1 to 6mm2 1 to 6mm2 1.5 to 10mm2 ¹ 400~ for EPN540 and EPN541.

Auxiliary Contacts (EPN051) The range of latching relays have been designed for use with an auxiliary contact. The devices simply clip on the side of the relay. 23

21 A1

1

3

A2

2

4

22

24

2

Technical Characteristics

Voltage Contact Rating Imin / 230V

EPN ¹ 24 to 230V -

EPN051 2A / 250V 15mA

Connection Flexible 6mm2 Rigid 10mm2 ¹ Voltage dependant on associated relay

3

1 4

3

5.32

General Catalogue • Modular Devices • Technical

Contactor selection Heating The choice of the contactor depends on the mechanical endurance (number of operations) and on the electrical heating load i.e. resistive elements, infra-red element, convectors.

Type of Load Loads are categorised into various AC ratings, (AC1, AC2, AC3 etc.) and the higher the AC rating the more inductive the load becomes. All Hager contactor ratings are given at AC1, therefore they must be de-rated if used on other types of AC load.

Choice of Contactors The choice of contactor is dependant upon many parameters i.e. operating voltage, size of contacts, number of operations, ambient temperature, type of load supplied etc.

Heat Dissipation Inserts The ambient temperature around a contactor can affect its life expectancy, therefore, we strongly recommend that heat dissipation inserts (LZ060) are fitted between all contactors and adjacent devices.

Three Phase

U U

R

R

U

R

230V 400V

Max. load in kW

U

16A 25A 40A 63A 16A 25A 40A 63A

Number of operations 100,000 3 4.6 7.3 11.6 8.9 13.8 22 35

150,000 2.5 4 6.3 10 8 12 18.5 30

200,000 1.9 3 4.7 7.5 5.8 8.6 14.385 22.6

Motors Single Phase 230V (AC3 or AC7b) L1

Maximum load in kW

R

500,000 0.85 1.35 2.2 3.5 2.8 4.3 6.3 10.2

1,000,000 0.7 1 1.6 2.5 2 3 5 7.6

Three Phase 400V (AC3 or AC7b)

U

M L2

R

Modular Devices

Single Phase

V

Single Phase with Capacitor 230V 0.88 2.6

L1

U

L2

V

L3

W

Three Phase (AC3 or AC7) 400V

2.6 7.8 10

Requirements of Use Influence of Working Temperature Derating factor between 40°C and 50°C : 0.9 Example: Heating with convector The maximum load of ESC225 is 4.6kW for 50,000 operations and for a temperature 10 mins - Delay on = 30 secs Delay off 10 mins ≤ 60 mins - Delay on = 5 - 60 mins Application: heating, ventilation, etc. Description

Dimensions dia. x depth (mm)

Supply

Cat ref.

Light intensity from 5 to 1200 lux Time delay for lighting Time delay for presence Area covered - 13x7m at 2.5m height

110 x 31

Bus 30V DC

TX510

TX510

1 Channel Presence Detector 360º Associated with tebis dimmers, it is possible to maintain light intensity in a room at a constant level as long as there is presence in the room irrespective of changes in the natural lighting. 3 Operating Modes • Mode 1 - Dimming inactive (only presence info used) • Mode 2 - Dimming active as per light setting on product potentiometer • Mode 3 - Dimming active.Lighting instruction can be changed by long push on communicating PB of presence detector Description


Supply

Cat ref.

Light intensity from 5 to 1200 Lux Time delay for lighting Area covered - 13 x 7m at a height of 2.5m

110 x 31

Bus 30V DC

TX511

TX511

6.10

General Catalogue 2010 / 2011 • tebis TX

tebis TX Input Products - Automation Products Automation products provide commands in form of contacts. Input information such as rain, wind, sunrise, sunset, indoor and outdoor temperature, as well as commands from remote telephone interface are received and forwarded to input modules for controlling the outputs in the tebis system.

Wind detector - helps in protecting blinds and shutters in the event of strong wind by creating a closing command.

Weather station - it includes a sensor block and a modular unit for interpretation. It is a complete system with input sensor, processing and weather data transmission. It also integrates a weekly programmer equipped with DCF77 antenna.

Wind Detector Helps protect blinds in the event of strong wind. Consists of an anenometer and electronic box. Use with the tebis system - contact of anenometer can be connected to input module TX314 and TX316. (For further details see page 6.29). Description


Supply

Cat ref.

Level of detection adjustable from 5 to 55km/h (Factory preset to 25km/h)

110 x 31

230V AC 50 Hz

TG050

Weather Station The station is supplied with sensors for wind, sun, rain and temperature. 8 relay outputs can be freely programmed. It is possible to obtain output by crossing a set point of a parameter or information from several pieces of data can be combined by switching functions AND/OR (e.g. : rain & wind) Input modules are necessary for connecting weather station to tebis system. (For technical details see page 6.33). Description

Dimensions h x w x d (mm)

Supply

Cat ref.

Operating temperature: -30 to +50ºC Max distance between unit and sensor: 30m Connection cable for sensor: 3 x 0.75mm2 24V

120 x 65 x 110

230V AC 50 Hz

TG051

TG051

Telephone Gateway 3 Inputs, 3 Outputs • Remote control : 3 relay outputs • Status indication : for each output • User friendly voice guide in English • Remote alarm detection and sending of voice messages to 3 programmed telephone numbers • Recording of your own messages • Voice messages for room temperature indication possibility to use together with an answering machine on the same telephone line • Personal secret code to limit access to the device • Timed switch-off of the relay output (from 1 second up to 59h 59min 59sec) Description

Width (mm)

Supply

Analog telephone line (PSTN) 48VDC 87.5 230VM ±15% 3 relay output 5A-250V AC1 50/60 Hz 1 temperature measurement CTN 10 kOhm 2 alarm inputs : 1 input 0-30VAC/DC 5mA min 1 input 0-230V AC 5mA min Power shutdown detection

Cat ref.

TH020B

Environment Working temperature : 0/+50°C Storage temperaure : -20/+70°C IP 30, IK03 TH020B

Connection Flexible 2 x 2.5mm2 max Rigid : 2 x 2.5mm2 max


6.11

tebis TX

TG050

tebis TX Output Products - Lighting and Heating These products serve as output interfaces for the tebis system. They ensure the control of the electrical devices by taking commands transmitted by the input products.

Lighting output products allow control of all types of devices by On/Off control or dimming. Without modifying the wiring, it is possible to achieve: • On, Off or dimming controls in individual and grouped or general controls • Functions such as time delays, priority settings, scene selection or multi-applications.

All the output modules are equipped with output status display and with a manual override setting on front of the product. For control of: • Lighting • Heating • Power outlets • Any load controlled by a simple contact Note: Refer to technical information for de-rating for alternative load types. For technical details see page 6.35.

Lighting and Heating Functions: • ON / OFF & ON / OFF Override • LED indication of each output state • High end timer function • Full quick connect connections • Full symmetrical top down cross through connections • Large front labelling • Local on device hand override, permanent or time limited Description No of Volt- Free Contacts

Supply (twisted pair)

Width (mm)

Cat ref.

16A AC1 4A AC1 10A AC1 16A AC1 16A AC1 / 1500W - 140µF adapted for parallel compensated fluorescent tubes 16A AC1

4 6 6 6 6

Bus 30V DC Bus 30V DC Bus 30V DC Bus 30V DC Bus 30V DC

70 70 70 70 70

TXA204C TXA206A TXA206B TXA206C TXA206D

10

Bus 30V DC

105

TXA207C

TXA204C

TXA206D

TXA207C

6.12


tebis TX Output Products - Lighting Dimmers TXA210, TXA210A, TXA213, TXA215 Universal dimmer with automatic load recognition Min/Max level local setting Manual mode that allows dimming even when the bus is disconnected Power rating specified at 45°C Easy mode: (TX100B) Implementation of the channel dimming actuator scene.

S-mode: (ETS software) Easy channels features 32 light scenes with a related scene speed. Fixing of output state when bus is disconnected. Enhanced override modes (forced). TXA210 Universal dimmer 1 channel 600W TXA210A Universal dimmer 1 channel 300W TXA213 Universal dimmer 3 channels 300W

3 modes possible : • 3 channels 3 x 300W • 2 channels 600W / 300W • 1 channel 900W TXA215 Universal dimmer 1 channel 1000W Dimmer with LCD display Local setting of the dimming parameters (min/max, soft ON, soft OFF, dimming speed) and light scenes. 8 light scenes that can be activated locally. For technical details see page 6.36 - 6.37.

1 Channel Universal Dimmer 600W Description

Width (mm)

Cat ref.

600W 45°C Incandescent / Halogen 600VA VLV Halogen associated with electronic or ferromagnetic transformer

70

TXA210

Description

Width (mm)

Cat ref.

300W 45°C Incandescent / Halogen 300VA VLV Halogen associated with electronic or ferromagneHic transformer

70

TXA210A

3 Channel Universal Dimmer 300W 3 channel dimmer that can be used as 3 x 300W, 600W/300W or 900W, selector on device Description

Width (mm)

Cat ref.

300W 45°C 300VA VLV Incandescent / Halogen associated with electronic or ferromagnetic transformer

105

TXA213

TXA213

1 Channel Universal Dimmer 1000W LCD display used to indicate the dimming level and to set the dimming parameters min, max, diming speed, soft on, soft off, scenes

TXA215

Description

Width (mm)

Cat ref.

1000W 45°C Incandescent / Halogen 1000VA VLV Halogen associated with electronic or ferromagnetic transformer

105

TXA215

Output Modules for Variable Lighting (Dimmer Control) For incandescent and halogen lamps 230V. Halogen lamps ELV supplied with variable or ferromagnetic electronic transformer. Functions include ON/OFF and variation in lighting/dimmer control. Description

Width (mm)

Cat ref.

3 Outputs 1/10V

70

TX211

TX211


6.13

tebis TX

1 Channel Universal Dimmer 300W

tebis TX Output Products - Shutters and Blinds These products serve as output interfaces for the tebis system. They ensure opening and closing control of shutters, roller shutters, curtains, blinds, flaps etc. They interpret commands such as Up, Down, priority setting for Up or Down and Wind detection commands transmitted by input modules. All the output modules are

equipped with output status display and with a manual override setting on the front.

Note: • Shutter output modules will open and close KNX/EIB compatible acutators • Blind output modules will open, close and incline the slats of KNX/EIB compatible actuators For technical details see page 6.39.

Output Device for Shutters or Blinds For control of roller-shutter curtains or venetian-blinds motors, KNX/EIB Functions: • UP/DOWN • Blind inclination and STOP • UP/DOWN/STOP manual override • LED indication of each output state • Wind security functions • Blocking • Priority • Scenes • After bus failure position Description

Width (mm)

Cat ref.

4 Shutter Outputs 230V 4 Shutters or Blind Outputs 230V 4 Shutter Outputs 24V DC 4 Shutter or Blind Outputs 24V DC

70 70 70 70

TXA223 TXA224 TXA225 TXA226

TXA223

TXA224

6.14


tebis TX KNX Temperature Control Actuator Thermostat TX320 Continuous room temperature regulator, featuring real-time temperature measurement, capable of sending an adjustment value to a servo or actuator, so to achieve the desired room temperature. It can control both heating device and air-conditioners.

Heating ouput, 6 channels This device is designed for installation into a hot water circulation system, to control a 24V valve servo, e.g.: floor heating facilities. Output switching utilises a Triac so that noiseless switching can be achieved.

Valve Control Servo This servo has a bus connection, which can be directly installed onto the universal valve of the radiating heaters. The corresponding valve servo and motorized device is controlled via the room temperature controller. For technical details see page 6.38.

Thermostat Features: • Power supply: 30V DC • Measuring range: 0ºC to 40ºC • 3 external contact points used for measuring input terminals, such as window magnetic contact points Function: • Heating / Cooling • 2 step heating - Primary and Supplementary • Work mode: Comfort, Standby, Night time, Frost / Overheat protection • Switch, Light dimming, Blinds control Description


TX320 EK087 tebis TX

Thermostat 27 x 84 x 80 Floor temperature sensor for TX320

Cat ref.

TX320

Heating Valve Controller (6 Channels) Features: • Power supply: 230V power socket • System voltage of 30V DC • Property: 6 channels for 24V heating valve drive (max 13 pcs/channel) • 6 channels output • Size l x w x h (302 x 755 x 70) Function: • Adjusting value in % • Override service • Summer operation Description


Cat ref.

Heating valve controller (6 channels)

70 x 755 x 302

TX206H

TX206H


6.15

tebis TX KNX Temperature Control Actuator Valve Control Servo with Room Temperature Regulator Features: • Power supply: 230V power socket • Property: 5 LED used to display servo locations • Interface: 1m, 6-core cable is included Function: • Automatic regulating apparatus and temperature collection apparatus • Work mode: Comfort, Standby, Night time, Frost • Orientated start up • Forced service • Summer operation Description


Cat ref.

Valve control servo with room temperature regulator

70 x 755 x 302

TX502

TX502

6.16


tebis TX Radio Frequency Products 2 or 4 Inputs (Flush Mounted) RF input modules of EIB/KNX are used as interfaces for volt free contact and switches or conventional pushbuttons. Using these modules it is possible to control the electrical devices connected in the network by transmitting an RF signal. They can control RF output modules as well as TP wired products with the help of the media coupler TR131B. These products are particularly useful for renovating or extending existing installations.

2 or 4 inputs - 230V or Battery Operated These input modules are available in following versions • 2 or 4 input module version - flush mounted • With power supply of 230V AC or with battery.

General Characteristics of the Radio System Frequency - 868.3 MHz Range - variable according to the environment - up to 30m indoor, 100m in free air. Noise measurement is possible by TX100B.

Operating temperature : 0°C to 45°C

RF System • Maximum number of RF products = 256 • Maximum number of RF input translations by the media coupler to twisted pair output products = 63

Installation Link allocation is to be done by configuration device TX100B. These products can also communicate with TP wired products with the help of media coupler TR131B.

For technical details see page 6.40.

RF Input Modules (Battery Operated) Frequency: 868.3 MHz Power supply: Lithium battery CR1/2 AA 3.0V (Life 5 Years) Transmission indicated by LED, for one way transmission

TR304A

Description


Cat ref.

2 KNX Input Modules For 2 Volt Free Contacts 4 KNX Input Modules For 4 Volt Free Contacts

50 x 16mm 50 x 16mm

TR302A TR304A

Description


Cat ref.

2 KNX Input Modules For 2 Volt Free Contacts 4 KNX Input Modules For 4 Volt Free Contacts

52 x 30mm 52 x 30mm

TR302B TR304B

RF Input Modules (230V) Frequency: 868.3 MHz Power supply: 230V AC 50Hz Transmission indicated by LED, for one way transmission Functions: • ON/OFF, dimming • Up/Down + alarm - priority setting • Scenarios

TR304B


6.17

tebis TX

Functions: • ON/OFF, dimming • Up/Down + alarm - priority setting • Scenarios

tebis TX Push-Buttons and Remote Controls Radio push-buttons and remote controls enable easy addition of control points without wiring work. They are suitable for all situations : new systems, renovations or post installation. These products are included in tebis system. They control both radio output modules as well as twisted pair products via TR131B.

Radio Push-Buttons These are unidirectional radio emitters in the KNX standard. They exist in 2, 4 or 6 ways in surface mounting boxes of white or silver colour. Solar Radio Push-Button Does not require replacement batteries. Radio Remote Control These are portable radio emitters of EIB/KNX standard. The remote controls are available in 4, 8 and 24 ways.

Putting Into Service Allocation of the links is carried out by TX100B configurator. These products also communicate with twisted pair products via the TR131B bus radio / twisted pair General characteristics of the radio system • Frequency : 868.3 MHz • Range : it is variable according to the environment : up to 30m inside, up to 100m in free air.

Working temperature : 0°C to +45°C A measurement of the signal interference is possible by TX100B RF system • Maximum number of RF products = 256 • Maximum number of RF input translations by the media coupler to twisted pair output products = 63 For technical details see page 6.41.

Push-Buttons with and without Label Holders Radio KNX Power supply: C2430 3.0V Battery Cells (Life 3 Years) Unidirectional products: Emitter Transmission indicated by LED

TD210

Functions: • Start/Stop, Dimming • Up/Down + Alarm • Override • Scenarios Description Colour Dimensions (mm)

Cat ref. without labels

Cat ref. with labels

2 Way Push-Button Keys 2 Way Push-Button Keys 4 Way Push-Button Keys 4 Way Push-Button Keys 6 Way Push-Button Keys 6 Way Push-Button Keys

TD100 TD101 TD200 TD201 TD300 TD301

TD110 TD111 TD210 TD211 TD310 TD311

White Silver White Silver White Silver

80.5 x 80.5 x 12 80.5 x 80.5 x 12 80.5 x 80.5 x 12 80.5 x 80.5 x 12 80.5 x 80.5 x 12 80.5 x 80.5 x 12

KNX Solar Push-Button Description Colour Dimensions (mm)

Cat ref. without labels

4 Way Push-Button Keys 4 Way Push-Button Keys

TD250 TD251

White Silver

80.5 x 80.5 x 12 80.5 x 80.5 x 12

TD251

KNX Radio Remote Controls Power supply: CR 2430 3V Lithium Battery Cell (life 3 years) Unidirectional products: Emitter Transmission indicated by LED

TU404

6.18

Functions: • Start/Stop, Dimming • Up/Down + Alarm • Override • Scenarios Description

No of Keys

Cat ref.

2 Channel Remote Control 4 Channel Remote Control 6 Way Remote Control 18 Way Remote Control

2 4 6 6 + 1

TU402 TU404 TU406 TU418


tebis TX Input / Output Products for Combination Systems The RF EIB/KNX input/output modules are used as an interface between volt free contacts of switches or conventional pushbuttons at input level and electrical devices at output level for direct control. These products are able to communicate with other RF or TP wired products (via media coupler TR131B). They are particularly useful for renovating or extending existing installations. 1 Input + 1 Output 10A For creating simple lighting functions for integrating in a group, general controls or other scenario functions by simple programming.

2 Inputs + 1 Output Shutter/ Blind For creating shutter control function for integrating in a group, general control or other scenario functions by simple programming. Installation Link allocation is carried out by configuration device TX100B. These products also communicate with TP wired products with the help of media coupler TR131B.

General Characteristics of RF System Frequency - 868.3 MHz Range - variable according to the environment - up to 30m indoor, 100m in free air. Noise measurement is possible with the TX100B. RF System • Maximum number of RF products = 256 • Maximum number of RF input translations by the media coupler to twisted pair output products = 63

1 Input + 1 Output 10A Product supplied with input/output module pre-configured for control of the connected output. Power supply: 250V AC 50Hz

TR501

Functions of Output: • ON/OFF Control • Time Delay • 8 Scenes • Priority Setting

tebis TX

Functions of Input: • ON/OFF, Dimming • Priority Setting • Scenarios

Description


Cat ref.

Bidirectional Product for Transmitting and Receiving 1 Volt Free Input for Push-Button Switch 1 Output 10A AC1 230V AC For manual control by TX100B Output status display by LED

56 x 30

TR501

2 Inputs + 1 Output Shutter/Blind Product supplied with input/output module pre-configured for control of the connected output. Power supply: 250V AC 50Hz Functions of Input: • Up/Down by brief push > 400ms Output for Shutter Motor: • Scenarios

TR521

Functions of Output: • Up/Down Control • Inclination of Flaps • Alarm Security for Wind, Rain • Time Delay • 8 Scenes • Priority Setting

Description


Cat ref.

Bidirectional Product for Transmitting and Receiving 2 Inputs Volt Free Contacts 1 Output 6A AC1 230V AC Output status display by LED

52 x 27

TR521


6.19

tebis TX Output Products for Lighting or Shutter Control (Flush Mounted) RF KNX output modules take commands transmitted by input modules. They interface between commands and electrical equipment. These bidirectional products are able to communicate with all other RF or TP wired products (via media coupler TR131B). They are particularly useful for renovation or for equipment already installed.

1 RF Output 16A This flush mounted module helps control circuits of lighting, VMC, heating, solenoid valves, etc. Expansion All RF output products can be integrated by simple programming, in zone group control, general or centralised controls and in scenarios functions.

Installation Link allocation is carried out by configuration device TX100B. These products can also communicate with TP wired products via media coupler bus/ radio TR131B. General characteristics of the radio system Frequency - 868.3 MHz Range - variable according to the environment - up to 30m indoor, 100m in free air. Noise measurement is possible with the TX100B. RF System • Maximum number of RF KNX products - 256 For technical details see page 6.42 - 6.43.

1 Output 16A For control of lighting, heating of the VMC etc. Power Supply: 230V AC 50Hz Functions of Output: • ON/OFF control • Time Delay • 8 Scenes • Priority Setting

TR201

Description


Cat ref.

Two Way Product for Transmitting and Receiving 1 Output 16A AC1 23V AC Manual Control by TX100B Output status display by LED

52 x 30

TR201

Description


Cat ref.

Max. load with incandescent lamps 200W - 45ºC Max. load with 230V halogen lamps 200W - 45ºC Max. load with halogen ELV lamps via ferromagnetic transformer 200VA - 45ºC Max. load with halogen ELV lamps via electronic transformer 200VA - 45ºC Bidirectional product

52 x 30

TR210

1 Flush Mounted Dimming Output 200W For remote control of dimmable lighting. Power Supply: 230V Frequency: 868.3MHz Functions of Output: • ON/OFF control • Dimming 0-100% • LED Indication of each • 8 Scenes

TR210

6.20


Output Device for Shutter/Blinds For the control of shutters, blinds or blinds with bidirectional flaps. Power Supply: 230V AC 50Hz Functions of Output: • Up/Down control • Inclination of flaps • Alarm security wind, rain • Time delay • 8 Scenes • Priority setting Description


Cat ref.

Two way product for transmitting and receiving Output for 1 motor Push-button switch 6A AC1 230V AC Manual control by TX100B Output status display by LED

52 x 27

TR221

tebis TX

TR221


6.21

Configuration of System Configuration of a system containing only wired TX products Related products : all TX input/output products and for configuration : TX100B configurator, USB Flash Drive, media coupler.

TX

o

aut

210

ive

uct

ind

d

loa

°

d

600

acitive

loa

Media Coupler

cap

1. Put the TX100B into operation The method is the same for RF systems.

Choose the system type. As there are only wire products, reply YES

TX100B with USB Connectivity

Select the Num mode

Installation M. Smith London Modified :

10/10/10

Nb Prod :

22

Num 17 To allocate a function press ? on the key 59 No / Auto All Prog

3. Numbering of the inputs in the Num mode For numbering the inputs it is necessary to activate them by pressing on the push-buttons or the switches which are connected to them. The configuration allocates them a number automatically

System type

Do not press on next input until input number is assigned to current input.

Installation with wire products ?

Allocate a function to the input YES

NO

4. Selection of a function in Num mode After the numbering of inputs one can select a function. For this purpose, press on the key Select the function with the left keys Validate by press on  ✔

It is necessary to select a wire installation by pressing on the media coupler button until the red light is switched on (4s). When the pairing is carried out a signal sounds. Wait for the screen display Auto to continue

Num

1

To choose 17 a function press on ? and validate 59 by Auto All Prog

Go to Prog mode Smart Media

Select Program 2. Configuration and numbering of the outputs in Prog mode A long press on the key starts configuration of the outputs and their automatic numbering. At the end of configuration the screen displays first found output A and the number of outputs detected B

5. Creation of a link between an input and an output in the Prog mode

Prog Start the configuration by a long press on the key Search.... Auto All

Prog A

95 Auto All

Num

1

Select an input with the left arrow key or by activating the push-button or the switch, which is connected to it.

Num

1

Prog

B

95

59 Auto All

17

25 95

59 Auto

Validate the link by a long press on  ✔

All

17

Auto All

Means to be used for configuration : TX100B configuration, USB flash drive and media coupler products : TX wired or RF radio, input or output products

6.22

General Catalogue 2010 / 2011 • Technical • tebis TX

Num

Prog 1

A

59

Configuration of a combined system containing both TX wire products and RF radio.

Num

Prog

Select an output by its number with the right keys or locate the output by a press on which will activate the output displayed.

A symbol confirms the creation of the link

1

1

A

25 95 Num

TX100B Configurator TX100B configurator

Information relating to inputs

The TX100B portable configurator is the tool which programs the desired functions and displays the links between all the products being found in an installation : wire products and/or unidirectional or bi-directional radio system. If the system contains wire products, it is necessary to use the media coupler TR131B. A USB flash drive inserted in TX100B backs-up all the data relating to a system.

Number of inputs piloting the selected output (ex. the output 25 is piloted by 2 inputs whose 17)

Description of the keys Total number of defects of the installation

Information relating to ouputs

Title bar Number of outputs linked to the input displayed (ex: 5 outputs for the input 17) Output No.

Input number Type of output

Type of input TP, RF

Start / Stop

Type of output TP, RF

Function of the input Defect on the displayed input

Key “Access to the menu” (same function as )

Input • Selects an input number • Select a function allocated to the selected input • Move in the menus

Output • Selects an output number • Move in the menus 1

1

Alphanumerical Keys

Description of the keys: Screenkeys Function of each key is indicated on the screen above them, the function changes depending on the screen

• Validates the operation in progress • Selects the menu • Validates the entry

• Change the function of the keys on the left (selection of either an input number or a function) return to the previous menu • Activates the selected output • Starts the numbering of the outputs of the installation

• Access to the help screens for installation

• Access to menus

Defect on displayed output Number of outputs of the system

Number of inputs on the system

Description of the symbols: Battery charge level

tebis TX

Back-light screen

Output

Input

Radio product

Wire product

Preparation of a link

1 1

Link established Delete a link

Sound • A single “beep” indicates a successful operation i • A double “beep” indicates an unseccessful operation Expert Tip There are 2 ways to select a channel : • Selection of an input by acting on the appliance that control it : push-button, switch or remote control. Selection of an output by acting on the manual control of the output product. • Selection of the inputs or outputs with TX100B by their numbers with the help of keys


6.23

tebis 868 MHz Radio

In an installation containing only radio system, the configuration is done only with TX100B configuration tool; the media coupler is not used. The products with combined input/output are pre-programmed; for example for a 2 input products and 1 output or control of roller shutters, the basic functions as for example up/down are preregistered. Only modification of functions, as for example to carry a centralized control, need the use of TX100B.

6T0457c

Hz

3M

868,

2

068

power (mW) s

Supply of radio system is done, in the following way : • By 230V mains • By a battery cell

is

teb 302A4

TR 99 5989 ance V 3,0 e in Fr E2 Mad E1

ch an ne l

These latter ones can also be configured as radio repeaters by TX100B to increase globally the reliability of the transmission.

Topology 2 : tebis radio system

25 kHz

100 kHz

25 kHz

100 kHz 25 kHz 25 kHz

25 kHz 25/50 kHz

ap u pl ica tim se tio e ns

Radio system The TR radio system (to KNX standard) exists in input products, output products and products with combined input/output. They communicate between themselves by using the 868 MHz radio frequency. The products are classified into 2 categories : • The unidirectional input products : they are only emitters and have only information sent. • The bidirectional products : they are both emitters and receivers and can thus send and receive information.

< 1%

< 0,1%

< 0,1%

< 0,1% non défini < 10%

< 10% 10-100 %

medical EACM

alarme

SRD

alarms

SRD

SRD

SRD

500

100

10 868,0

Radio range (indicative data) : • in open field : 100m • Inside a building : up to 30m

868,6

868,7

869,2

869,3

869,4

869,65

870 869,7 frequency(MHz)

A pure radio system can contain up to 250 TR products. The MHz 868 : a dedicated frequency The frequency used is 868 MHz. This frequency is harmonized at the European level. There are 2 levels emission power : • Repeater products : 25mW maximum • Battery cell products : 10mW maximum As comparison, a portable telephone emits with a power of around 2000 mW. It is to be noted that the regulator authorities have specially attributed the band of 868 MHz to building automation and home automation : the occupation or “duty cycle” rate is predefined and thus avoids the saturation problems of the band. The 868 MHz is outside ISM bands and cannot be thus saturated by permanent emissions (headphones for example).

Combined system : Wire + Radio The combined system needs to put in place a TR130B media coupler to transmit the messages of wire products to the radio system and vice versa. For systems which contain both wire and radio products, the information given above for topics 1 and 2 remain valid. But you must take into account the following limitations : • Maximum of 63 products of 250 possible radio systems can communicate with TP wire products. • Maximum 50 links can be established from the wire part to the radio part. • 1024 channels are available and distributed in 512 channels of inputs and 512 channels of outputs.

6.24

TX

supp.

TX

TX

TX TX TX TX

TR 131B media coupler

Max. 50 radio products

TX TX

Max. 63 links tebis 302A TR 9 4 59899 V 3,0 in France E2 Made E1

868,3

MHz

0682


6T0457c

Example : 6 output products = 6 channels 4 input products = 4 channels 2 input radio products = 2 channels

Topology 3 : Mixed tebis system containing both twisted pair and radio products

Topology of the System Topology and architecture of a system Each installation consists of input and output products which can be wire or radio. For wire products, a TXA111 bus supply must be installed. Media and communication support : • Wire products : use of the bus cable (2 x 2 x 0,8mm) • Radio system : the link is done by 868 MHz reserved radio frequency

Several system architectures can be found :

Topology 1 : Wire installation Each tebis product can exchange Information with all other tebis products connected to the bus cable. Supply of bus is done in continuous 30V DC SELV.

tebis Wire System Extension of a tebis system using wire products

1. fully wire systems 2. fully radio systems 3. combined wire and radio systems The topologies corresponding to these 3 types of systems are described below :

700 m

The right side outline gives the maximum lengths of the bus cable with a TXA111 supply. supp. TX TX

The above data define an EIB line. Each EIB line needs a supply and can have up to 64 communicating products.

TX

Role of the TA008 line coupler The line coupler “expand” and put back into form the signals on the bus cable and allow to extend the system. Thanks to the coupler the primary line can be extended up to 3 times. Maximum limit of an “extended” line: The diagram on the right shows the maximum limits of the system with 4 supplies and 3 line couplers. The lengths of different elementary lines remain the same but at the end, the following • Total maximum length : 4 x 1000 m • Maximum distance between 2 products on the same line : 700 m • Maximum distance between supply of an elementary line and any product of the same elementary line : 350 m You can thus install at the maximum 4 x 64 = 256 TX products

TX

TX TX

maximum accumulated length of bus cable : 1000m

TX

In tebis systems it is necessary to comply withg the following rules for each line of the 64 products: • Max 350M between supply and products • Max 700M between 2 TX products • Max 1000M accumulated length of all bus cable segments on the line TX

alim.

primary line

Supply product 1

TX

product 64

TX

Role of the TR131B In the configuration phase of the installation, the TR131B is the interface between the TX products, connected among themselves by the bus cable and TX100B radio configuration tool.


product 65 line coupler Supply TA 008

After putting into service, the TR131B can be withdrawn and reused to configure other systems.

product 66

Nevertheless in case of modification of the system or for maintenance needs it will be necessary to reinstall again the media coupler, that is why, we recommend leaving TR131B in the system.

TX

extension no 1

product 127 TX TA

008

product 128 line Supply coupler TA 008 product 129 TX

extension no 2

product 191 TX product 192 line coupler Supply TA 008 product 193 TX

extension no 3

product 256 TX

You can extend a line and install more than 64 products by using line couplers and additional supplies (maximum 3). Note: Power supplies do not count as product, but line couplers do.


6.25

tebis TX

The following values must not be exceeded : • Total maximum length : 1000m • Maximum distance between twisted pair 2 products : 700m • Maximum distance between supply and a product : 350m

350 m

The System Description of the system tebis is a flexible and functional electrical installation for lighting control, roller shutters and adjustment of the temperature room by room. From the implementation point of view, the main difference in relation to a conventional system is the separation of the control and power. The controlled loads, for example lighting, roller shutters, controlled sockets, are to the output products, themselves connected to connected upstream protection devices. It is no longer necessary to connect from various 230V switch wires from switches, push buttons, to the controlled loads.

The input products implement the orders of the user (pushbuttons, detectors,....) they are interconnected by a unique bus cable distributed star-shaped or in a continuous loop, or by radio frequencies. tebis therefore carries out, the functions required by simple programming and creation of links between input and output products. The cabling phase of a tebis system is independent from the programming phase of the functions. The designing of a system is simplified by allowing a flexible adaptation to customer demands.

Composition of the system Each installation consists of input products and output products which are interconnected either: • By bus cable : called also wire link (or cable pair) or twisted pair • By radio : called also RF link (or radio frequency), in 868 MHz

Radio system principles The radio products are powered by the mains or a battery . The configuration is carried out directly with TX100B and the radio products (without media coupler). 230 V

Several system types may be implemented: • Completely “bus” wire systems with TX products • Completely radio systems with TR-TU-TD products • Combined systems, combined twisted pair and radio products Configuration and commissioning For configuration, the TX100B radio configuration tool and TR131B media coupler are used. The configuration information of the system is safeguarded in a standard USB flash drive, placed in TX100B.

2 inputs

2 inputs

1 output shutter

+

-

The configuration can be done very easily with the TX100B portable radio tool : room by room, product by product or function by function. System products are used in the following manner for the system type implemented: Wire system principles The bus products are supplied by safety very low voltage bus. The configuration needs TX100B configurator and TR131B media coupler. After configuration the media coupler can be removed and used for another project but needs to be reinstalled if later modifications are required.

Combined system (bus+radio) principles The configuration is carried out with TX100B and TR130B media coupler. In this case, it is necessary to leave the media coupler in place to ensure communication between wire and radio. TX

supp.

TX

TX

TX TX TX

media coupler TR 131B

10 A or 16 A

TX


Max. 50 radio products

TX TX

Max. 63 links is

4 inputs

bus 30 V

4 outputs

230 V bus

T 100

6.26


868,3

MHz

2

068

6T0457c

teb 302A TR 99 4 e 5989 V 3,0 in FrancE2 Made E1

Symbol and Function Symbols

Lighting

... ...

25 % 25 %

25 % 25 % 25 % 25 %

25 25%%

Control Product

Switching on only

Automatic contact or push button, or TX512, TX023, TX025

Switching off only


Switch type ON/OFF


Remote break type ON/OFF

Push button

Remote break type ON/OFF for unidirectional products

RF Push button

Increase the dimming level

Push button

Decrease the dimming level

Push button

Dimming on push button

Push button or detector, TX511, TX023

Priority setting STOP

Automatic switch or contact, or TX510, TX023, TX025

Priority setting START


Timed start - delay before ON


Timed stop - delay before OFF


Lighting level 25%, 50%, 75% or 100%

TX510, TX023, Tx025

Push button type UP

Push button

Push button type DOWN

Push button

Push button type UP-DOWN

Push button

Switch type UP-DOWN function


Swtich type UP function


Switch type DOWN function


Override UP


Override DOWN


Wind safety

TG050 air safety detector or TG051 weather station contact

Bad weather safety

TG051 weather station contact

Comfort

Temp. regulator, TX510 automatic push button or contact

Eco

Temp. regulator, TX510 automatic push button or contact

Comfort / Eco

Temp. regulator, TX510, TX023 automatic contact

Frost free or without frost

Temp. regulator or automatic contact TX510, TX023

Stop override

Automatic switch or contact or TX023

Comfort override

Automatic switch or contact or TX023, TX510

Eco override

Automatic switch or contact or TX023, TX510

Timed comfort

Push button or detector TX510-TX511

Timed eco

Push button

100 %

100 % 100 %

...

...

25 25 % %

25 %

100 %

100 % % ... 100 100 % ... ... 100 % % ... 100 ... 100%% ... 100 %100 25 % 100 % ... 25 % 100 % ... 25 100 ... 25 % % 100 % % 25 25 %% % % ...... 100 ... 25%% ... 100 25 100 100 % % 25 %25 % 100 % ... ... 100 % 100 % ... 100 25 25... %% %% ... ... 25 % 100 % ...% 100100 25 % 100 % ... % 100 % ... 25 % 25 100 % ... 25 % 100 % ... 25%% 100%% 25 ... 100100 25 % % ...... 25 % % ...25 25 % 25 ... % ... 25 %

25 %

25 % 25 %

...

100 % 100 %

Control Type

...

100 100 % %

100 %

Blinds/ Roller Shutters

STOP

STOP

STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP

tebis TX

Applications

STOP

Heating

STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP

STOP

1

00

1

00

1

00

1

TX023 Clocks TX025 Photo electric switch TX450A TX450B Ambient controllers All Applications

00

1 00 00 1 100 11 00 00 00 11 00 00 11 100 00 00 1100 00 00 Master clock 11 00 1 00 00 1 00 00 111 00 1 00 1 00 100 00 11 00 00 11 00 00 1 00 00 11 00 Slave clock 1 00 11 11100 00 00 00 11100 00 00 1111 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 1111 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 100 1100 00 00 1 00 00 Master photocell switch 11100 00 1 00 11 1100 00 100 00 00 111 11 0000 00 00 1 00 111100 00 00 0000 100 1 00 00 11 100 1 00 00 1 00 ? 1 00 00 1 1100 00 Slave photocell switch 11 00 00

1

?

? ???????? ?

?? ?? ? ?? ????? ?? ? ??? ?

?

00 11 00

00

Display zone on the room controller (1 to 4) Logical function

Diffusion TX023 of the hour on the bus for synchronizing the slave clocks TX023 synchronization on the hour emitted by the master clock TX025 light sensitive switch (master) spreads on the bus the light intensity measured by the cell TX025 light sensitive switch reads the light intensity measured by the cell and broadcasted by the master light sensitive switch Each zone (1 to 4) can display information (temperature hours, date) as well as states or measurements (lighting, heating, physical measurements or functions) Creation of logical functions for displaying information on the system

No function Scenario 1 to 8

Push button


6.27

System Products Technical Characteristics

Supply Batteries Battery cells Working autonomy Consumption Loss of Max. power Functioning autonomy Max recharge time Broadcast frequency Broadcast power Safeguard Working temperature Storage termperature Ingress protection Weight Size Antenna

TX100B 4 batteries or LR6 battery cells Ni-Mh 1.2V 1950mAh 1.5V alkaline AA 230V / 9V 1A charger type 0.5A (per appliance) 2W (per appliance) 8 hours 3h 30 mins 868.3 Mhz Max. 10mW USB flash drive 0ºC to +45ºC -20ºC to +70ºC IP 20 340 g 75 x 169 x 34.9mm 52mm

TR131B 230 VM~ 50Hz ± 15% bus: 30V/DC 868.3 Mhz Max. 25mW 0ºC to +45ºC -20ºC to +70ºC IP30

TX140B 4 outputs (230 V phases) 868.3 Mhz Max. 25mW 0ºC to +45ºC -20ºC to +70ºC IP40

203 x 77 x 26.5mm 52mm

203 x 77 x26.5 mm 52mm

Electrical connection TR131B

TR140B

BUS EIB

Ph N

Ph N

Introduction of TR131B Media coupler ➀ Cover

3 2

5

4

➁ 230V supply lighting ➂ Pairing button : pairing with TX100B (to be activated when synchronising with TX100B : Select the coupler by pressing on its pairing button for a period of 4 up to 10 seconds) ➃ Physical addressing light

1

6.28

➄ EIB / KNX communication light bus/radio


TXA112, TXA111 Supply Modules

Electrical Connection TXA112, TXA111

Functioning principle This module is the supply source of the bus. The output voltage is of the ELV 29V type. TXA112 230 V 50/60Hz 26 V 640 mA 24 VA Rapid connection 1.5mm2 2.5mm2 4 Modules -5ºC to +45ºC -20ºC to +70ºC

TXA111 230V 50/60Hz 29 V 320mA 15 VA Screw terminal 0.75 to 2.5mm2 0.75 to 4mm2 4 Modules

TG050 Wind Safety Detector Composition of the products: • An anemometer and its fixing support, • Weatherproof interface box, • The fixing screws of the box (piercing ∆ 6 mm). Electrical characteristics: • Supply voltage : 230V 50 Hz, • Contact type (wind safety) : 230V 4A (protection by slowed 4A fuse) Functional characteristics: • Wind speed threshold adjusting : up to 55km/h per potentiometer factory setted 25km/h) • Reaction time at the threshold excess : 3 seconds (5 seconds max.) • Wind blocking time : 10 minutes (fixed)

TXA11*

Working Principle To exploit the wind safety function with the tebis TX system, it will be necessary to link the contact of the anemometer to an input of the TX316 module and programme the wind safety link with the configurator. The TG050 wind safety detector is used as protection device for blinds against gusty winds. If the speed of the wind measured by the anemometer exceeds for 3 consecutive seconds a threshold adjusted by potentiometer, the total assembly of the blinds is launched instantaneously and the blinds are maintained in high position for 10 minutes at the minimum. (other controls become inactive) If the speed of the wind has weakened sufficiently after 10 minutes, the wind safety is deactivated; the control of the blinds is authorized again. Electrical connection

Environment: • Class II insulation • IP65 protection index • Working temperature : -25°C to + 50°C. Connection: Capacity : 0.5 to 2.5mm2

1

2

3

4

Overall size: • Size of weatherproof box (overall) : 80 x 100 x 52mm • Centre distance from fixing : 90mm Towards input 230V of TX316


5

6

7

8

N

L

230 V

6.29

tebis TX

Power voltage Output voltage Absorbed power Connection: Flexible Rigid Size Working temperature Storage temperature

Input Modules Technical Specification

Outputs

TXB302 35 x 38 x 12mm 30V by TX111 2 for potential free contacts -

Voltage Delivered Contact Current Spacing Current Distance between contacts and the products Link to EIB bus Links to Inputs

5V DC impulse supplied by the product 0.5mA Slide in separable connector with 200mm length being able to be lengthened up to 5m. Red and black terminal TG008 Separable connector of 200mm length

Size Supply Inputs

TXB304

TX308

4 for potential free contacts 4 outputs 5V DC Imax 850µA

TX314 3 Modules

TX316 4 Modules

4 inputs 23V

6 inputs 230V

230V AC (-15/+10%) 19mA 7.3mA 3.9mA 30m Max 100m Max

Through terminals: • Flexible: 1 to 6mm2 • Rigid: 1.5 to 10mm2

Temperature Working Storage

-25ºC to +55ºC -5ºC to +45ºC

4 Input Module Flush Mounted : TX304 TX 304

-

E1

E2

E3

4 Input Module / 4 LED Outputs Flush Mounted : TX308 TX 308

E4

+

-

PB test addressing

+

PB test addressing

Green

Standard pushbutton or switch

- + Bus 30 V TBTS

LED

Blue

Bus 30 V TBTS

Physical addressing light

Standard pushbutton or switch

Red

- +

Yellow


230V 4 Input Modules : TX314

230V 6 Input Module : TX316 1 2 3

L1 L2 L3 N PE

Controlled phase Auto/Manual switch

1 3 5 7 TX 314 auto

Physical addressing light Physical addressing button

Bus 30 V

6.30

1

2

4

5

Display light of input state Override button

Auto/Manual switch

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 T 316 auto


6 8

1

2

3

4

5

6

6 8 10 12 14 16

Physical addressing button Bus 30 V


Display light of input state Override button

Electrial Connection

Technical Specification Colour Supply Consumption Assembly Accessories included Configuration Working Temperature Size

TX450A TX450B White Silver 30V DC bus EIB TX111 150mW Surface mounting BCU With TX100B or with ETS software and the application: TL450A 0ºC to +45ºC 80 x 80mm

Function The room controller is a control and display wall appliance for the tebis system. Available in 2 colours (white or silver) It combines several functions in a single product Through its 4 sensory keys, it allows : • The control of lighting, roller shutters, heating etc. • The control of functions developed as scenarios The central screen: • Display of information on the state of equipment • Display of the hour , date, ambient temperature...

➁

➀

➂

• Connect the BCU ➁ to EIB bus by EIB connector • Screw the assembly plate with BCU on anchoring box ➀ • Clip the front face ➂ to the BCU.

tebis TX

This different information is parametered through the “Adjustments” and “Configuration” mode included in the product.

ambient controller

Central screen

Sensory keys


6.31

Time Switches Technical Specifications

Main Characteristics

Electrical characteristics • Supply : 30 V DC bus EIB • TX 022 : consumption : max. 9,5 mA • TX 023 : consumption : max. 10 mA

• Product delivered set to current hour and day • Automatic changing of summer / winter time • Programming key for permanent exemptions for copying or safeguard of the programme • Programming by day or group of days • 56 step of program On, Off, 1 sec to 30 mn or dimming • Permanent manual On or Off (fixed), • Temporary manual On or Off that can be parametered by configuration tools • Temporary exemptions On or Off (flashing), • Vacation mode: forcing On or Off between two dates • Presence simulation Bar chart displaying daily profile • Possibility of locking the key • Programmable off-voltage • DCF sycnhronization (TX023 ONLY) • Possible display of date and hour on the bus

Working characteristics • Programming capacity : 56 steps to be distributed over the two channels • Minimum time between 2 steps : 1 minute • Start precision : 5 1.5 sec / 24h • Start reserve : lithium battery cell (battery life 5 years) • The product is placed in home position (display switched off) after 1 minute of voltage absence. It returns to Auto mode immediately on return of the voltage or on pressing on a key. • Protection index : IP 20 Environment • Working temperature: -5 to +45 °C • Storage temperature : -20 to +70 °C

Product presentation

Connection with Cage Terminals • Flexible : 1 to 6mm2 • Rigid : 1.5 to 10mm2

1

Reset • Of the programme: it can be fully reset by simultaneous press on the following 3 keys: menu, ok and. The time and date are maintained. • Total : by simultaneous press on the keys +, -, menus, ok and All the product content is deleted. After a total reset, it is necessary to reset the clock switch to hour and day.

auto prog

new modif

Off On 0

6

12

18

24

+

2 1

ok

menu

4

2 A B

3 4

menu : selection of the functioning mode auto : functioning as per the programme established prog : new for programming prog : modification to modify or delete a programme existing step : display of the programme : modification of hour, date and choice of the summer/winter time changing mode / : adjustment of vacation + et - : navigation or adjustment of values : in Auto mode, selection of vmanual, exemptions or unpredictable functioning OK : validate the flashing info : come back to the previous step5

You can go to Auto mode at any time with the menu key. If no action is done for 1 min, the switch returns to Auto mode.

AI1_EG103E_T3_05

6.32


Light Sensitive Switches TX 025 Twilight Switch Function This product is intended for automatic control of lighting, of shutters and blinds according to the measured light intensity. When set lux level is reached, the order of control is transmitted via the Bus to output modules. Electrical characteristics Supply 30 V SELV Bus • Time delay at the initialisation : 30s • Adjustment range : 2-200 and 200-2000 lux • ON / OFF in Manu mode

Auto / Manual / Test Switch

TX 025 auto

Signalling light of level overrun

test

Calibre selection light

Push button Push button and physical addressing LED

6

8

Bus 30 V

Environment • Working temperature : 0 °C to +45 °C • Storage : -20 °C to +70 °C Connection Capacity : • Flexible : 12 to 62 • Rigid : 1.52 to 102

Potentiometer adjustment of the light intensity level

Light intensity cell EE002 or EE003

Several TX Channels TX 025 6

Overall Size • Size : 2 Modules

6

TX 025 8

6

8

EE 002/EE 003

Bus 30 V

TX 025 : product with cell

TX 025 : product without cell

It is possible to adjust a level by photocell switch. The light intensity measurement is carried out by a unique probe connected to a TX025 which retransmits the value of light intensity to other TX025 on the system via the EIB Bus.

TG051 Weather Station Function Provides the control level of the following data : rain, wind, sunshine and temperature. The information about excess is available on relay contacts. The TG051 can be used in an autonomous or integrated manner in the tebis system by using input modules. The weather station contains an interpretation unit and a sensor block with : • SOUTH, WEST, EAST sun sensor • Rain sensor with heating element being started below 10°C • DCF 77 receiver • Wind sensor (electronic measurement with hybrid component) • Internal / external temperature cell • Rain and wind parameters are delayed by 5 min., at the start • Sun parameter adjustable with 0-99min, time delay at the start/ stop from 1klux to 99 klux • Cell parameter of 1-50 lux (at step from 1) and 50-990 lux (at step from 10).

Environment • Working temperature : 0 °C to +45 °C Probe : -30 °C to +50 °C (IP65) • Storage temperature : -20 °C +70 °C Connection • Flexible : 1mm2 to 6mm2 • Rigid : 1.5mm2 to 10mm2, sensor 3 x 0.75 Overall Size • Size : 6 Modules Electrical Connection

display screen 2 x 16 digits

PRG

+

OK

—

Technical Specifications Electrical Characteristics • System supply: 230 V/50 Hz • Power dissipated: 2 W • Programmer: 5 programs / day / output • Synchronization : antenna DCF • Contacts: 8 relay outputs

230 V/50 Hz L1 N PE CO R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 1 2 3 B1 B2 R7 R8

sensor blocks

R7

R8

L1 : phase 230 V / 50 Hz N : Neutral PE : Earth or ground CO : Common output relays R1 : Relays 1 R8 : Relays 8 1 : 2 : Sensor block 3 : B1- B2 : Probe of interior temperature KTY81-210

probe of internal temperature


6.33

tebis TX

Probe Use double insulated cable for wiring of the EE003 surface mounted cell or for lengthening the cable of the EE002 flush mounted cell. Max. distance : 100m

TX 025 8

Presence Detectors Technical Specification

Presentation

15

3

test

10 min

5 1

15

30

60 45

10

5 min 30s

-

1

2 30

ON/OFF Switching Communication with light intensity level Adjustment to light intensity level

4

1

30V bus EIB, 12mA ON/OFF switching -

4 5 lux

Supply Channel 1/Channel 2 Channel 1 Light intensity

TX511 Presence detector EIB/KNX light regulator 6

TX510 Presence detector EIB/KNX TOR

On

Type

3

Light

OFF: Auto ON: Movement Consumption < 0.2W Working Temperature 0ºC to +45ºC Storage Temperature -10ºC to +60ºC Protection Index IP41 Connection By TG008 connector Size 110 x 44mm

2 6

5

Function • Lighting time delay adjusted by potentiometer : 1 to 30min. • Period of presence adjusted by potentiometer : 30s to 60min. • Brightness range : 5 to 1200 lux • System height : 2.5m to 3.5m Adjustment of Light Intensity Level

1 2 3 4 5 6 ON

5 100 200 300 500 800 Measurement of light intensity inactive

Equivalent in a Building Circulation Circulation. WC Work plan Office Class room laboratory -

Position (1...6) do not take into account the environment (office, furniture).

31

Light Intensity in Lux

60

28

Position

➀ Potentiometer adjusting of the lighting time delay ➁ Potentiometer adjusting of the light intensity level ➂ Potentiometer adjusting of the presence output (TX510 only) ➃ VI signalling light ➄ Detection lens ➅ Sensor for light intensity measurement

110

Y

X

Y

X

H X Y

2.5m 13 7

3m 15.5 8

3.5m 18 9

X=1 Y=7 pour taill 6.34


Output Products for Lighting The output modules TXA 204C, TXA 206A/B/C et TXA 207C have 4, 6 or 10 independent outputs (free of potential) to carry out the following controls : • ON/OFF • Time delays ON or OFF of 1 second to 12 hours • Priority settings start or stop • Sophisticated time lag switch 1 sec. to 24 hours

TXA206A No of outputs, In

In “Auto” mode, the start and stop orders come from the input modules of tebis. In “Manual” mode , these controls are accessible by the push-buttons in front of the module (priority setting). These products are configured with tool TX100B or by ETS Software* *additional functions : heating application with TXA 204C and TXA 206A/B/C/D.

TXA204C

TXA206D

TXA207C

6 outputs, 4A

TXA206B TXA206C 6 outputs, 10A

4 or 6 outputs, 16A capacitive loads

6 outputs, 16A

10 outputs, 16A

800W 800VA 800VA 800W

1200W 1200VA 1000VA 1000W

2300W 1600VA 1200VA 1200W

2300W 1600VA 1200VA 1200W

12 x 36W 6 x 23W Bus 30V DC 1W 0ºC to +45ºC -20ºC to +70ºC IP30 4 Modules 0.75 to 2.5mm2



2300W 1600VA 1200VA 1200W 1500W with 200µf 20 x 36W 18 x 23W Bus 30V DC 12W 0ºC to +45ºC -20ºC to +70ºC IP30 4 Modules 0.75 to 2.5mm2


Electrical Connection TXA204C 4 Outputs

TXA206A/B/C/D 6 Outputs

Ph N

Ph N

Auto / Manu commutator Folding label holder

Test point voltage presence LED for state indication

Auto / Manu commutator

Control button for manual mode

Folding label holder

Test point voltage presence LED for state indication Control button for manual mode

Physical light addressing


TXA204C 4 Outputs L1 L2 L3 N Test point voltage presence Auto / Manu commutator Folding label holder

LED for state indication Control button for manual mode Physical light addressing

Note: Each output has a volt-free contact whose terminals are laid in a crossing way upstream/downstream and labelled by a contact number C1, C2. The outputs contacts of the modules can be used in a single-phase or three-phase installation.


6.35

tebis TX

Breaking Capacity : • Incandescent and halogen 230 V • Halogen ELV ferromagnetic transformer • Halogen ELV electronic transformer • Non compensated fluorescent tubes • Parallel compensated fluorescent tubes • Fluorescent tubes for electronic ballast • Compact fluorescent lamps Supply of the module Maximum dissipation Working temperature Storage temperature Degree of protection Width of the module Connection

Dimmers Technical Characteristics Dimmers The tebis dimming offer includes: • Dimmers with direct output 300, 600 or 1000 W • Units with 1 or 3 outputs Dimmers with Direct Output Completely renewed, this extended range integrates the new design and the quick connect system. It includes the following products: • TXA 213 : 3 outputs 300 W • TXA 210 : 1 output 600 W • TXA 215 : 1 output 1000 W • TXA210A : 1 output 300W These products allow the direct connection of the incandescent LV or ELV halogen loads. They adapt automatically with the type of connected load and have an integrated overheating and overload protection.

Dimmers 1-10 V : TX 211, TX 214 The modules TX 211 and TX 214 are provided for control by output: • Up to 30 dimmers EV 100 or EV 102, • Up to 25 electronic ballasts at 20mA • Possibility to memorize up to 3 different scene lighting levels. In manual mode, the push-buttons situated on the product allow the priority setting of the outputs when there is supply voltage on the bus. Dimming Principles Only one push-button is needed to select a dimming circuit according to following principle : • 1 brief press = start or stop • 1 long press = increase or decrease At each switching on, the dimmer restores the last stored level, except when scenes are called. The dimming control is also possible with 2 push-buttons: • 1 push-button for start or increase by short or long press • 1 push-button for stop or decrease by short or long press

Other Advantages • Manual control even when bus is disconnected. • Mini/maxi level local setting • Memorizing up to 8 different scene levels of lighting. • Call of present level by priority setting

Technical Characteristics

Number of outputs Dimming range in 230V or in VLV ferromagnetic or electronic transformer Supply Max dissipation of the product Working temperature Storage temperature Degree of protection Width of module Connection

6.36

TXA210A 1 Output 300W

TXA210 1 Output 600W

25 to 600W / 600VA

30V DC + 230V - 50/60Hz 4W 7.5W

TXA213 1 to 3 Output according to selector 20 to 300W / 300VA 20 to 600W / 600VA 20 to 900W / 900VA

TXA215 1 Output 1000W

TXA211 / TXA214 1 or 3 Outputs 1-10V

20 to 1000W / VA

Output 1-10V : Current max. 50mA + contact TOR 16A AC1

9W

10W

9W

0 to +45ºC -20 to +60ºC IP30 1 0.75 to 2.5mm2 with flexible or rigid wire quick connect terminal


-20 to +70ºC

6

4 Flexible: 1 to 6mm2 Rigid: 1.5 to 10mm2

Dimmers Electrical Connection TXA210/TXA215 : 1 Output 600W / 1000W

TXA213 : Single phase 1-3 outputs L N

L N LED for short-circuit and overload indication

LED for overload indication

LED for state indication

Auto/Manu communicator

LED for short-circuit and overload indication

LED for overload indication

LED for state indication Control button for manual mode


Control button for manual mode



Commutator 3 positions : - 3 x 300 W - 1 x 600 W + 1 x 300 W - 1 x 900 W

tebis TX

Functions and setting available on TXA 215 • Display of the dimming level • Dimming rise time from 0 to 100% adjustable from 1s to 60s (4s by default) • Dimming start and stop time adjustable from 0s to 30min • Setting of minimum dimming threshold : 1% per default • Setting of maximum dimming threshold : 100% per default • Setting of reached transition time for call of scenario of 0s to 9h59min

Plot dimmers TX211 L N

1 3 5 T 211

7 9 11 13 15

1 3 5 7 9 11

u

V 100 V 102

6

Bus 30 V

TBTS

8 10 12 14 16

1 10V 1 10V

1 3 5 TX 211


Visualisation of output state 6

Bus 30 V

Fluorescent tube

min max

2 4 6 8 10 12

EV100 EV102

Electronic ballast

7 9 11 13 15

auto

8 10 12 14 16

1 10 V

Push-button for priority setting of the ways

TBTS

AI3_TS


6.37

Temperature Control Actuator Thermostat Product Ref. Dimensions Detection Range Temperature Grade Comfort mode Standby Night time mode Frost preventing mode Bus Connection Ambient Temperature Storage Operation Extra Input End

TX320 80 x 84 x 28mm 0º to +40ºC

Select switch for operation mode / display button Comfort mode Standby mode Night time mode Frost preventing mode

10ºC to 28ºC (parameter adjustable) 0.5k to 4k comfort temperature 3k to 8k comfort temperature 3º to -10ºC Integrated bus coupler

Red / Blue diode Red = Heating Blue = Cooling Off = Already reached preset temperature Dial to set temperature

-25ºC - +60ºC 0º to +50ºC Bus input end

Heating Valve Controller Product Ref. Dimensions Main Voltage Power Consumption Voltage of Output Terminal Number of Outputs Valve Number of each Output After getting connected, server driving Auto makes interlock Protection Type Connection • Flexible • Passive Ambient Temperature • Storage • Operation

TX206H 75 x 75 x 306mm 230V 50/60Hz (Secondary, 24V) 3W 24V AC 6 Max 4 (for each driver, max 13) 10 min. IP20 Plug-in connecting terminal 1 - 1.5mm2 0.5 - 1.5mm2 -25 to +60ºC 0ºC to 50ºC

Notes of Functions • When network voltage is in function, operation LED will flash. • When operation is failure (safety, failure), safety lED will flash. Professionals shall be invited for inspection. • If the actuator connects the voltage onto startup, function LED will flash.

6.38

Product Ref. Dimensions Main Voltage Valve End Impressing Regulating Force Max Regulating Travel Operating Time Travel Display

TX501 TX502 82 x 50 x 65mm Bus 30V DC (Secondary 24V) Auto > 120N 6mm (linear motion)